DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - IDEAS-EC

RED FIR MAINTENANCE FACILITYHVAC CONVERSION TO PROPANESEQUOIA NATIONAL PARKTECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSNational Park ServicePacific Western RegionPrepared by:Chris Carpenter, PMPSequoia National Park Project ManagerDecember 2009

TABLE OF CONTENTSSEQUOIA NATIONAL PARKRED FIR HVAC CONVERSION TO PROPANEDIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS01110 Summary of Work01120 Natural Features Protection01270 Definition of Bid Items01310 Project Meetings01330 Submittals01350 Archeological Protection01360 Accident Prevention01420 Reference Standards01430 Contractor Quality Control01510 Temporary Services01520 Field Offices and Sheds01560 Barriers01570 Temporary Controls01600 Material and Equipment01720 Field Engineering01770 Project Closeout01785 Operation and Maintenance DataDIVISION 2 - SITE WORK02072 Demolition02110 Site Clearing02220 Removal of Paved Area Excavation & Backfill02224 Selective Demolition02316 Paved Area Excavation & Backfill02318 Structural Excavation & Backfill02320 Utility Trenching and Backfilling02332 Watering02370 Soil Retention Blanket02502 Utility Line Marking02503 Restoration of Surfaces02510 Pavement and Concrete Curbs02725 Aggregate Base Course02743 Asphalt Concrete Pavement02831 Vinyl Coated Fence02855 BollardsTOC-112/09 TABLE OF CONENTS

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete03306 Concrete for UtilitiesDIVISION 9 – FINISHES09900 PaintingDIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL15050 Basic Material & Methods15060 Pipe and Pipe Fittings: General Statement15062 Pipe: Ductile Iron15064 Pipe: Plastic (PVC) Pressure15070 Vibration Isolation15078 Pipe: Polyethylene15090 Pipe Support Systems15100 Valves: General Statement15101 Gate Valves15106 Check Valves15114 Special Valves15130 In-Line Pumps15200 Flow Meters15360 Propane Gas Distribution Systems15400 Plumbing Systems15480 Propane Gas Storage Systems15500 Hydronic Systems15510 Boilers15851 Air Outlets & Intakes15915 Electric Controls15952 Testing & Balancing HVAC SystemsDIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL16010 General Electrical Provisions16050 Basic Materials and Methods16060 Grounding16131 Electrical Pull Boxes16210 Electric Service16401 Underground Secondary16420 Control System16420 Motor ControlsTOC-212/09 TABLE OF CONENTS

SECTION 01110SUMMARY OF WORKPART 1GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this contract is divided into a base bid and bid options that consist of:B. Base Bid – The demolition of existing two each 4,000 gallon heating oil tanks, one that supports Red FirMaintenance Facility Shops Building, and one that supports Red Fir Maintenance Facility StorageBuilding; includes all permits, testing, hauling and disposal outside the park and remediation of site. Theinstallation of a 9,200 gallon propane tank to include commissioning and permitting; includes theinstallation of security fence, bollards and safety signs/equipment. The installation of a remote bulk fuelfill station and manual vapor recovery shut off; both to be located approximately 200LF 30” top of pipefrom the tank; also includes a second backup supply line to each boiler capped at grade for future backupuse. Includes the trenching, bedding, paving, mechanical piping and appurtenances from new tank toremote bulk fuel station, supply to shops building, supply to storage building for an approximate total of750LF of mechanical trenching. Demolition of two existing 1/2M BTU boilers from respective mechanicalrooms in the shops and storage buildings. Includes furnishing all materials, equipment, and labor to installnew 1/2M BTU pulse combustion hyronic boilers manufactured by Fulton (Model: PHW-500) or approvedequivalent. Includes all mechanical piping and appurtenances from entrance of propane fuel line into thebuildings to the boilers and to fully commission boiler and associated system. Demolition of existing102kW heating oil generator and transport to Ash Mountain automotive shop. Includes furnishing allmaterials, equipment, and labor to install and commission new 80kW propane Kohler generator (Model:80RZG) or equivalent in same generator room; additionally includes permitting with San Joaquin AirDistrict. Includes installation of 1,000 gallon propane tank approximately 150LF from building to includetrenching and installation of mechanicals and appurtenances at 48” top of pipe with a second backuppropane line stubbed out at grade for future backup use. Includes protective bollards and drainage grades.The project includes the design of all associated scope of work within the project by California registerProfessional Engineer. Includes wet seal on design drawings to be approved the contracting officer priorto construction and wet seal on close out as-built drawings; includes hard copy and digital CAD files.Bid Option 1 – Includes installation of a free standing steel cover over the gas/diesel tankslocated at the Red Fir Maintenance Facility. Design criteria of 250psf for snow loading, andseismic zone 4.Bid Option 2 – Includes use of two trailer pads will full service hook ups located two miles fromthe project site at Clover Creek Terrace. Contractor will pay for pads at a cost of approximate of$800/month, deduct includes money saved in commute time of 1 hour and 15 minutes from ThreeRivers CA with associated labor and fuel costs, and price difference between Wuksachi Lodge andtrailer pads.1 .2 WORK SEQUENCE01110-112/09 SUMMARY OF WORK

1. Install new 9,200 gallon propane tank to include bulk fill and all supply lines to the shopsand storage buildings.2. Install all building interior pipe from exterior trench to mechanical room boilers.3. Install new 1,000 gallon tank to include trenching and pipe to generator room.4. Replace both boilers.5. Replace the generator.6. Remove and remediate 4,000 gallon heating oil tanks.7. Install steel cover over gas/diesel tanks – bid option #1.8. Owner training & close out1 .3 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISESA. Construction Camp: Establishment of a camp within the park will not be permitted.B. Trailer pads may be available for use by contractor during construction.C. Contractor shall conduct operations to ensure the least inconvenience to the public. Contractorshall not close access to the park during construction.D. Confine placement of temporary offices, and storage of material, machinery, and miscellaneousequipment to the area designated on the construction drawings. Materials and machinery shall notbe stored in any other location within the park unless authorized by the Contracting Officer.E. Preservation of Natural Features: Confine all operations to work limits of the project. Preventdamage to natural surroundings. Restore areas that have been damaged as a result of constructionactivity, repairing or replacing damaged trees and plants, at no additional expense to theGovernment.1. Provide temporary barriers to protect existing trees, plants, and root zones.2. Do not remove, injure, or destroy trees or other plants without prior approval. Consultwith Contracting Officer and remove agreed-on roots and branches that interfere withconstruction.3. Tree roots greater than 4-inches in diameter shall be trenched under and left unaffectedby water line construction.4. Do not fasten ropes, cables, or guys to existing trees.5. Carefully supervise excavating, grading, filling, and other construction operations neartrees to prevent damage.F. Existing Utilities: Notify Contracting Officer of proposed locations and times for excavation.1. Contractor shall be responsible for locating and preventing damage to known utilities. Ifdamage occurs, repair utility at no additional expense to the Government.01110-212/09 SUMMARY OF WORK

2. If damage occurs to an unknown utility, repair utility. An equitable adjustment will bemade in accordance with the Changes clause of the contract.3. Interruption of Existing Utility Service:a. Contractor shall maintain updated schedule of areas and categories of work and shallprovide not less than 48-hour notice of any shutdowns or interruptions of utilityservice. All service interruptions shall be coordinated with, and authorized by, theContracting Officer. Any work performed outside of normal working hours (i.e.nights and weekends) to mitigate the impact of service interruptions shall also beauthorized by the Contracting Officer.b. Throughout the entire construction period, the Contractor shall schedule Work andprovide temporary facilities, electrical power and control circuits, and by-pass pipingto minimize utility shutdown. Shutdowns shall be approved by the ContractingOfficer and shall not exceed two (2) hours.G. Entrance Road Transport and Hauling Restrictions:a. Coordinate with COR/COTR for all oversized deliveries and equipment.1 .4 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTSA. Holiday Work Restrictions: No on-site work shall be performed on National Holidays unlessotherwise approved by the Contracting Officer.B. Working Days: Normal working days shall be Monday through Friday, 8:00 a.m. to 4:30 p.m.Two-way traffic shall be restored at the end of each working day. No work shall be performed onSaturday or Sunday unless approved by the Contracting Officer.C. Equipment and Imported Materials:1. All equipment shall be clean prior to entering the park. The Contracting Officer willinspect all equipment upon arrival to ensure that it is weed and seed free. Any equipmentnot deemed to be clean by the Contracting Officer shall immediately be removed fromthe park by the Contractor and cleaned.2. All imported materials to be placed at depth less than 3’0” requires weed-free certificate,including but not necessarily limited to pipe bedding, gravel backfill, aggregate base, andnative grass seed.1 .5 FIELD VERIFICATIONA. Field verify all new and existing dimensions affecting the work of this contract before orderingproducts. Locations shown on drawings are approximate.1 .6 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALSA. All materials, including borrow and aggregates, shall be Contractor-furnished from outside thepark.1 .7 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS01110-312/09 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Prior to Mobilization1. Safety Plan2. Quality Control Plan3. Erosion Control Plan4. Construction Schedule5. Bond & Insurance6. Certified Payroll (with each payment application)7. Substitutions Request & Deviations from Staging Areas8. System Design9. Materials & EquipmentB. Close Out1. Permit to Operate2. O & M’s3. Owner Training & Tank Manufactures Inspection4. Red Line Drawings5. As-Builts6. Lab Reports7. Generator Commissioning & Permit8. Permit to Operate9. Contractor Daily Reports10. Release of Claims – Final Billing & Certified PayrollPART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED.PART 3EXECUTIONSCHEDULE3 .1 TemplateTASKDURATIONContract AwardX01110-412/09 SUMMARY OF WORK

Submittals X + 30Design Approval X + 35Pre-Construction Meeting X + 40Mobilization X + 45Construction Complete X + 135Close Out Complete X + 175END OF SECTION01110-512/09 SUMMARY OF WORK

SECTION 01120NATURAL FEATURES PROTECTIONPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of protection of vegetation and native soils to be retained withinand adjacent to the perimeter work limits of this project. This section also consists of evaluationprocesses and mitigation measures in the event of tree damage, casualty, or removal andunauthorized passage outside authorized work limits.1 .2 PLANT CONDITION INVENTORYA. Prior to the placement of all fencing, barricades and tree wrap and any excavation operations, theContractor and Contracting Officer together shall perform an on-site inventory of trees and othernatural features in the entire project site to include survey of creek area for sensitive species. Aprint of the contract document site plan will be used to note placement and condition of existingtrees. Previous damage to trees and vegetation shall be noted. This site plan print shall beretained by the Contracting Officer for use during the final walk-through tree assessmentscheduled during the project closeout.1 .3 SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01330.B. Shop drawings or manufacturers literature for fencing.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 WORK LIMITS - CONSTRUCTION ZONE WARNING TAPEA. Banner Guard construction zone warning tape, imprinted with "CAUTION: CONSTRUCTIONAREA", manufactured by Reef Industries, Inc., Houston, Texas, or approved equal.2 .2 CONSTRUCTION FENCINGA. Four-foot high orange plastic mesh construction fencing.B. 6-foot steel posts.2 .3 TREE TRUNK PROTECTIONA. Four-foot high wood-lathe snow fencing.2 .4 TEMPORARY BARRICADEA. Four-foot high orange plastic mesh construction fencing.B. 6-foot steel posts.01120-102/08 NATURAL FEATURES PROTECTION

3 PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 WORK LIMITS - CONSTRUCTION ZONE WARNING TAPEA. Install where necessary to maintain work limits as shown, and as requested by the ContractingOfficer. Keep a minimum of two rolls on site at all times. Tape shall not be substituted forfencing.3 .2 PROTECTION INSTALLATIONA. Provide temporary work limit fencing, tree trunk wrap, and tree barricades to protect existingtrees, plants and critical root zones as directed by the Contracting Officer. Protections shall be inplace before any excavation work or heavy equipment is allowed on site.3 .3 CONSTRUCTION FENCINGA. Four-foot high orange plastic mesh construction fencing shall be supported securely to steelposts, 5 feet on center, and driven into the ground, installed as directed by the ContractingOfficer.B. Within the perimeter work limits, protect groups of shrubs and small trees and undisturbed soilsas directed by the Contracting Officer with 4-foot-high construction fencing. Firmly anchorfences to the ground a minimum of 2 feet from the nearest plant. Completely and continuouslyenclose areas of trees and shrubs to be protected with fencing.3 .4 TREE TRUNK PROTECTIONA. For isolated trees up to 4 feet dbh (diameter breast height) within the work limits, provide treetrunk protection as directed by the Contracting Officer.B. Wrap wood lathe snow fencing continuously around the circumference of the trunk from the baseto a height of not less than 6 feet. Wrap shall be a minimum of two layers. Fence wrap shall besecured around the trunk by three strands of jute or other natural fiber rope around top, middleand bottom of the tree trunk protection. No anchoring or nailing in trees will be allowed.3 .5 PROTECTION MAINTENANCEA. Only after all tree and plant protection has been installed, and the Contracting Officer hasinspected and given written approval of the tree and plant protection, will the Contractor beallowed to begin excavation. All tree and plant protection shall be maintained throughout theduration of this project.B. If any fencing, barriers, staking or marking, which designates protected areas, limits ofdemolition or work limits, is knocked down, moved or destroyed, the Contractor will immediatelymove the work operation to another area, wholly or in part, or suspend work operations, until thefence or other protection is repaired to the Contracting Officer's satisfaction at the Contractor'sexpense. Time lost due to such stoppage will not be considered basis for adjustment ofcompletion date nor additional payment.C. Parking vehicles and storing materials or supplies shall be confined to areas designated as stagingareas on the plans or as specifically approved by Contracting Officer. Vehicle and materialstorage activities are strictly prohibited from protected and fenced sensitive soil and vegetationareas.01120-202/08 NATURAL FEATURES PROTECTION

D. Fastening ropes, cables, or guys to existing trees and disposing of materials including, but notlimited to paint, paint thinner, fiberglass materials, fiberglass thinners, concrete or cementresidue, washings from cement or concrete mixers or any other material considered harmful bythe Contracting Officer is prohibited anywhere in the project area.E. Do not remove, injure, or destroy trees or other plants without prior approval of the ContractingOfficer. Consult with the Contracting Officer and remove agreed upon roots and branches thatinterfere with excavation or pipe placement. All pruning of canopy or cutting of roots will bedone under the supervision of the Contracting Officer, and shall be done as set forth by theNational Arborist Association or the International Society of Arboriculture.F. If within the critical root zone, excavate with hand tools. Estimate the crucial root zone bymeasuring the tree’s diameter at 4.5-feet above the ground. Allow 1.5-feet of critical root radiusfor every inch of diameter measured.G. At project completion, the Contractor shall remove all protections and properly dispose of orrecycle them.3 .6 PLANT APPRAISALA. If the Contractor destroys or injures trees and shrubs designated for protection or outside of theperimeter work limits, the Contractor will be assessed damages prior to final progress payment.B. Replacement costs for damaged vegetation will be computed according to the method describedin the International Society of Arboriculture's 1992 Guide for Plant Appraisal. This method isbased on the cost of the largest commonly available tree or shrub, with modifications based onspecies value, condition and location. A trained arborist or professional plant appraiser from theCalifornia region will be hired by the Contractor to make the damage appraisal. The arborist'sfees will be included in the damage assessment. The damage assessment will be done as thedamage occurs.C. The damage appraisal process will be triggered by any of the following types of damage tovegetation outside of the perimeter work limits or fenced or otherwise protected areas of soil orvegetation within the perimeter work limits:1. Removal of any tree or shrub.2. Pruning or removal of more than 30% of a tree or shrub canopy.3. Removal or fracture of a limb or trunk that is one of the major structural entities of theplant.4. Removal or fracture of any limb greater than 12 inches in diameter.5. Bark damage or removal around more than 20% of the trunk circumference.6. Trenching or soil disturbance within the critical root zone that is deeper than 6 inches.7. If the damaged vegetation is protected under the Endangered Species Act or other speciallegislation, additional penalties may be assessed.8. Pruning or removal of vegetation when authorized and supervised by the ContractingOfficer is excepted from these penalties.01120-302/08 NATURAL FEATURES PROTECTION

D. Minor cuts and damaged areas shall be treated in accordance with tree and plant repair practicesspecified by the National Arborist Association, the International Society of Arboriculture, or aqualified arborist.3 .7 PLANT APPRAISAL METHOD (TRUNK FORMULA METHOD)A. The following sample appraisal is based on the Trunk Formula Method, established by theInternational Society of Arboriculture, in 1992. This formula can be applied to trees and verylarge shrubs, or multi-stemmed trees. It is based on the size, species, condition and location ofthe plant that was injured or destroyed.1. Size: For the purpose of appraisal, size is determined by the area of trunk, usually atbreast height (or 4.5 feet), calculated by diameter or circumference measurement.Example for a 24" diameter trunk: 24" divided by 2 = 12" radius, X = 3.14, Xr²= area ofa circle, 3.14(12²) = 452"2. Modifications to measuring technique will occur in the case of multi-stemmed trees, treeswith major branches lower than breast height, etc.3. Species: A rating is given for each species, depending on the region in which it is living.The International Society of Arboriculture has a number of regional chapters that havegenerated species rating lists. Ratings are based on some of the following factors: climateadaptability, growth characteristics, soil adaptability, resistance to disease and insects,maintenance requirements, aesthetic and general functional values, and rarity.4. Condition: A rating is given for the general condition of the plant which involves healthand structural integrity. See the "Guide to Judging Plant Condition", following.5. Location: A rating is given for the location of the plant and includes site, placement, andfunctional and aesthetic contributions.B. The Trunk Formula Method is based on the following equation:Appraised Value = Basic Value x Condition x LocationBasic Value = Replacement Cost + (Basic Price x [TA A - TA R ]) x Species1. Replacement Cost = maximum size commonly available from local or regional nurseries,usually around 4" diameter. The cost includes the average cost (from 3 nurseries, min.),transportation and installation, guarantee and profit.2. Basic Price = cost per unit of trunk area of replacement tree (cost may be wholesale,retail, or installed).3. TA A = Trunk area at breast height of tree being appraised.4. TA R = Trunk area at 12" from base of largest commonly available tree.5. Species, Condition and Location = ratings of the appraised tree.END OF SECTION01120-402/08 NATURAL FEATURES PROTECTION

SECTION 01270DEFINITION OF BID ITEMSPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The intent of this section is to explain, in general, what is and what is not included in a bid item,and the limits or cut-off points where one bid item ends and another begins.B. If no bid item exists for a portion of the work, include the costs in a related bid item with note,include omissions & value engineering in attached written test with bid schedule.C. Complete attached bid schedule.1 .2 BASE BIDA. BID ITEM NO. 1 – MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION: This bid item includesmobilizing and demobilizing all required equipment and construction materials to and from thesite to include accommodations during construction to include accommodations incurred bycontractor to complete the project (hotel, food, ect.).B. BID ITEM NO. 2 – DEMOLITION OF EXISITNG 2EA 4,000 GALLON HEATING OILTANKS: This bid item includes furnishing all equipment and labor for demolition of existing twoeach 4,000 gallon heating oil tanks, one that supports Red Fir Maintenance Facility ShopsBuilding, and one that supports Red Fir Maintenance Facility Storage Building. Includes allpermits, testing, hauling and disposal outside the park and remediation of site.C. BID ITEM NO. 3 – INSTALLATION OF A NEW 9,200 GALLON PROPANE TANK: This biditem includes furnishing all materials, equipment, and labor for installation of a 9,200 gallonpropane tank to include commissioning and permitting. Includes the installation of securityfence, bollards and safety signs/equipment. Includes the installation of a remote bulk fuel fillstation and manual vapor recovery shut off; both to be located approximately 200LF 30” top ofpipe from the tank; also includes a second backup supply line to each boiler capped at grade forfuture backup use. Includes the trenching, bedding, paving, mechanical piping and appurtenancesfrom new tank to remote bulk fuel station, supply to shops building, supply to storage buildingfor an approximate total of 750LF of mechanical trenching.D. BID ITEM NO. 4 – DEMO AND INSTALLATION OF TWO EXISTING BOILERS: This biditem includes furnishing all materials, equipment, and labor to demo two existing 1/2M BTUboilers from respective mechanical rooms in the shops and storage buildings. Includes furnishingall materials, equipment, and labor to install new 1/2M BTU pulse combustion hyronic boilersmanufactured by Fulton (Model: PHW-500) or approved equivalent. Includes all mechanicalpiping and appurtenances from entrance of propane fuel line into the buildings to the boilers andto fully commission boiler and associated system.E. BID ITEM NO. 5 – DEMOLITION OF EXISTING 102Kw GENERATOR, REPLACE WITHNEW 80Kw GENERATOR WITH ASSOICATED DEDICATED FUEL SUPPLY: This bid itemincludes furnishing all materials, equipment, and labor to demo existing 102kW heating oilgenerator and transport to Ash Mountain automotive shop. Includes furnishing all materials,equipment, and labor to install and commission new 80kW propane Kohler generator (Model:80RZG) or equivalent in same generator room; additionally includes permitting with San Joaquin01270-112/09 DEFINITION OF BID ITEMS

Air District. Includes installation of 1,000 gallon propane tank approximately 150LF frombuilding to include trenching and installation of mechanicals and appurtenances at 48” top of pipewith a second backup propane line stubbed out at grade for future backup use. Includesprotective bollards and drainage grades.F. BID ITEM NO. 6 – ENGINEERING: This bid item includes design of all associated scope ofwork within the project by California register Professional Engineer. Includes wet seal on designdrawings to be approved the contracting officer prior to construction and wet seal on close out asbuiltdrawings; includes hard copy and digital CAD files.1 .3 BID OPTIONSA. BID ITEM NO. 7 (OPTION #1) – PROVIDE STEEL FREE STANDING COVER OVER THEGAS/DIESEL TANKS LOCATED ADJACENT TO THE LOCATION FOR THE NEW PROPANETANK. This bid item includes furnishing all materials, equipment, and labor for installation of afree standing steel cover over the gas/diesel tanks located at the Red Fir Maintenance Facility.Design criteria of 250psf for snow loading, and seismic zone 4.B. BID ITEM NO. 8 (OPTION #2) – DEDUCT TO USE TRAILER PADS. This bid item includesuse of two trailer pads will full service hook ups located two miles from the project site at CloverCreek Terrace. Contractor will pay for pads at a cost of approximate of $800/month, deductincludes money saved in commute time of 1 hour and 15 minutes from Three Rivers CA withassociated labor and fuel costs, and price difference between Wuksachi Lodge and trailer pads.PART 2 PRODUCTSNOT USED.PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED.01270-212/09 DEFINITION OF BID ITEMS

SECTION 01310PROJECT MEETINGSPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCEA. Before start of construction, Contracting Officer will arrange an on-site meeting with Contractor.The meeting agenda will include the following as a minimum:1. Correspondence procedures2. Designation of responsible personnel3. Labor standards provisions4. Payroll reports5. Changes6. Payments to Contractor7. Subcontractors8. National Park Service regulations9. Accident prevention program (including name of responsible supervisor)10. Accident reporting11. Documents required under the contract12. Park rules and regulations13. Recycling Program14. Saturday, Sunday, holiday and night work15. Cultural Survey and Natural Resource Compliance requirements for off-site, noncommercialborrow pits (compliance with "Cultural Resources Survey" clause of theGeneral Provisions).16. Tentative construction schedule17. Submittal of shop drawings, project data, samples, and approved equals18. Project closeout requirements19. Relationship of Division 1 to other divisions01310-102/08 PROJECT MEETINGS

1 .2 PROGRESS MEETINGSA. The Contracting Officer will schedule weekly meetings with the Contractor and subcontractors.B. Subcontractors will not be allowed to work until they have attended a meeting.C. Additional meetings will be held as needed or for new subcontractors.D. The meeting agenda will include the following as a minimum:1. Approval of minutes of previous meetings2. Review of work progress3. Field observations, problems, and decisions4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules7. Status of project record drawings (monthly)8. Status of operation and maintenance data manuals (monthly)9. Maintenance of progress schedule10. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules11. Planned progress during succeeding work period12. Coordination of projected progress13. Maintenance of quality and work standards14. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination15. Other business relating to workPART 2 PRODUCTSNOT USED.PART 3 EXECUTIONNOT USED.END OF SECTIONPMIS 92542/122158 01310-202/08 PROJECT MEETINGS

SECTION 01330SUBMITTALSPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of submittal requirements before and during construction.1 .2 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Closeout submittals - Section 01770.1 .3 SUBMITTAL AND APPROVAL PROCEDURESA. All submittals shall be transmitted using National Park Service form DSC-1(CS), dated 11/95. (Acopy of the form is included at the end of this section.) No action will be taken on a submittalitem unless accompanied by the transmittal form.B. As specified in the individual sections, forward submittals to Contracting Officer at least 30 daysbefore need for approval. Unless a different number is specified, submit one reproducible originaland two copies of each shop drawing, three copies of manufacturer's catalog sheets (cut sheets),three specimens of each sample, and three copies of all other submittals requested.1. Shop Drawings: Include the following information with each copy of shop drawings:a. Date.b. Date of revisions (when applicable).c. Contractor's certification that shop drawing has been checked for compliancewith contract documents.d. Details of fabrication, assembly and erection including connections andengagement to contiguous work.e. Materials used.f. All required dimensions.g. The term "by others" shall not be used. All work to be performed by others shallbe identified by Contractor or subcontractor name, discipline, or trade.2. Samples: Samples shall be large enough to illustrate clearly the functional characteristicsand full range of color, texture, or pattern.3. Manufacturers' Catalog Sheets: Submit only pertinent pages; mark each copy of standardprinted data to identify specific products proposed for use.01330-111/07 SUBMITTALS

4. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: When contract documents require compliancewith manufacturer's printed instructions, provide one complete set of instructions forContracting Officer and keep another complete set of instructions at the project site untilsubstantial completion.C. Contracting Officer reserves the right to require submittals in addition to those called for inindividual sections.D. Approved Equals:1. For each item proposed as an "approved equal," submit supporting data, including:a. Drawings and samples as appropriate.b. Comparison of the characteristics of the proposed item with that specified.c. Changes required in other elements of the work because of the substitution.d. Name, address, and telephone number of vendor.e. Manufacturer's literature regarding installation, operation, and maintenance,including schematics for electrical and hydraulic systems, lubricationrequirements, and parts lists. Describe availability of maintenance service, andstate source of replacement materials.2. A request for approval constitutes a representation that Contractor:a. Has investigated the proposed item and determined that it is equal or superior inall respects to that specified.b. Will provide the same warranties for the proposed item as for the item specified.c. Has determined that the proposed item is compatible with interfacing items.d. Will coordinate the installation of an approved item and make all changesrequired in other elements of the work because of the substitution.e. Waives all claims for additional expenses that may be incurred as a result of thesubstitution.3. Construction Materials: The Contractor is encouraged to submit for approval productsmade out of recycled or environmentally responsible material. Every effort will be madeby the National Park Service to approve these materials.E. Coordinate all submittals and review them for legibility, accuracy, completeness, and compliancewith contract requirements. Forward submittals that are related to or affect one another as apackage to facilitate coordinated review. Each transmittal shall contain only data specific to thatindividual submittal.F. Submittal Identification:1. Identification shall include the PMIS number, project title, contract number, andtransmittal number.01330-211/07 SUBMITTALS

2. All sets of shop drawings, manufacturer's catalog sheets, samples, and other documentssubmitted to the Contracting Officer must have the identification information stamped onthe submittal.3. Identification information shall be applied to the bottom right margin on each page.Identification information on samples shall be applied to the most readily visible area onthe sample or on tags attached to sample.G. Submittal Numbering:1. Number each submittal consecutively.2. For re-submittals use the original submittal number, plus a letter suffix beginning with A.3. Additional re-submittals of the same item shall contain the original number with the nextconsecutive letter.H. Contracting Officer's Review:1. Submittals will be returned disapproved without technical review if identificationinformation is missing, not filled in, or if placed on the back of the submittal; an incorrectnumber or format of submittals is provided; the transmittal form is incorrectly filled out;submittals are not coordinated; or submittals do not show evidence of Contractor'sapproval.2. Any work done or orders for materials or services placed before approval shall be at theContractor's own risk.3. After reviewing submittals, the Contracting Officer will return one copy of form DSC-1(CS) and one copy of applicable (marked up) submittal sheets to the Contractor. Shopdrawing review notations will be returned on the reproducible original shop drawing. Allother submitted items will be retained. The Contractor is responsible for producingadditional copies for his/her own use.4. The returned submittal will be marked in one of three ways as defined below:a. APPROVED: Acceptable with no corrections.b. APPROVED WITH NOTATIONS: Minor corrections or clarifications required.All comments are clear and no further review is required. The Contractor shalladdress all review comments when proceeding with the work.c. DISAPPROVED - RESUBMIT: Rejected as not in accordance with the contractor as requiring major corrections or clarifications. The Contracting Officer willidentify the reasons for disapproval. The Contractor shall revise and resubmitwith changes clearly identified.PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED.PART 3 EXECUTIONNOT USED.END OF SECTION01330-311/07 SUBMITTALS

TRANSMITTAL - NATIONAL PARK SERVICETransmittal No.:Sheet: 1 of:Park: Project: Contract No.: PMIS No.: Date:Contractor: Subcontractor/Supplier:NPS ACTIONSpecificationSection No.Description of Item(Size, Type, Name, Manufacturer, Use, Etc.)Contractor SignatureRecommended byTitle, Date Title DateI hereby certify that this submittal has been reviewed for accuracy, completeness, andcompliance with contract requirements per the General Provisions (FAR 42.236-21)Review Comments Action By DateContracting Officer’s RepresentativeApproval of this submittal is subject to the provisions of the contract drawings and specifications. This action isfor general concurrence only and the Government is not responsible for errors or omission.SUBMITTAL LOG DATES: From contractor [__________], To reviewer [__________], From reviewer [__________], To Contractor [__________]Distribution: ( ) Contractor ( ) DSC File ( ) COR ( ) A/E ( ) DSC Interim ( ) COR Interim ( ) Contractor Interim DSC-1(CS) Rev. 11/95

TRANSMITTAL CONTINUATION - NATIONAL PARK SERVICETransmittal No.:Sheet: 1 of:Park: Project: Contract No.: PMIS No.: Date:Contractor: Subcontractor/Supplier:NPS ACTIONSpecificationSection No.Description of Item(Size, Type, Name, Manufacturer, Use, Etc.)Review CommentsDSC-1(CS)b Rev. 11/95

SECTION 01350ARCHEOLOGICAL PROTECTIONPART 1 GENERALPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of protecting archeological resources contained in soil deposits.1 .2 DEFINITIONSA. Resources: Prehistoric, historic, and recent 20th century artifacts, including charcoal, humanbones, ash, fire rocks, and building materials that indicate the presence of past human occupation.B. Archeologically Sensitive Areas: Areas that have been determined to contain significant in-thegroundarcheological resources.C. Nonsensitive Areas: Areas that have a low likelihood of containing significant in-the-groundarcheological resources.D. Archeological Monitor: Representative of the Government designated to record and collectcultural resources for compliance with Government regulations to protect in-the-groundresources.1 .3 SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01330B. 30 days before start of ground-disturbing site work, submit a Daily Work Schedule, detailingconstruction work in archeologically sensitive areas. Key schedule to drawings and include thefollowing information.1. Starting and ending dates of ground-disturbing construction.2. Locations of temporary facilities, such as barriers, field offices, staging areas, sanitaryfacilities, borrow pits, and haul and access roads.3. Types of construction, such as clearing, topsoil stripping, structure or trench excavation,landscaping, and post construction clean-up.4. Methods and equipment used for each type of construction.5. Plan for relocating work in the event of temporary work stoppages at eacharcheologically sensitive area.1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. At least one week before on-site work begins, Contractor shall meet with Contracting Officer andArcheological Monitor to discuss Daily Work Schedule and equipment and special methods to be01350-102/08 ARCHEOLOGICAL PROTECTION

used in archeologically sensitive areas. Contractor shall ensure that approved Daily WorkSchedule is followed throughout construction.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 BARRICADESA. Section 01560.PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 BARRICADESA. Construct as specified in Section 01560. Locate as directed by Contracting Officer.3 .2 OBSERVATIONA. Archeological Monitor will observe all ground-disturbing site work, including construction oftemporary facilities, at all archeologically sensitive areas, from a safe location mutually agreed onby Contractor and Monitor. As new ground is broken, Monitor will examine excavated materials,using construction layout centerline and perimeter staking as a reference point to record locationsof findings.3 .3 DISCOVERY OF RESOURCESA. If Archeological Monitor discovers resources, immediate relocation of the work to a nonsensitivearea may be required to allow Monitor to take soil samples and record resources. WhileArcheological Monitor is documenting resources in sensitive areas, Contractor shall relocatework to nonsensitive areas where monitoring is not normally required.B. If resources are discovered while Archeological Monitor is absent, stop work immediately andreport the discovery to the Contracting Officer.3 .4 WORK STOPPAGEA. The Contractor shall plan, schedule, and execute the work to prevent stoppages at one area fromstopping all work at the construction site.END OF SECTION01350-202/08 ARCHEOLOGICAL PROTECTION

SECTION 01360ACCIDENT PREVENTIONPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of establishing an effective accident prevention program andproviding a safe environment for all personnel and visitors.1 .2 SUBMITTALSA. Accident Prevention Program: Before on-site work begins, submit for approval an accidentprevention program. The Contracting Officer will review the proposed program for compliancewith OSHA and project requirements. If the program requires any revisions or corrections, theContractor shall resubmit the program within 10 days. No progress payments will be made untilthe program is approved. The program shall include:1. Name of responsible supervisor to carry out the program.2. Weekly and monthly safety meetings.3. First aid procedures.4. Outline of each phase of the work, the hazards associated with each major phase, and themethods proposed to ensure property protection and safety of the public, National ParkService personnel, and Contractor's employees. Identify the work included under eachphase by reference to specification section or division numbers.5. Training, both initial and continuing.6. Planning for possible emergency situations, such as floods, fires, cave-ins, slides,explosions, power outages, and wind storms. Such planning shall take into considerationthe nature of construction, site conditions, and degree of exposure of persons andproperty.B. Certificates: Provide certificates from a mechanic that all mechanical equipment has beeninspected and meets OSHA requirements.C. Submit a copy of test reports, as required by OSHA, for personnel working with hazardousmaterials.D. Submit a report of safety meetings and of inspections.E. Upon request, submit proof of employees' qualifications to perform assigned duties in a safemanner.01360-111/07 ACCIDENT PREVENTION

1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Clauses entitled "Accident Prevention" and "Permits and Responsibilities" of the GeneralProvisions. In case of conflicts between Federal, state, and local safety and health requirements,the most stringent shall apply. Equipment or tools not meeting OSHA requirements will not beallowed on the project sites. Failure to comply with the requirements of this section and relatedsections may result in suspension of work.B. Qualifications of Employees:1. Ensure that employees are physically qualified to perform their assigned duties in a safemanner.2. Do not allow employees to work whose ability or alertness is impaired because of drugs,fatigue, illness, intoxication, or other conditions that may expose themselves or others toinjury.3. Operators of vehicles, mobile equipment, hoisting equipment, and hazardous plantequipment shall be able to understand signs, signals, and operating instructions, and becapable of operating such equipment. Provide operating instructions for all equipment.Newly hired operators shall be individually tested by an experienced operator orsupervisor to determine if they are capable of safely operating equipment.1 .4 ACCIDENT REPORTINGA. Reportable Accidents: A reportable accident is defined as death, occupational disease, traumaticinjury to employees or the public, property damage by accident in excess of $100, and fires.Notify Contracting Officer immediately in the event of a reportable accident. Within 7 days of areportable accident, fill out and forward to the Contracting Officer a DI-134 form, which may beobtained from Contracting Officer.B. All Other Accidents: The Contractor shall report all other accidents to the Contracting Officer assoon as possible and assist the Contracting Officer and other officials as required in theinvestigation of the accident.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 FIRST AID FACILITIESA. Provide adequate facilities for the number of employees and the type of construction at the site.2 .2 PERSONNEL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENTA. Meet requirements of NIOSH and OSHA.2 .3 BARRIERSA. Section 01560.PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 EMERGENCY INSTRUCTIONS01360-211/07 ACCIDENT PREVENTION

A. Post telephone numbers and reporting instructions for ambulance, physician, hospital, firedepartment, and police in conspicuous locations at the work site.3 .2 EGRESSA. Provide and maintain adequate egress at all times in accordance with the Life Safety Code (NFPA101) and OSHA requirements. No corridor, aisle, stairway, door, or exit shall be obstructed orused in a manner that interferes with egress.3 .3 PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENTA. Inspect personal protective equipment daily and maintain in a serviceable condition. Clean,sanitize, and repair, as appropriate, personal items before issuing them to another individual.B. Inspect and maintain other protective equipment and devices before use and on a periodic basis toensure safe operation.3 .4 SAFETY MEETINGSA. As a minimum, conduct weekly 15-minute "toolbox" safety meetings. These meetings shall beconducted by a foreman and attended by all construction personnel at the worksite.B. Conduct monthly safety meetings for all levels of supervision. Notify the Contracting Officer ofmeeting dates and times. These meetings shall be used to review the effectiveness of theContractor's safety effort, to resolve current health and safety problems, to provide a forum forplanning safe construction activities, and for updating the accident prevention program. TheContracting Officer will attend the meeting and enter the results of the meetings into the dailylog.3 .5 HARD HATS AND PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT AREASA. A hard hat area will be designated by the Contracting Officer. The hard hat area shall be postedby the Contractor in a manner satisfactory to the Contracting Officer.B. It is the Contractor's responsibility to require all those working on or visiting the site to wear hardhats and other necessary protective equipment at all times. As a minimum, provide six hard hatsfor use by visitors. Change liners before reissuing hats.3 .6 TRAININGA. First Aid: Provide adequate training to ensure prompt and efficient first aid.B. Hazardous Material: Train and instruct each employee exposed to hazardous material in safe andapproved methods of handling and storage. Hazardous materials are defined as explosive,flammable, poisonous, corrosive, oxidizing, irritating, or otherwise harmful substances that couldcause death or injury.END OF SECTION01360-311/07 ACCIDENT PREVENTION

SECTION 01420REFERENCE STANDARDSPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 The following abbreviations, which may be used in the construction specifications, refer to theorganizations and specifications of the organizations listed below:AA Aluminum Association900 19th Street, NW, Suite 300Washington, D.C. 20006-2168AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials444 North Capitol Street, NW, Suite 249Washington, D.C. 20001ACI American Concrete InstituteP.O. Box 9094Farmington Hills, Michigan 48333-9094ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association222 West Las Colinas Boulevard, Suite 641Irving, Texas 75039-5423AI Asphalt InstituteResearch Park DriveP.O. Box 14052Lexington, Kentucky 40512-4052AISC American Institute of Steel Construction1 East Wacker Drive, Suite 3100Chicago, Illinois 60601-2001AISI American Iron and Steel Institute1101 17th Street, NWWashington, D.C. 20036-4700ANSI American National Standards Institute11 West 42nd Street, 13th FloorNew York, New York 10036ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers1791 Tullie Circle, NEAtlanta, Georgia 30329-2305ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers345 East 47th StreetNew York, New York 10017ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers3617 Thousand Oaks Boulevard, Suite 210Westlake, California 91362-3649ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering28901 Clemens Road, Suite 100Westlake, Ohio 4414501420-111/07 REFERENCE STANDARDS

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials100 Barr Harbor DriveWest Conshohocken, Pennsylvania 19428-2959AWS American Welding Society, Inc.550 NW LeJeune RoadMiami, Florida 33126AWWA American Water Works Association6666 W. Quincy AvenueDenver, Colorado 80235BOCA Building Officials Code Administrators4051 W. Flossmoor RoadCountry Club Hills, Illinois 60478-5795CID Commercial Item DescriptionSee General ProvisionsCRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute933 N. Plum Grove RoadSchaumburg, Illinois 60173-4758EPA Environmental Protection Agency401 M Street, SWWashington, D.C. 20460FM Factory Mutual System1151 Boston-Providence TurnpikeP.O. Box 9102Norwood, Massachusetts 02062-9102FS Federal SpecificationsSee General ProvisionsMS Military Standardization DocumentsSee General ProvisionsMSHA Mine Safety and Health Administration4015 Wilson Boulevard, Room 601Arlington, Virginia 22203MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry127 Park Street, NEVienna, Virginia 22180-4602NAAMM The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers8 South Michigan Avenue, Suite 1000Chicago, Illinois 60603NAPA National Asphalt Pavement AssociationNAPA Building5100 Forbes BoulevardLanham, Maryland 20706-4413NEC National Electrical Code (by NFPA)NECA National Electrical Contractors Association3 Bethesda Metro Center, Suite 1100Bethesda, Maryland 2081401420-211/07 REFERENCE STANDARDS

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association1300 N. 17th Street, Suite 1847Rosslyn, Virginia 22209NFPA National Fire Protection Association1 Batterymarch ParkP.O. Box 9101Quincy, Massachusetts 02269-9101NIOSH National Institute for Occupational Safety and HealthNIOSH Building 1, Room 30071600 Clifton Road, NEAtlanta, Georgia 30333NSF NSF International(Formerly National Sanitation Foundation)3475 Plymouth RoadP.O. Box 130140Ann Arbor, Michigan 48113-0140OSHA Occupational Safety and Health AdministrationU.S. Department of Labor200 Constitution Avenue, NWWashington, D.C. 20210PCA Portland Cement Association5420 Old Orchard RoadSkokie, Illinois 60077-1083PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute175 W. Jackson BoulevardChicago, Illinois 60604SJI Steel Joist Institute3127 10th Avenue, North Ext.Myrtle Beach, South Carolina 29577-6760SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc.4201 Lafayette Center DriveP.O. Box 221230Chantilly, Virginia 20151-1209SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council40 24th Street, 6th FloorPittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15222-4643UBC Uniform Building Code (by ICBO)UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.333 Pfingsten RoadNorthbrook, Illinois 60062PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used.PART 3EXECUTION Not used.END OF SECTION01420-311/07 REFERENCE STANDARDS

SECTION 01430CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROLPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of preparing and executing a quality control program.1 .2 SUBMITTALSA. Quality Control Plan: At the time of the preconstruction conference, submit for approval awritten Contractor Quality Control (CQC) plan. If the plan requires any revisions or corrections,the Contractor shall resubmit the plan within 10 days. The Government reserves the right torequire changes in the plan during the contract period as necessary to obtain the quality specified.No change in the approved plan may be made without written concurrence by the ContractingOfficer. The plan shall include:1. A list of personnel responsible for quality control and assigned duties. Include eachperson's qualifications.2. A copy of a letter of direction to the Contractor's quality control supervisor outliningassigned duties.3. Names and descriptions of laboratories to perform sampling and testing, and samples ofproposed report forms. Lab certifications shall be included in submittals.4. Methods of monitoring and controlling environmental pollution and contamination asrequired by regulations and laws.5. Methods of performing, documenting, and enforcing quality control of all work.B. Daily Submittals: Submit Daily Quality Control Report showing all inspections and tests on thefirst workday following the date covered by the report.C. Tests: Submit triplicate copies of complete test results not later than three calendar days after thetest was performed. Submit failing test results and proposed remedial actions within four hoursof noted deficiency. Test results may also be submitted electronically in pdf format.D. Off Site Inspection Reports: Submit prior to shipment.E. Progress Payments: If the CQC plan and Daily Quality Control Reports are not submitted in atimely manner, the Contracting Officer may retain an appropriate amount of the applicableprogress payment.1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. General: Except for tests or other items of work specified to be performed by the Government,the quality of all work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Inspect and test all workoften enough to ensure that the quality of materials, workmanship, construction, finish, andfunctional performance is in compliance with applicable specifications and drawings.01430-102/08 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL

B. Quality Control Staff: The Contractor's job supervisory staff may be used for quality control,supplemented as necessary by additional technicians. The Contractor's designated QualityControl Supervisor shall be employed full time at the project site whenever contract work is inprogress.C. Submit certified independent testing laboratory to perform sampling and testing approved byContracting Officer.PART 2 PRODUCTSNOT USED.PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 OFF-SITE CONTROLA. Items that are fabricated or assembled off-site shall be inspected for quality control at the place offabrication.3 .2 ON-SITE CONTROLA. Notify the Contracting Officer at least 24 hours in advance of the initial and follow-up phases.B. Preparatory: Perform before beginning each feature of work.1. Review control submittal requirements with personnel directly responsible for the qualitycontrol work.2. Ensure that provisions have been made for field control testing.3. Examine the work area to ensure that all preliminary work has been completed.4. Verify all field dimensions and advise the Contracting Officer of discrepancies.5. Ensure that necessary equipment and materials are at the project site and that they complywith approved shop drawings and submittals.C. Initial: As soon as work begins, inspect and test a representative portion of a particular feature ofwork for quality of workmanship. Review control testing procedures to ensure compliance withcontract requirements. Test results may also be submitted electronically in pdf format.D. Follow-Up: Inspect and test as work progresses to ensure compliance with contract requirementsuntil completion of work.3 .3 DOCUMENTATIONA. Maintain Daily Quality Control Reports (sample attached) of quality control activities and tests.Daily Quality Control Reports may not be substituted for other written reports required under theGeneral Provisions, such as Disputes, Differing Site Conditions, or Changes.01430-202/08 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL

3 .4 ENFORCEMENTA. The Contractor shall stop work on any item or feature pending satisfactory correction of anydeficiency noted by the quality control staff or the Contracting Officer. Construction shall notproceed on any feature of work containing uncorrected work.END OF SECTION01430-302/08 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL

CONTRACTOR'S Q.C. DAILY REPORTREPORT NO. _________ SHEET 1 OF _________PROJECT CONTRACT NO. DATEPARKCONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE ON THE JOBWEATHER (Rain, Snow, Cloudy,Windy, etc.)RAINFALLInchesTEMPERATUREMAX.MIN.GROUND CONDITIONS (Dry, Damp, Wet, Frozen, etc.)1. PRIME CONTRACTORNO. EMPLOYEES BY JOB CATEGORIES Hours HEAVY EQUIPMENT ONJOBNO.UNITSHRS. WORKINGYES NO CommentsWORK PERFORMED BY PRIME CONTRACTOR:MATERIALS DELIVEREDOFFICIAL VISITORS TO SITE2A. SUBCONTRACTOR, _____________________________________________: (If more than one subcontractor use copies offollowing page.)NO. EMPLOYEES BY JOB CATEGORIES Hours HEAVY EQUIPMENT ONJOBNO.UNITSHRS. WORKINGYES NO CommentsWORK PERFORMED BY SUBCONTRACTOR:3. SPECIFIC INSPECTIONS: (Inspections performed, results, and corrective actions)4. TESTING: 1 Check if any testing was performed today. (Complete and attach Test Report Information Sheets.)Type and Location of Testing: ____________________________________________________________________________________5. VERBAL INSTRUCTION RECEIVED FROM GOVERNMENT ON CONSTRUCTION DEFICIENCIES OR RE-TESTINGREQUIRED:6. REMARKS:7. CERTIFICATION:I certify that the above report is complete and correct and that I, or my authorized representative, have inspected all work performed this dayby the prime contractor and each subcontractor and determined that all materials, equipment, and workmanship are in strict compliance withthe plans and specifications except as may be noted above. ____________________________________________________________Contractor's Designated Quality Control Representative01430-402/08 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL

SUBCONTRACTOR WORK CONTINUED: CONTRACT NO. REPORT NO. _______SHEET ____ OF ____2 SUBCONTRACTOR,NO. EMPLOYEES BY JOB CATEGORIES Hours HEAVY EQUIPMENT ONJOBNO.UNITSHRS. WORKINGYES NO CommentsWORK PERFORMED BY SUBCONTRACTOR:2 SUBCONTRACTOR,NO. EMPLOYEES BY JOB CATEGORIES Hours HEAVY EQUIPMENT ONJOBNO.UNITSHRS. WORKINGYES NO CommentsWORK PERFORMED BY SUBCONTRACTOR:2 SUBCONTRACTOR,NO. EMPLOYEES BY JOB CATEGORIES Hours HEAVY EQUIPMENT ONJOBNO.UNITSHRS. WORKINGYES NO CommentsWORK PERFORMED BY SUBCONTRACTOR:2 SUBCONTRACTOR,NO. EMPLOYEES BY JOB CATEGORIES Hours HEAVY EQUIPMENT ONJOBNO.UNITSHRS. WORKINGYES NO COMMENTSWORK PERFORMED BY SUBCONTRACTOR:01430-502/08 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL

TEST REPORT INFORMATION SHEETCONTRACT NO.REPORT NO. _____________SHEET _____ OF _________1. Individual Making Inspection or Test:2. Testing Laboratory; Name: Phone #:Address:______________________________________________________________________________________________________3. Description of Work and Test Method:4. Location of Samples and Tests or Inspections:5. Specification Section:6. Inspection or Test Data:7. Test Results and Interpretations of Test Results:8. Comments or Professional Opinion About Compliance of Inspected Work or Tested Work with contract Document Requirements:9. Recommendations:10. Corrective Actions Taken:CERTIFICATION:I certify that the above testing report is complete and correct and that all testing performed this day for this contract is in strict compliancewith the plans and specifications except as noted above.Signature of Inspector01430-602/08 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL

SECTION 01510TEMPORARY SERVICESPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of providing temporary services required for Contractor'sperformance of the work of this contract.1 .2 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01520 - Field Offices and Sheds.B. Section 01570 - Temporary Controls.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 GENERALA. Temporary materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the requiredusage, must not create unsafe conditions, and must not violate requirements of applicable codesand standards.2 .2 SANITARY FACILITIESA. Provide and maintain temporary toilet facilities in accordance with State Health Department andNational Park Service requirements.B. Sufficiently lighted and ventilated toilet facilities in weatherproof, sightproof, handicapaccessible, sturdy enclosures with privacy locks.C. Provide separate facilities for men and women.D. Toilet facilities are available for use by the Contractor with the stipulation that they are kept cleanand tidy at all times.2 .3 FIRE PROTECTION EQUIPMENTA. Extinguishers shall have a minimum UL rating of 2-A:10-B:C.PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTINGA. Connect to existing power service. The Government will pay the costs of power used.Connections not approved by Contracting Officer shall be removed immediately and theContractor shall provide separate service for power and lighting.B. Temporary Electrical: Temporary electrical work shall meet requirements of NFPA 70 (NEC),Article 305.01510-111/07 TEMPORARY SERVICES

C. When temporary connections are removed, restore existing utility services to their originalcondition.3 .2 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND COOLINGA. Provide and maintain adequate approved facilities, as required for safety and constructionrequirements, during the progress of the work. Provide ample clearance around stoves and heatersand all chimney and vent connections to prevent ignition of combustible material.B. Furnish temporary heating and cooling. Use of permanent heating and cooling system will not beallowed without written authorization from Contracting Officer. When the permanent heating andcooling system is approved for use as temporary heating and cooling, pay all costs until finalacceptance. Permanent heating and cooling system must be sufficiently complete, includingcontrols, to permit safe operation.C. Install and maintain temporary filters when air handing equipment is used for temporary heatingand cooling. Install new filters before final acceptance in addition to any extra sets of filtersrequired. Clean coils as determined by Contracting Officer.D. Equipment warranties for equipment used for temporary heating and cooling shall start on date ofFinal Acceptance.3 .3 TELEPHONEA. No telephone service is available on site for Contractor's use. Make arrangements with telephonecompany and pay all costs. See Section 01520 for telephone for Contracting Officer's use.3 .4 WATERA. Arrange with park for potable water and pay all costs.B. Furnish cool, potable water for construction personnel in locations convenient to work stations.3 .5 SANITARY FACILITIESA. Place in approved locations secluded from public observation and convenient to work stations.Relocate as work progress requires.B. Maintain and clean toilet facilities at least weekly.C. Completely remove sanitary facilities on completion of work.3 .6 FIRE PREVENTION AND PROTECTIONA. Responsible Person: A capable and qualified person shall be placed in charge of fire protection.The responsibilities shall include locating and maintaining fire protective equipment andestablishing and maintaining safe torch cutting and welding procedures.B. Hazard Control: Take all necessary precautions to prevent fire during construction. Do not storeflammable or combustible liquids within park boundaries without prior approval of ContractingOfficer. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances.C. Spark Arresters:01510-211/07 TEMPORARY SERVICES

1. Written determinations of periods and areas of potential fire hazard will be issued byContracting Officer.2. Equip all gasoline or diesel powered equipment used during periods of potential firehazards or in potential forest and grass fire locations with spark arresters approved by theU. S. Forest Service.D. Service and Refueling Areas: Locate areas a minimum of 50 feet from buildings. Shut downequipment before refueling.E. Smoking: Smoking within buildings or temporary storage sheds is prohibited.F. Welding: Cutting by torch or welding shall be performed only when adequate fire protection isprovided.3 .7 PROTECTION EQUIPMENT REQUIREDA. Buildings:1. Furnish a minimum of one extinguisher for each 1,500 square feet of area or majorfraction thereof.2. Travel distance from any work station to the nearest extinguisher shall not exceed 75 feet.B. Vehicles and Equipment: Provide one extinguisher on each vehicle or piece of equipment.END OF SECTION01510-311/07 TEMPORARY SERVICES

SECTION 01520FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDSPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The requirements of this section consist of furnishing, locating, and removing temporarystructures, equipment, and furnishings.1 .2 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Temporary Services - Section 01510.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 CONTRACTOR'S FIELD OFFICEA. Contractor may provide an office for his own use. Size, location, and construction shall be subjectto approval by Contracting Officer.2 .2 STORAGE SHEDSA. Temporary weathertight sheds or other covered facilities for storage of materials subject toweather damage. Number and size of structures shall be subject to Contracting Officer's approval.PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 OTHER STRUCTURESA. Locate where directed by Contracting Officer, a minimum of 50 feet from permanent structures.3 .2 REMOVALA. Remove structures, equipment, and furnishings, and terminate services after punch list is 100percent completed or when directed by Contracting Officer.END OF SECTION01520-111/07 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS

SECTION 01560BARRIERSPART 1 – GENERAL4 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of furnishing, installing, and maintaining barriers to protectexisting facilities and the public from construction operations.PART 2 - PRODUCTS4 .2 GENERALA. Material may be new or used, but shall be suitable for intended purpose. Fences and barriers shallbe structurally adequate and neat in appearance.4 .3 FENCINGA. Safety Barrier Fence: Orange plastic fence, minimum height, 4 feet.4 .4 BARRICADES AND SIGNSA. Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD), Part VI, latest edition.4 .5 LUMBERA. Free of nails, large knot holes and splinters.4 .6 BARRIER TAPEA. Banner Guard, imprinted with "CAUTION: CONSTRUCTION AREA", manufactured by ReefIndustries, Inc., Houston, Texas, or approved equal.PART 3 - EXECUTION4 .7 PROTECTION OF PUBLICA. Fence, barricade, or otherwise block off the immediate work area to prevent unauthorized entry.B. Erect and maintain barricades, lights, danger signals, and warning signs in accordance withMUTCD.C. Illuminate barricades and obstructions at night; keep safety lights burning from sunset to sunrise.D. Adequately barricade and post open cuts in or adjacent to thoroughfares.E. Protect pedestrian traffic by guardrails or fences.01560 - 102/08 BARRIERS

F. When pedestrian traffic is detoured onto a roadway, provide temporary walkways with protectionas required at ends and overhead. For walkways, use lumber running parallel to direction oftraffic movement and provide ramps at changes of elevation.G. Cover pipes, hoses, and power lines crossing sidewalks and walkways with troughs using bevelededge boards.H. Erect and maintain sufficient detour signs at road closures and along detour routes.4 .8 BARRIER TAPEA. Install where directed by Contracting Officer. Keep a minimum of two rolls on site at all times.4 .9 REMOVALA. Completely remove barriers no longer needed when approved by Contracting Officer.END OF SECTION01560 - 202/08 BARRIERS

SECTION 01570TEMPORARY CONTROLSPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of providing temporary controls.1 .2 SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01330.PART 2 PRODUCTSNOT USED.PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 HOUSEKEEPINGA. Keep project neat, orderly, and in a safe condition at all times.B. Provide enough containers for collecting construction debris and construction materials to berecycled.C. Provide individually marked containers for recycling personal items, such as aluminum cans,newspapers, glass, plastic, and corrugated cardboard. These items may be recycled by theContractor or turned over to the Park recycling committee.D. Wet down dry materials and rubbish to prevent blowing dust.E. Keep volatile wastes in covered containers.F. Utilize excavated material as soon as possible.3 .2 DISPOSALA. Unless otherwise specified, all removed material becomes the property of the Contractor and shallbe disposed of outside the park.B. All excavated material that cannot be utilized as backfill, or in any other capacity, shall beremoved from the National Monument and properly disposed of by the Contractor. No unused,excavated material shall be stockpiled in the National Monument.C. Immediately remove hazardous rubbish from project site. Place other construction debris inrefuse containers at least daily. Dispose of refuse at least weekly, in a legal manner, at public orprivate dumping areas outside the park. Do not burn or bury refuse inside the park.01570-104/08 TEMPORARY CONTROLS

3 .3 AIR AND WATER POLLUTION CONTROLA. Take all necessary reasonable measures to reduce air and water pollution by any material orequipment used during construction.B. Do not dispose of volatile wastes or oils in storm or sanitary drains.C. Do not allow waste materials to be washed into streams or bodies of water.3 .4 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLA. The proximity of the project to a primary creek in the Bear Valley area necessitates thedevelopment of a comprehensive Stormwater Management Plan (SWMP) that shall be submittedto, and approved by, the Contracting Officer prior to the commencement of construction. TheSWMP shall conform to National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) bestmanagement practices as administered by the California State Water Resources Control Board(CASWRCB).B. Erosion and sedimentation control measures shall be utilized throughout the construction site toprevent erosion and control runoff during construction. The SWMP shall be designed to ensurethat construction runoff will not impact the San Joaquin River.C. The following general practices shall be used where applicable:1. Uncover the smallest practical area of land.2. Use berms, diversion dams, or other structures to divert surface water away from the creekand dissipate hydraulic energy during spring runoff and storm events.3. Inspect the construction site before and after storm events to determine the extent oferosion and the effectiveness of the control methods implemented. Ineffective or failedmethods shall be immediately replaced, reinforced, or supplemented to ensure compliancewith the SWMP.4. Install Silt Fence down slope and adjacent to disturbed areas during construction to trapsediment, rock, and other site debris.5. No construction will commence within the vicinity of the creek (within 150’) until anatural resources survey has been completed; requested by contractor within 48 hours tostart work in the area. Upon complete survey, erosion control will be installed andinspected and approved by CO prior to construction commencing.END OF SECTION01570-204/08 TEMPORARY CONTROLS

SECTION 01600MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENTPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of the general procedures for handling, storing, and protectingmaterial and equipment.1 .2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLINGA. Arrange deliveries of materials in accordance with construction schedules; coordinate to avoidconflict with work and conditions at the site. Deliver materials in undamaged condition, inmanufacturer's original containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible.Contractor is encouraged to obtain materials in biodegradable or recyclable/reusable packagingwhich uses the minimum amount of packaging possible.1 .3 STORAGE AND PROTECTIONA. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels accessiblefor inspection.B. Interior Storage: Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by manufacturer'sinstructions.C. Exterior Storage:1. Store products subject to damage by the elements in weathertight enclosures.2. Store fabricated products above the ground, on blocking or skids; prevent soiling orstaining. Cover products subject to damage or deterioration with impervious sheetcoverings; provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation.3. Store loose granular materials in a well-drained area on solid surfaces to prevent mixingwith foreign matter.D. Protection After Installation: Provide adequate coverings as necessary to protect installedmaterials from damage resulting from natural elements, traffic, and subsequent construction.Remove when no longer needed.E. Utilize authorized staging areas as per construction drawings, other locations must be approvedby CO.PART 2 PRODUCTSNOT USED.PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED.END OF SECTION01600-111/07 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

SECTION 01720FIELD ENGINEERINGPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 LAYOUT OF WORKA. Set initial construction stakes establishing lines, and grades. Execute the work in accordance withthese stakes, and perform all additional staking deemed necessary to execute the work.B. Preserve all stakes and marks. Required stakes or marks destroyed by Contractor will be replacedas soon as possibleC. Existing Monuments: All bench marks, land corners, and triangulation points, established byother surveys, existing within the construction area shall be preserved. If existing monumentsinterfere with the work, secure written permission before removing them.D. Locations and elevations shown on the drawings are subject to final field adjustment byContracting Officer before construction. Notify the Contracting Officer of apparent errorsdiscovered on the drawings or in the initial stakeout. If changes in stakeout are required,cooperate with Contracting Officer in prompt establishment of the field control for altered oradjusted work.1 .2 QUANTITY SURVEYSA. Quantity surveys shall be conducted, and the data derived from these surveys shall be used incomputing the quantities of work performed and the actual construction completed and in place.B. Conduct the original and final surveys and surveys for any periods for which progress paymentsare requested. All these surveys shall be conducted under the direction of a representative of theContracting Officer, unless the Contracting Officer waives this requirement in a specific instance.The Government shall make such computations as are necessary to determine the quantities ofwork performed or finally in place. The Contractor shall make the computations based on thesurveys for any periods for which progress payments are requested.C. Promptly upon completing a survey, furnish the originals of all field notes and all other recordsrelating to the survey or to the layout of the work to the Contracting Officer, who shall use themas necessary to determine the amount of progress payments. Retain copies of all such materialfurnished to the Contracting Officer. Field data may be submitted electronically to theContracting Officer.PART 2 PRODUCTSNOT USED.PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED.END OF SECTION01720-102/08 FIELD ENGINEERING

SECTION 01770PROJECT CLOSEOUTPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of final cleanup, closeout submittals, and final inspectionprocedures.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 CLEANING MATERIALSA. As recommended by the manufacturer of surface to be cleaned.2 .2 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONSA. Frame instructions under nonglare glass or approved laminated plastic. In areas where operatinginstructions are subject to sunlight or moisture, provide weather-resisting materials.PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONSA. As specified in the individual sections. Furnish operating instructions attached to or postedadjacent to equipment. Include wiring diagrams, control diagrams, control sequence, start-up,adjustment, operation, lubrication, shut-down, safety precautions, procedures in the event ofequipment failure, and other items of instruction recommended by the manufacturer.3 .2 CLEANINGA. Before scheduling the final inspection, remove all tools, equipment, surplus materials, andrubbish. Restore or refinish surfaces that are damaged due to work of this contract to originalcondition. Remove grease, dirt, stains, foreign materials, and labels from finished surfaces.Thoroughly clean building interiors. Pick up all construction debris from the site. At time of finalinspection, project shall be thoroughly clean and ready for use.3 .3 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGSA. Maintain one complete full-size set of contract drawings and one full-size set of vendor-supplieddrawings. Clearly mark changes, deletions, and additions. Show additions in red, deletions ingreen, and special instructions in blue.B. Keep record drawings As-Built Drawings current. Make record drawings or AutoCAD As-BuiltDrawings available to the Contracting Officer for inspection at the time of monthly progresspayment requests. If project record drawings As-Built Drawings are not current, the ContractingOfficer may retain an appropriate amount of the progress payment.01770-111/07 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

C. On completion of the total project, submit complete record drawings. Include all shop drawings,sketches, and additional drawings that are to be included in the final set, with clear instructionsshowing the location of these drawings.3 .4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. Submit before final inspection request.1. Project Record Drawings: As specified above.2. Guarantees and Bonds: As specified in individual sections.3. Spare Parts and Materials: As specified in individual sections.4. Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in individual sections and Section 01785.5. Operating Tools: As specified in the individual sections.6. Special Tools: One set of special tools required to operate, adjust, dismantle, or repairequipment. Special tools are those not normally found in possession of mechanics ormaintenance personnel.3 .5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND FINAL INSPECTIONA. Submit written certification that project, or designated portion of project, is substantiallycomplete, and request in writing a final inspection. Contracting Officer will make an inspectionwithin 10 days of receipt of request. Certification shall include a listing of significant items thatare not complete in accordance with the contract and shall indicate the schedule date for thecompletion of these items. Upon receipt of written certification project is substantially complete,the Contracting Officer will proceed with inspection within 10 days of receipt of request or willadvise the Contractor of items that prevent the project from being designated as substantiallycomplete.B. If, following final inspection, the work is determined to be substantially complete, ContractingOfficer will prepare a list of deficiencies to be corrected before final acceptance and issue a Letterof Substantial Completion. Contractor shall complete the work described on the list ofdeficiencies within 30 calendar days, as weather permits. If the Contractor fails to complete thework within this time frame, the Contracting Officer may either replace or correct the work withan appropriate reduction in the contract price or charge for reinspection costs in accordance withthe Inspection of Construction Clause of the General Provisions.C. If, following final inspection, the work is not determined to be substantially complete,Contracting Officer will notify Contractor in writing. After completing work, Contractor shallresubmit certification and request a new final inspection. All reinspection costs may be charged inaccordance with the Inspection of Construction Clause of the General Provisions.3 .6 ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORKA. After all deficiencies have been corrected, a Letter of Acceptance will be issued.END OF SECTION01770-211/07 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

SECTION 01785OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATAPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of furnishing operation and maintenance data manuals.1 .2 RELATED WORKA. Project Record Drawings - As-built Drawings – See Section 01770.1 .3 SCHEDULINGA. At start of project, begin accumulating operation and maintenance data and initiate an index.Install and index all data in binders within 30 days after delivery of items. As custom written dataand test results are produced, add them to the operation and maintenance data file.B. Keep operation and maintenance data current. Make operation and maintenance binders availableto the Contracting Officer for inspection at the time of monthly progress payment requests. Ifoperation and maintenance binders are not current the Contracting Officer may retain anappropriate amount of the progress payment.C. Before scheduling a final inspection, furnish two complete sets of operation and maintenance datato Contracting Officer for review. Should Contracting Officer find manual to be substantiallyincomplete, the final inspection will be delayed.D. Within 30 days following receipt of review comments, deliver four completed sets of Operationand Maintenance data.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 BINDERSA. White, commercial quality, hard back, three-ring, 2-inch maximum ring size, lever-locking typeslant ring, with clear window pockets on front and side. Cardinal Slant-D Ring, manufactured byAtapco Office Products Group, St. Louis, Missouri; View SlantRing, manufactured by E-Z-DPremiere View Binder, Torrance, California; or approved equal.2 .2 INDEX SYSTEMA. Index sheet with mylar reinforced edges at binder holes and tabbed divider sheets with mylarreinforced edges and pre-printed numbered tabs aligned with numbers and title lines on indexsheet. Cardinal One-Step, manufactured by Atapco Office Products Group, St. Louis, Missouri;Avery Ready Index, manufactured by Avery Dennison, Covina, California; or approved equal.PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 FORM01785-111/07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Provide four complete sets of data.B. Number multiple binder volumes consecutively.C. Cover Sheet: Identify the project title, location, park, contract number, prime contractor's nameand address, date of substantial completion, and binder volume number. Insert cover sheet intoclear plastic view pocket on front of binder. Insert sheet with project title and "Operation andMaintenance" into side clear plastic view pocket.D. Index System: Organize data into sections by common subjects and subsystems. Place aconsecutively numbered tabbed divider sheet in front of each section. Place index sheet at thebeginning of each binder, listing sections by subject name. If multiple binders are used, place atable of contents of all data provided behind the index sheet in each binder.E. Data: Fill binders to no more than 75 percent of capacity. Punch holes shall not obscure any data.Normal sheet size shall be 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches. Fold oversize sheets and insert them in 8-1/2 by 11-inch clear pocket sheet protectors placed in binders. When the contents of a singletabbed section covers more than one item, provide colored paper sheets to separate the data foreach item.1. Manufacturers' Data: Provide originals for color or copyrighted data. Black and whitedata may be originals or clean, good quality reproductions. Where originals are printedon both sides of the page, reproductions shall also be printed on both sides of the page.Copies produced by facsimile transmission and sheets with stamps, such as submittalapproval stamps, will not be acceptable. Include only sheets that apply to items installed;cross out inapplicable data.2. Vendor Furnished As-Built Drawings: Maximum 24-inch by 36-inch sheets withminimum character or lettering size of 1/8 inch. Reduced-size reproductions may beprovided instead of full-size drawings if the reproductions are clear and legible. Ifreduced-size drawings are used, identify as "REDUCED SIZE" and provide graphicscales, if applicable.3. Custom Written Data: Typewritten text, supplemented by drawings and schematicsnecessary to describe systems adequately.4. Equipment Data Sheet: Typewritten data, using form at the end of this section.5. Schedules: Clean, typewritten schedules reflecting final, as-installed conditions. Handwrittenmark-ups of schedules submitted earlier are not acceptable.6. Data that is poorly reproduced or in any way illegible will be rejected.3 .2 CONTENTA. Manufacturers' Published Data: Provide all available data, including installation and operatinginstructions, parts lists, electrical and mechanical schematics, control circuit documentation,performance data, safety instructions, cleaning and care instructions, and illustrations andinstructions for maintenance, including lubrication, disassembly and repair, cleaning, and service.Indicate catalog numbers, sizes, colors, options, and other information pertaining to the productsfurnished which would be required when ordering replacements. For equipment assemblies,provide data for each separate item of equipment furnished as part of the assembly.01785-211/07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

B. Schedules: Provide one copy of material and equipment schedules, as listed in the individualsections, in the appropriate sections of the manual.C. Warranties: Place a copy of each manufacturer, supplier, and installer warranty extending for aperiod greater than one year in a single separately identified tabbed section of the manual.D. Test Results: Include in the operation and maintenance data copies of test results for mechanicaland electrical equipment and systems as listed in the individual specification sections.E. Subcontractor and Supplier List: List all subcontractors and major suppliers who worked on theproject. Include each subcontractor's or supplier's address and telephone number and identifywork performed.END OF SECTION01785-311/07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

EQUIPMENT DATA SHEETEquipment Item:Designation:Function:Location:Project:Model No.:Serial No.:Manufacturer Address and Phone:Supplier Address and Phone:Preventive Maintenance Tasks:Nameplate Data:Spare Parts Furnished and Other Information:01785-411/07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

SECTION 02072DEMOLITIONPART 1 - GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDESA. All demolition, removal, salvage and disposal of existing structures, piping, and materials. Allbackfill and compaction necessary to restore surface conditions to ambient contouring anddensity.1.02 SUBMITTALSA. Certifications and Testing consistent with Section 01330 and including1. Permit for transport and disposal of debris2. Proposed method of demolition, proposed schedule, sequence of work, and proposedmethod and schedule for removing, maintaining, and reestablishing facilities andutilities.3. Documentation of Asbestos training prior to any demolition work.1.03 SITE CONDITIONSA. Protection1. Erect barriers, fences, guardrails, enclosures, chutes, and shoring to protect personnel,structures, and utilities remaining intact2. Protect designated trees and plants from damageB. Maintaining Traffic1. Assure minimum interference with roads, streets, driveways, sidewalks, and adjacentfacilities.C. Utility Lines and Services1. Field locate all existing utilities, buried piping, and all other surface and sub-surfacefeatures prior to demolition of the existing pump house and storage shed.2. Keep existing structures to remain and adjacent structures intact and in operation.3. Obtain permission to disrupt any utilities or services temporarily or permanently.D. Prior to demolishing a utility or facility, notify the Contracting Officer three days in advance,and plan the demolition such that the demolition will not create an unsafe condition or interferewith ongoing operations.E. Where demolition must occur in such a sequence that a portion of this facility must remainoperational, coordinate this aspect with the Contracting Officer.F. Do not burn waste material on-site.G. Provide adequate fire protection. Keep area clear of hazardous substances and debris.H. Maintain access to exits at all time.02072-105/08 DEMOLITION

I. Separate demolition area from building to remain with temporary dustproof partitions.J. Provide temporary weather protection to prevent damage to structure and interior area.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALSNOT USEDPART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATIONA. Verify that areas to be demolished are unoccupied and discontinued in use.B. Do not commence work until conditions are acceptable to Contracting Officer3.02 PREPARATIONA. Arrange for and verify termination of utility services to include capping lines.B. Remove items scheduled to be salvaged and place in designated storage area.3.03 DEMOLITIONA. Sprinkle debris and use temporary enclosures as necessary to control dust.B. Do not use water to the extent it causes flooding, contaminated runoff, or icing.C. Break concrete and masonry into sections less than 3 FT in any dimension. Sectioning ofconcrete that is to be hauled off-site by Contractor shall be left to the Contractor’s discretion.D. Plug or cap the abandoned piping and buried electric lines at the existing pump house andstorage shed. Note that buried electric line shall also be cut and plugged or capped at the northside of the Campground A Comfort Station.E. Removal of Existing Structures and Equipment – Refer to the historical Well and Pump Housedrawing at the end of this section for approximate dimensions, construction materials, andprocess equipment. Note that this drawing may not accurately represent existing conditions.1. Remove electrical, mechanical, furnishings and other appurtenances2. Fill and compact to 95% of maximum density, backfill to grade.3. Grade to match proposed subgrade4. Revise portions of existing structures as indicated on Drawings or otherwise specified.5. Any demolition occurring over an existing structure to remain, or over a structurecontaining liquid shall be done in such a manner that any or all items demolished willnot fall, causing damage to structure below or into liquid and possibly damagingequipment.6. The pit well in the existing pump house shall be protected from structural debris,piping, equipment, and all other materials that may fall into the water. Prior to02072-205/08 DEMOLITION

destroying, the pit well shall be thoroughly dredged to remove any construction debristhat may have accumulated during demolition.7. The CMP casing in the existing pit well shall be cut at 5-feet below ambient grade. Theremaining casing shall be filled with Bentonite Clay in accordance with California WellStandards-Requirements for Destroying Wells.8. A Well destruction report shall be prepared by a C57 licensed Contractor (Water WellDrilling Contractor).9. In any type of demolition, care shall be taken to see that small items such as bolts,concrete pieces, etc., do not fall and affect any equipment below.10. Disinfection chemicals and chemical, electrical, and process equipment removed fromthe existing pump house and storage shed shall be designated for salvage or disposed ofin accordance with all local, state, and federal regulations.11. All other construction debris shall be removed from the National Monument andproperly disposed of. Any material which the Contracting Officer may wish to save orreuse shall be stored as per the Contracting Officer direction.12. Upon completion of the demolition phase of the project, the disturbed area shall berestored to ambient conditions in terms of grade, compaction, and surface vegetation.The entire area shall be made broom clean.F. Removal of Existing Equipment1. All equipment to be removed or replaced shall be done so in a safe manner and suchthat the equipment and any associated piping or wiring is not damaged.2. Not specified to be salvaged, existing equipment becomes property of the Contractor.3. All materials and equipment designated to be salvaged shall remain the property of theContracting Officer.a. Clean and washout all foreign materials and debris from salvaged items.Remove, haul, unload, and store at the location specified by the ContractingOfficer.b. Place salvaged items weighing 70 kg or more onto new and unused skids priorto storing.c. Contracting Officer will inspect salvaged items at delivery site. Damaged itemsshall be removed and disposed by the Contractor at no additional expense tothe Government.G. Pipe Penetration Demolition1. For pipe and conduit 12 IN and smaller installed through existing walls and slabs,demolish as required to provide penetration required.2.3.04 HAZARDOUS MATERIALSA. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered during demolition of existing facilities, allwork is to be terminated immediately and the Contracting Officer is to be immediately notified.B. Contractor shall provide the necessary equipment required to monitor worker air for thepresence of airborne lead (from lead based paints) and asbestos from piping, gaskets, andbuilding materials in the existing pump house and storage building.3.05 DISPOSAL02072-305/08 DEMOLITION

A. Remove demolition debris daily or establish an alternative demolition debris removal schedulewith the Contracting Officer.B. Transport demolition debris to disposal area outside the Park.3.06 SALVAGEA. Contractor shall work with the Contracting Officer and National Monument personnel todevelop a comprehensive salvage schedule prior to the commencement of construction activity.The salvage schedule shall remain open to modification throughout the demolition phase of theproject.B. Carefully remove items to be salvaged and delivered to Contracting Officer’s storage1. Store and protect items indicated to be salvaged2. Replace any items damaged through carelessness in removal, storage, or handling withnew items of same type3. Do not reuse materials or equipment not specifically indicated or specified to be reusedC. Preparation of Equipment for Storage1. Identify each component with markings or tags to show its position in the assembly andthe assembly of which it belongs.2. Place small parts in wooden boxes and clearly mark contents on the outside3. Thoroughly clean and dry equipment.4. Coat unpainted surfaces with 2 coats of rust-preventive compound.5. Attach unit to suitable crate bottom.6. Enclose unit in polyethylene film and seal all seams and the film to the base of the unitwith tape.7. Construct crate of wooden slats around top and sides of unit.8. Attach permanent instruction tag to outside of crate stating "This unit has been preparedfor storage".3.07 EARTHWORKA. Backfill and Compaction1. Surface and subgrade areas voided during demolition shall be backfilled and compactedto 95% of ASTM D698.2. The pit well shall be backfilled and dewatered as necessary to achieve the specifiedcompaction. Fill materials shall comply with the California Well Standards –Requirements for Destroying Wells.3. Backfill material shall be cohesive or granular material free from roots, organic matter,trash, frozen material, and stones having maximum dimensions greater than 6-inches.4. Imported backfill material must be approved by the Contracting Officer.END OF SECTION02072-405/08 DEMOLITION

SECTION 02110SITE CLEARINGPART 1 - GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDESA. Clearing and grubbingB. Topsoil removal and storage1.02 SUBMITTALSA. Certifications and Testing consistent with Section 01330PART 2 - PRODUCTSNot UsedPART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 PREPARATIONA. Protection1. Provide barricades, coverings, and other protection necessary to prevent damage to existingimprovements.2. Protect improvements on adjoining properties as well as those on Park property.3. Protect existing trees and other vegetation to remain against damage.a. Do not smother trees by stockpiling construction materials or excavated materialswithin drip line.b. Avoid foot or vehicular traffic or parking of vehicles within drip line.c. Provide temporary protection as required to prevent damage to trees and vegetationto be left in place.d. Do not remove, injure, or destroy trees or other plants without prior approval.Consult with Contracting Officer and remove agreed-on roots and branches thatinterfere with construction.e. Provide protection for roots over 1-1/2 IN diameter that are cut during constructionoperations.1) Coat cut faces with an emulsified asphalt, or other acceptable coatingespecially formulated for horticultural use on cut or damaged plant tissues.2) Temporarily cover all exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots fromdrying out.3) Provide earth cover as soon as possible.4) Repair or replace trees and vegetation damaged by construction operations.(a) Repair to be performed by a qualified tree surgeon.(b) Remove trees which cannot be repaired.(c) Replace with new trees of minimum 4 IN caliper.02110 - 104/08 SITE CLEARING

(d)Repairs or replacements are to be completed in a manneracceptable to Contracting Officer at no additional expense toGovernment.B. Clearing and Grubbing1. Do not clear and grub without prior approval from Contracting Officer.2. Clear from surface of existing ground all trees and shrubs marked for removal, brush,downed timber, rotten wood, heavy growth of grass and weeds, vines, rubbish and debris.3. Grub (remove) all stumps, roots, root mats, logs and debris encountered within limits ofconstruction.a. In cut areas, totally grub.b. In fill areas, where fill is less than 3 FT totally grub ground.c. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soilmaterial, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. Place fill material inhorizontal layers not exceeding 6 IN loose depth, and thoroughly compact to adensity equal to adjacent original ground.d. Where fill is 3 FT or more in depth, stumps may be left no higher than 6 IN aboveexisting ground surface.C. Topsoil1. Carefully strip native topsoil to whatever depths encountered, in manner to preventintermingling with underlying subsoil or objectionable material.a. Remove heavy growths of grass before stripping.b. Where trees are indicated to be left standing, stop topsoil stripping sufficientdistance from such trees to prevent damage to main root system.c. Topsoil is defined as organic surface soil reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps,stones and other objects over 2 IN diameter, and without weeds, roots and otherobjectionable material.2. Stockpile topsoil where directed by Contracting Officer for later use as final backfill.a. Construct storage piles to freely drain surface water.b. Cover storage piles to prevent erosion.c. Use topsoil and forest duff for site restoration.D. Disposal of Waste Materials1. Burning materials on-site is prohibited.2. Remove all waste materials from site except as provided for by paragraph B.END OF SECTION02110 - 204/08 SITE CLEARING

SECTION 02220REMOVAL OF PAVEMENTS AND UTILITIESPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of demolition and removal of pavements and portions ofabandoned utilities. The work includes backfilling and grading.1 .2 RELATED WORKA. Selective demolition - Section 02224.1 .3 SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01330.B. Proposed methods of pavement and utility demolition.C. Schedule for shutting off utility services.1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Comply with safety requirements for demolition, ANSI A10.6-90.1 .5 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Keep dust to a minimum at removal site and on haul roads. Use sprinklers or water trucks asnecessary.B. Ensure safety of persons in demolition area. Provide temporary barricades as required.1 .6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01770.B. Submit project record drawings showing all abandoned utilities.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 BACKFILL MATERIALSA. Sections 02318 and 02320.PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 PREPARATIONA. Protect buildings, structures, utilities, and vegetation to remain.02220-1REMOVAL OF PAVEMENTS AND UTILITIES

3 .2 DEMOLITIONA. Asphalt Concrete Pavement:1. Saw cut existing asphalt concrete pavements cleanly in straight, continuous lines. Removeasphalt concrete pavement as shown on the drawings.2. Asphalt concrete pavement that has been removed shall be disposed of outside the parkB. Abandoned Utilities: Remove portions of abandoned underground utilities as necessary for theinstallation of new underground utilities.3 .3 RESTORATIONA. All open excavations shall be backfilled in accordance with Sections 02318 and 02320.3 .4 DISPOSALA. Dispose of removed pavement and excavated rocks as specified in Section 01570.B. Salvaged Material: All excess excavated clean fill material remains the property of theGovernment. Stockpile where directed by Contracting Officer.PART 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT4 .1 REMOVAL OF PAVEMENTS AND UTILITIESA. Payment will be included in the bid item to which this work relates.END OF SECTION02220-2REMOVAL OF PAVEMENTS AND UTILITIES

SECTION 02224SELECTIVE DEMOLITIONPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of demolition of mechanical work and associated electrical andarchitectural work. The work includes removal, salvage, and disposal.1 .2 SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01330.B. Submit schedule showing sequence of work and methods of demolition. Include schedule forshutting off and capping utilities and re-establishing utility services.1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Comply with safety requirements for demolition, ANSI A10 .6-90.1 .4 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Keep dust and dirt pollution to a minimum.B. Ensure safety of persons in demolition area. Provide temporary barricades as required.C. Provide adequate fire protection. Keep area clear of hazardous substances and debris.D. Maintain access to exits at all times.E. Separate demolition area from portions of building to remain with temporary dustproof partitions.F. Provide temporary weather protection to prevent damage to structure and interior area.1 .5 SCHEDULINGA. Complete demolition that might damage new construction before starting new work.PART 2 PRODUCTSNOT USED.PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 PREPARATIONA. Provide temporary supports and protection for portion of structure to remain. Protect fixtures andequipment to remain. Protect nearby structures and vegetation as necessary.3 .2 Cap or disconnect utilities. Provide bypass connections as necessary to maintain utility service tooccupied areas of building.02224-1SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

3 .3 DEMOLITIONA. Work systematically from top downward.B. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections.C. Avoid excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, and framing by careful location of equipmentand prompt removal of demolished materials.D. Demolish foundation walls to a depth of not less than 12 inches below existing ground surface.Demolish and remove wood or metal construction below grade. Fill voids to grade.3 .4 RESTORATION AND CLEAN-UPA. Repair and clean adjacent surfaces damaged or soiled by demolition work.B. Restore utility service to normal operation.C. Remove equipment, temporary protection and barriers, and debris. Dispose of unsalvageablematerial as specified in Section 01570.PART 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT4 .1 SELECTIVE DEMOLITIONA. Payment will be included in the contract lump-sum price for the bid item to which this workrelates.END OF SECTION02224-2SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

SECTION 02316PAVED AREA EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of paved area construction, including excavation and grading forasphalt concrete paved areas.1 .2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:A. All density testing will be arranged and paid for by the Contractor. Tests shall be performed by anindependent testing laboratory.B. AASHTO T99-81, Method D, will be used to determine maximum density, and AASHTOT191-61, or a standard nuclear method, will be used to determine in-place density. In-placedensities specified are minimums and may be exceeded. Contractor shall perform at least one testfor each lift for each 500 square feet in areas requiring 95 percent density relative compaction.The aggregate base course and top 6 inches of subgrade soils should be compacted to at least 95percent relative compaction.1 .3 CLASSIFICATIONA. All excavation will be considered unclassified regardless of the nature of material encountered.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 EXISTING BACKFILL MATERIALA. Free from frozen material, debris, muck, detrimental quantities of organic materials, and otherunsuitable materials.2 .2 WATERA. Section 02332.PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 GROUND SURFACE PREPARATIONA. Where new material is to be placed on compacted subgrade, scarify ground surface to providebond between old and new material.3 .2 STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING TOPSOILA. Where depth of topsoil is at least 3 inches, strip all suitable topsoil within the construction limits.The Contracting Officer will determine areas to be stripped and depth of stripping and willdesignate locations for stockpiles.02316-1PAVED AREA EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

3 .3 EXCAVATIONA. Excavate to lines and grades shown. Keep excavation free from water during construction.Stockpile as directed excavated material to be used in embankment construction.3 .4 BACKFILLA. Place backfill material in layers not exceeding 8 inches loose measurement. Compact each layerbefore placing the next layer, continually leveling and manipulating to ensure uniform moistureand density. Add water to obtain specified moisture content.3 .5 DENSITY REQUIREMENTA. Compact each layer to not less than 95 percent.3 .6 SUBGRADE TOLERANCEA. The finished subgrade elevations shall not vary above or below the theoretical grade more than0.08 foot.3 .7 SLOPE FINISHINGA. Grading: Grade to produce a reasonably uniform surface. Blend slopes smoothly with adjacentterrain.3 .8 DISPOSALA. Dispose of unsuitable materials as specified in Section 01570.PART 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT4 .1 PAVED AREA EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLA. Payment will be included in the bid item to which this work relates.END OF SECTION02316-2PAVED AREA EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

SECTION 02318STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of structure excavation and backfill.1 .2 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. All compaction testing and gradation analysis will be arranged and paid for by the Contractor.Tests shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory.B. All references to percent of maximum density will be as determined by ASTM D698-91, MethodC, at a moisture content determined to be suitable for such density. Moisture-density curves willbe prepared in a certified soils testing laboratory.C. In-Place Soil Density Testing: Procedures used by the Contractor shall be in accordance withASTM D1556-90, Density of Soil In Place By the Sand-Cone Method, or ASTM D2922-91,Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate In Place By Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). Contractorshall perform at least one test on the subgrade of each tank foundation and on the subgrade of theretaining wall footing.1 .3 CLASSIFICATIONA. All excavation under this section will be considered unclassified regardless of the materialencountered.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 SELECT FILLA. Fine, readily compactible soil or granular material, free from frozen lumps, stones larger than 2inches, highly plastic clay, and organic or other objectionable material. Excavated materialmeeting this requirement may be used with approval.2 .2 AGGREGATE BASE MATERIALA. Class 2, 3/4-inch maximum size, aggregate base as defined by Section 26 of the StandardSpecifications issued by the State of California Department of Transportation (CALTRANS).PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 GENERALA. Provide required bracing, shoring, sheeting, and pumping.B. Stake and identify the extent of all earthwork operations prior to starting work. Excavation andearthwork operations shall remain within the limits shown on the drawings. If required laybackfor excavation exceeds limits shown on drawings, Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officerbefore proceeding with excavation.02318-1STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

C. Make excavation large enough to permit installation of utility connections and removal of forms.D. Excavations shall remain open only as long as necessary to complete the associated work. TheContractor shall notify the Contracting Officer at least 24 hours before beginning any excavationand shall inform the Contracting Officer of the intended time the excavation will remain open.E. Protect excavation from moisture infiltration, ponding of water, frost, erosion, and constructionactivities that could soften the base of the excavation.F. If the Contracting Officer approves excavation below the design elevation because of unsuitablefoundation material, an equitable adjustment will be made. If unauthorized overexcavationoccurs, repair the area by backfilling with approved material and compacting to 95 percent of themaximum density at no additional expense to the Government. No adjustments will be made ifunsuitable material is the result of improper protection from moisture infiltration or constructionactivities.G. Do not place backfill against retaining walls or foundations until entire structure has beencompleted and concrete has reached required 28 day strength.H. Place all backfill in 6-inch horizontal lifts. Compact all 6-inch lifts to 95 percent of the maximumdensity. Place an entire lift prior to placing the lift above it.I. Contractor shall carefully excavate, handle and stockpile excavated material so as to maximizeuseable material and minimize contamination of suitable material. Any material that becomesunusable due to contamination with unsuitable materials or because of improper handling shall bereplaced by the Contractor at no additional expense to the Government.3 .2 EXCAVATION MATERIALSA. Use suitable material removed from excavation before importing backfill.3 .3 TANK AND RETAINING WALL FOUNDATIONSA. Bring Subgrade to required elevation using select fill. Fill shall be compacted in 6" layers to 95%of the maximum density. If the subgrade is unstable at grade established, remove unsuitablematerial and replace with select fill in 6-inch layers.B. Place 6" layer of aggregate base and compact to 95% maximum density.3 .4 DISPOSALA. Dispose of surplus and unsuitable material as specified in Section 01570.PART 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT4 .1 Payment will be included in the bid item to which this work relates.END OF SECTION02318-2STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

SECTION 02320UTILITY TRENCHING AND BACKFILLINGPART 1 - GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES:A. Trenching, backfilling and compacting for all underground utilities.B. All construction within the entrance road right of way shall be coordinated with, and approved by, theContracting Officer. Access to and from the National Monument shall be maintained during peakvisitation hours.1.02 REFERENCESA. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)1. D698, Standards test methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil UsingStandard Effort.2. D1557, Test Methods for Moisture - Density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate Mixtures,Using 10 pound Hammer and 18 IN drop3. D4253, Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils Using aVibratory Table4. D4254, Test Method for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils and Calculationof Relative DensityB. “Greenbook” Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (latest edition)1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Certifications and Testing consistent with Section 01330 and including1. Furnish copy of certifications on granular materials for trench bedding and stabilization2. Furnish copy of density reports1.04 JOB CONDITIONSA. Field locate all existing utilities, buried piping, and all other surface and sub-surface features prior toconstruction. Take necessary precautions to protect existing utilities from damage due to constructionactivity. Any features damaged by contractor’s activities shall be replaced to pre-constructioncondition at no additional expense to the government. Any field located existing conditions impactingnew work shall be immediately brought to the contracting officer’s attention.B. All connections to existing mains shall be made by the contractor only after the proposed connectionprocedure and work schedule has been reviewed and approved by the contracting officer. Thecontractor shall submit a written request to the contracting officer a minimum of 48 hours prior toscheduling any connections. The request shall outline the following:1. Points of connection, fittings to be used, and method of flushing and disinfection.2. Estimated construction time for the connection and disinfection.02320 - 104/08 UTILITY TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

3. After receipt of the written request the contracting officer shall review the submittal and givean approval or rejection of the request within three (3) working days. If the request isrejected, the contractor shall resubmit the request, making modifications in a manneracceptable to the contracting officer. All connections shall only be made on agreed upon dateand time. If the contractor does not initiate and complete the connection work in the agreedupon manner, the contractor shall be required to reschedule the connection by following theprocedure outlined above.4. New water mains shall not be placed in service until clearance is granted by the contractingofficer.C. Avoid overloading or surcharge a sufficient distance back from edge of excavation to prevent slidesor caving. Maintain and trim excavated materials in such manner to be as little inconvenience aspossible to public and adjoining property owners.D. Provide full access to public and private premises, to fire hydrants, at street crossings, sidewalks andother points as designated by Contracting Officer to prevent serious interruption of travel.E. Protect and maintain benchmarks, monuments or other established points and reference points and, ifdisturbed or destroyed, replace items to full satisfaction of Contracting Officer.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALSA. Subgrade Stabilization Material1. Clean gravel with reasonably uniform gradation from fine sand to maximum rock size of 2-1/2 inches at greatest dimension.2. Free of clay balls, organic matter, debris, and other deleterious matter.3. Gradation shall be such to fill all large voids with fines to prevent piping of native soil andprevent rapid and free movement of groundwater.B. Granular Bedding Material1. Clean sand or well-graded sand, gravel mix, with maximum gravel size of 3/8 inches atgreatest dimension and minimum sand equivalent of 28.2. Free of clay balls, organic matter, debris, and other deleterious matter.3. 1/2 IN minus screenings of material excavated from trench.C. Backfill material1. Under paved areas, graveled roads, shoulders, parking lots, and drivewaysa. Gravel Backfill1) A reasonably well graded silty sand or a well-graded silt, sand and gravelmixture with a maximum rock size of 3 inches at greatest dimension and aminimum sand equivalent of 28.b. Aggregate Base1) Shall be in conformance with Section 26, Aggregate Bases of theCALTRANS standard specifications.02320 - 204/08 UTILITY TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

c. Slurry Mix1) Concrete mix with each cubic yard containing one sack of Portland Cement,12 gallons of water, 2,600 pounds of 3/8-inch rock, and 800 pounds of sand.2) Contractor design mix using native aggregates. Contractor mustdemonstrate a minimum compressive strength of 4000 psf. Slurry designshall be subject to the approval of the Contracting Officer.d. Native Backfill1) Material excavated from the trench.2) Free of rocks larger than 3 inches at greatest dimension, roots, sod, organicmatter, debris, frozen material, and other deleterious matter.D. Pavement1. Temporary Pavementa. Shall conform to Class “D2” crushed aggregate per SS 203-6 with SC-800 liquidasphalt per SS 203-2.2. Permanent Pavementa. Asphalt concrete shall be Type B, ½-inch maximum grading conforming to Section39, “Asphalt Concrete,” of the CALTRANS Standard Specifications with an MC800 liquid asphalt binder, or PBA 6b.E. Tack Coat1. Shall conform to SS-1h emulsified asphalt.F. All imported materials shall be certified weed and seed free.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 EXCAVATION FOR APPURTENANCESA. Excavate for appurtenant piping structures to provide at least 12 IN (minimum) clear distancebetween outer surface and embankment.3.02 TRENCH EXCAVATIONA. Excavate trenches by open cut method to depth necessary to accommodate work.B. Open trench outside buildings, units, and structures shall be no more than the distance between twomanholes, structures, units, or 600 lineal FT, whichever is less. Trenching limitations may be fieldadjusted by Contracting Officer as weather conditions dictate.C. Do not open greater length of trench than can be effectively utilized under existing conditions.Schedule work and order materials so that trenches are not left open for a longer period than isreasonably necessary. Any trench or portion of trench, which is opened and remains idle for twocalendar days, or longer, as determined by the Contracting Officer, may be directed to be immediatelyrefilled, without completion of work, at no additional cost to the Government. Said trench may not bereopened until Contracting Officer is satisfied that work associated with trench will be prosecutedwith dispatch.02320 - 304/08 UTILITY TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

D. Observe following trenching criteria1. Trench size. Excavate only sufficient width to accommodate free working space. In no caseshall trench width at top of pipe or conduit exceed the following dimensionsOverall Diameter of Utility ServiceExcess Dimension8 inches and less Max. 24-Inch trench2. Where soil conditions permit, cut trench walls vertically from bottom of trench to 1 FT abovetop of pipe, conduit, or utility service.3. Keep trenches free of water. Include cost of dewatering in original proposal.4. Brace and sheet trenches as soil conditions dictate and in full compliance with OSHArequirements. Do not remove sheeting until backfilling has progressed to the stage that nodamage to piping, utility service, or conduit will result due to removal.5. Brace trenches running near walls or columns, to prevent any settlement or other disturbanceof walls or columns.6. When a wheel blade trenching technique is employed the minimum trench width can bereduced to 6-inches for water lines having an outside diameter of 3-inches or less.3.03 PREPARATION OF FOUNDATION FOR PIPE LAYINGA. If over-excavation occurs, backfill and compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density per ASTMD4253 or backfill with granular bedding material.B. In case of rock excavation, carry excavation minimum of 6 IN below established grade and backfill tograde with suitable earth or granular material. Form bell holes in trench such that only barrel of pipeis supported by bedding material.C. Subgrade stabilization: Provide subgrade stabilization when directed by the Contracting Officer inaccordance with these specifications. Observe the following requirements when unstable trenchbottom materials are encountered.1. Notify Contracting Officer when unstable materials are encountered and define by Drawingstation locations and limits. Contracting Officer will evaluate the trench conditions anddetermine the quantity of stabilization and the amount of additional compensation.2. Remove unstable trench bottom caused by Contractor failure to dewater, rainfall, orContractor operations. Replace with subgrade stabilization with no additional compensationfrom the Government.3.04 BACKFILLINGA. Do not backfill until tests to be performed on system show system is in full compliance to specifiedrequirements. Partial fill, over the barrel of pipe only, may be permitted to restrain the system duringtesting.B. Methods: Provide backfill and compaction methods of following types1. Granular Bedding (pipe zone) material. Furnish compacted bedding where indicated on thedrawings or specified up to 12 IN above top of pipe or conduit. Comply with the followinga. Place backfill in lifts not exceeding 8 IN (loose thickness).b. Hand place, shovel slice, and pneumatically tamp all bedding (pipe zone) material.02320 - 404/08 UTILITY TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

c. Observe specific pipe or conduit manufacturer's recommendations regardingmethods of backfilling and compaction.d. Ensure compaction of each lift to requirements stated in these specifications.2. Compacted backfill. Perform remaining backfill in accordance with the following:a. Place backfill in lifts not exceeding 8 IN (loose thickness).b. Observe specific pipe or conduit manufacturer's recommendations regardingmethods of backfilling and compaction.c. Exercise extreme care in backfilling operations to avoid displacing joints andappurtenances or causing any horizontal or vertical misalignment, separation, ordistortion. Repair damages, distortions or misalignments to full satisfaction ofContracting Officer.d. All excavated material that cannot be utilized as backfill, or in any othercapacity, shall be removed from the National Monument and properly disposedof by the Contractor. No unused, excavated material shall be stockpiled in theNational Monument.3. Place stored native topsoil as final backfill layer for unimproved areas outside paving.C. Water flushing for consolidation will not be permitted.3.05 COMPACTIONA. Compaction requirements: Place and ensure backfill and fill materials to achieve an equal or "higher"degree of compaction than undisturbed materials adjacent to the work; however, in no case shalldegree of compaction be less than "Minimum Compaction" specified.B. Unless noted otherwise on drawings or specified by other sections of these specifications, complywith following trench compaction criteria.LOCATION SOIL TYPE DENSITYCohesionless soils1. Bedding (pipe zone)materials - all areasCohesive soilsRelative density of 70 percent by ASTMD4253 or D425490 percent of maximum dry density byASTM D1557 or D6982. Compacted Backfill:A. Under pavements,roadways surfaces, withinhighway right-of-waysB. Under turfed, sodded, plantseeded, non-traffic areas.Cohesionless soilsCohesive soilsCohesionless soilsCohesive soilsRelative density of 70 percent by ASTMD4253 or D425495 percent of maximum dry density byASTM D698Relative density of 70 percent by ASTMD4253 or D425490 percent of maximum dry density byASTM D1557 or D698C. Moisture content at time of placement to be as follows:02320 - 504/08 UTILITY TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

1. Under roadway crossings or pavements, moisture content to be 2 percent plus/minus ofoptimum moisture content, as specified in accordance with ASTM D698.2. In all other areas of trench construction, the moisture content will be adjusted by either thedrying of the materials or wetting of the material to a percentage required to obtain thecompaction as specified.3.06 PAVEMENTA. Temporary Backfill1. All trenches in or adjacent to the National Monument entrance road shall be temporarilybackfilled prior to darkness, weekends, and holidays.B. Permanent Pavement1. Permanent pavement shall conform to the requirements of the San Benito County andCALTRANS Standard Specifications.3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Testing1. Perform inplace moisture density tests as directed by the Contracting Officer to ensure trenchbackfill complies with specified requirements. Pay for all costs associated with compactiondensity tests. Where backfill compaction does not meet moisture density test requirementsand after backfill has been removed as directed by Contracting Officer and situationcorrected, perform additional tests as directed until compaction meets or exceedsrequirements.2. Moisture density tests are to be taken at a minimum of one test every 24 IN lift per 75 linealFT of trench.END OF SECTION02320 - 604/08 UTILITY TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

SECTION 02332WATERINGPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of furnishing, hauling, and applying water required forcompaction of backfills, subgrade, and base course, and for landscaping, dust control, and otherconstruction operations.1 .2 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Water availability - Section 01510.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 WATERA. Free of debris, organic matter, and other objectionable substances.PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 WATER TRUCKA. At least 1,000-gallon capacity.B. Keep at least one water truck on site at all times, unless Contracting Officer approves removal ofthe truck from the site before final completion.3 .2 APPLICATIONA. Use pressure type distributors or a pipeline equipped with sprinkler system. Provide approvedmeter devices near points of discharge.B. Ensure a uniform application of water for optimum moisture content. Avoid excessive runoff andminimize water waste.C. The Contractor may water excavation areas before excavating. Drill full depth of excavation tomake moisture determinations.D. If overwatering occurs, de-water at no additional expense to the Government.PART 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT4 .1 WATERINGA. Payment will be included in the bid item to which this work relates.02332-1WATERING

END OF SECTION02332-2WATERING

SECTION 02370SOIL RETENTION BLANKETPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing soil retention blanket on slopes withgreater than 3:1 slope.1 .2 SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01330.B. Submit one square foot of the soil retention blanket for approval.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 SOIL RETENTION BLANKETA. Soil retention blankets shall be biodegradable straw mat blanket with biodegradable cotton threadnetting on both sides. Retention blanket shall be designed for 3:1 slopes and weigh 5 lbs/squareyard. Soil retention blankets shall be factory fumigated to ensure that all weed and other seeds arecompletely destroyed, and shall be shipped in a manner that does not allow acquisition of anyseeds. All soil retention blanket shall be tagged to verify fumigation. Acceptable productsinclude North American Green S150BN for slopes greater than 3:1, as manufactured by NorthAmerican Green, Evansville, Indiana 47711, or approved equal.B. Roll Size:1. Length: 83.5 feet.2. Width: 6.5 feet.3. Weight: 30 pounds per roll plus or minus 10 percent.2 .2 STAPLESA. No. 11 gauge steel wire formed into U shape with legs 6 inches long and a 1-inch crown.PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 APPLICATIONA. Install soil retention blanket on all disturbed areas with slopes of 3:1 or greater or as shown on theplans.3 .2 INSTALLATION OF SOIL RETENTION BLANKET02370-1SOIL RETENTION BLANKET

A. Preparation: Install soil retention blanket within 7 days of final grading. Areas to receive blanketshall be smooth, free of deep footprints, vehicle tracks and other major irregularities, as long asthere is contact between the blanket and the soil.B. General: Unroll the blanket on the ground, flat, with netting on top, without stretching, so that itlies loosely but smoothly in contact with the soil surface. Staple to the ground without gapping.C. Slopes: Use North American Green S150BN. Install blanket horizontally starting at toe of slope,overlapping undisturbed area below, 18 inches minimum. Place next upslope blanket, overlappingfirst blanket 6 inches. Staple in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, stapling downslopeedge through upslope edge of lower blanket. Overlap final upslope blanket over undisturbed area18 inches minimum. Overlap end joints 6 inches minimum and staple.PART 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT4 .1 SOIL RETENTION BLANKETA. Payment will be included in the bid item to which this work relates.END OF SECTION02370-2SOIL RETENTION BLANKET

SECTION 02502UTILITY LINE MARKINGPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing marking tape, surface markers andlocator wire in utility trench.1 .2 SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01330.B. Samples: 1-foot length of locator wire, 24-inch strips of tape and 2 markers.C. Certification that the materials used in the tape fabrication meet the requirements of this section.D. Installation procedure if the cable is installed by plowing.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 NONDETECTABLE MARKING TAPEA. Construction: Total thickness of tape shall not be less than 0.0005 inch (0.5 mil) plus or minus 10percent manufacturing tolerances.1. Film: Inert plastic. Each film layer shall be not less than 0.0005 inch thick (0.5 mil).B. Imprint: 3/4-inch or larger bold black letters.C. Legend: Identify buried utility line tape with imprint such as "Caution: Water Line Below".Repeat identification at approximately 24-inch intervals.D. Background Color: For water lines use APWA color code Safety Precaution Blue.2 .2 LOCATOR WIREA. Insulated, solid copper wire, 14 ga., UF, THWN or THHN.2 .3 LOCATOR WIRE BOXA. Test box, C.P. Test Services Inc., Model NM-4, or approved equal02502-111/07 UTILITY LINE MARKING

PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 MARKING TAPEA. Install tape in backfill directly over each buried utility line at the depth shown on the drawings.Place tape by plowing or during final backfilling.B. Where utilities are buried in a common trench, identify each line by a separate warning tape. Burytapes side by side directly over the applicable line.3 .2 LOCATOR WIREA. Place locator wire on top of the utility and secure with tape at 5-foot intervals. Wire shall becontinuous strand. Bring locator wire to surface as shown on the drawings or at maximum 300-foot intervals and install in locator wire box. Loop 2-feet of extra wire and install inside of thelocator wire box. Do not cut the wire at the locator wire box installations.B. In paved areas, install locator wire box 3 feet off edge of pavement.END OF SECTION02502-211/07 UTILITY LINE MARKING

SECTION 02503RESTORATION OF SURFACESPART 1 GENERAL1.1 WORK INCLUDEDA. All types of surfaces, pavement and other features disturbed, damaged or destroyed duringthe performance of the work under or as a result of the operations of the contract shall berestored as specified herein.B. The quality of materials and the performance of work used in the restoration shall produce asurface or feature equal to or better than the condition of each before the work began.1.2 RELATED SECTIONSA. Section 02320: Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting for UtilitiesB. Section 02510: Pavement and Concrete Curbs1.3 SCHEDULE OF RESTORATIONA. Disturbed surfaces other than pavement shall be fine graded to original on proposed gradesonly. Reseeding of these areas will not be required. However, soil stabilization and runoffcontrol best practices including logs, water bars, and other diversion measures, shall beimplemented to control erosion.B. In general, permanent restoration of paved surfaces will not be permitted until one months’time has elapsed after excavations have been completely backfilled as specified.C. The replacement of surfaces at any time, as scheduled or as directed, shall not relieve theContractor of responsibility to repair damages by settlement or other failures.PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION3.1 TEMPORARY PAVEMENTA. Immediately upon completion of refilling of the trench or excavation, the Contractor shallplace a temporary surface over all disturbed areas of streets and other vehicular pathwayswhere the original surface has been disturbed as a result of the Contractors operations.B. For dust prevention, the Contractor shall treat all surfaces as frequently as may be required.C. The temporary surface shall be maintained by the Contractor in a safe and satisfactorycondition until such time as the permanent paving is completed. The Contractor shallimmediately remove and restore all pavement as shall become unsatisfactory.02503-104/08 RESTORATION OF SURFACES

3.2 PERMANENT PAVEMENT REPLACEMENTA. The permanent and final repaving of all streets and similar surfaces where pavement has beenremoved, disturbed, settled or damaged by or as a result of performance of the Contract shallbe repaired and replaced by the Contractor, by a new and similar pavement. See Specification02510.3.3 PREPARATION FOR PERMANENT PAVEMENTA. When scheduled and within the time specified, the temporary surface shall be removed and abase prepared.B. Prior to placing the permanent pavement all service boxes and similar structures within thearea shall be adjusted to the established grade and cross-section.C. The edges of existing asphalt pavement shall be cut a minimum of one foot beyond theexcavation of disturbed base whichever is greater.1. All cuts shall be parallel or perpendicular to the centerline of the street.3.4 OTHER TYPES OF RESTORATIONA. Watercourses shall be reshaped to the original grade and cross-section and all debrisremoved. Where required to prevent erosion, the bottom and sides of the watercourse shall beprotected.B. Flow lines indicated on the topographical survey shall not be altered by construction activityexcept where specified on the construction drawings. The Contractor is responsible forreestablishing flow lines that have been affected by construction equipment or personnelunder the supervision of the Contractor.C. Trails and slopes shall be restored to their original condition upon completion of constructionactivity at a given area. The Contractor must ensure that no new channel flow lines orwatercourses have been created as a result of construction activity.END OF SECTION02503-204/08 RESTORATION OF SURFACES

SECTION 02510PAVEMENT AND CONCRETE CURBSPART 1 - GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDESA. This section covers aggregate base course, bituminous pavement and concrete curbs.1.02 RELATED WORKA. Division 3 - Concrete1.03 QUALITY STANDARDSA. Governing Standards. Except as otherwise specified or shown, materials, equipment, andconstruction methods for pavement shall comply with the applicable provisions of Section 39of the Caltrans Standard Specifications.B. AASHTO M17, M140, M147, M208, M226, T89, T90, T96, T180.1.04 SUBMITTALSA. In accordance with Section 01330.B. Submit samples of aggregate and asphalt cement as required by General Standard.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE AND BITUMINOUS PAVEMENTA. Aggregate base course:1. Class 2, ¾-inch maximum in conformance with Section 26, Aggregate Bases of theCALTRANS standard specifications.B. Bituminous Pavement:1. Type B, ½-inch maximum grading in conformance with Section 39, Asphalt Concreteof the CALTRANS standard specifications.C. Thickness shall be a minimum of 4-inches.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 GENERALA. Drives, parking areas, curb, and walks shall be constructed to the lines, grades, and crosssections indicated on Drawings. Type of construction shall be as indicated on the Drawingsand as specified herein.02510 - 111/07 PAVEMENT, CURBS, AND WALKS

B. Cutting Existing Pavement: Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect existingpavement or surfacing. Asphalt and concrete that must be removed shall be cut to a neat lineprior to removal, and the resulting clean edge shall be protected during construction. If thisedge is damaged, the existing pavement shall be cut again until a neat edge is obtained.C. Preparation of Subgrade: Subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted and properly shaped beforeany surfacing materials are placed. No concrete or hot bituminous pavement shall be placed onsubgrade that is frozen, muddy, or has frost or water thereon.3.02 BITUMINOUS PAVEMENTA. Aggregate base course shall be placed and compacted on top of finished and compactedsubgrade. Placement and compaction methods shall be as specified in the governing standards.B. Prior to placing the hot bituminous pavement, the top surface of the aggregate base courseshall be given a prime coat of diluted asphalt emulsion applied as specified in the governingstandards for hot bituminous pavement. In addition, the exposed edge of existing asphalt, newor existing concrete, or metal castings that will not have hot bituminous pavement placedagainst them shall be coated with a tack coat as specified in the governing standards for hotbituminous pavement.C. Hot bituminous pavement shall then be placed in one lift, to the grades shown on theDrawings. The placement and compaction of the hot bituminous pavement shall be asspecified in the governing standards.3.03 CONCRETE CURBSA. Concrete curb shall be constructed in the locations and to the shape indicated on the drawings.B. Compact each layer of subgrade to a minimum of 95 percent of Standard Proctor density(ASTM-D698).C. Expansion joints shall be placed at changes in direction and at intervals not greater than 50feet. Expansion joints shall be ¾ inch wide, filled to within one inch of the surface withbituminous expansion joint material cut of the shape of the curb section. Dowels shall beplaced across expansion joints as indicated on the drawings.D. Contraction joints shall be provided at intervals of not more than 10 feet. Contraction jointsshall consist of a groove at least 1-1/2 inch deep sawed in the green concrete or a plane ofweakness formed by inserting a removable metal template.E. All expansion and contraction joints shall be filled flush to the surface with joint sealingcompound. The joint sealing compound shall be finished slightly concave and shall not beallowed to overflow the joint.02510 - 211/07 PAVEMENT, CURBS, AND WALKS

F. All exposed edges of curb shall be rounded with a suitable edging tool. Exposed surfaces shallbe finished smooth and even with a steel trowel and then given a light broom finish.END OF SECTION02510 - 311/07 PAVEMENT, CURBS, AND WALKS

SECTION 02725AGGREGATE BASE COURSEPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of furnishing and placing aggregate, and filler if required, on aprepared subgrade.1 .2 SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01330.B. Two copies of certified weight tickets for each load of aggregate delivered to project site.C. If materials are obtained from a commercial source, submit certification from the suppliercertifying that aggregate base course meets the requirements of this section.1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Testing required to determine compliance with the requirements for the work of this section willbe the responsibility of the Contractor.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 AGGREGATEA. Clean, hard, durable fragments or particles of crushed stone, crushed slag, or crushed or naturalgravel. Materials that break up due to freeze-thaw or wet-dry cycling shall not be used.1. Coarse Aggregate: AASHTO T96-77, percentage of wear of not more than 50.2. Fraction passing No. 40 sieve shall have a liquid limit not to exceed 25 and a plasticityindex of not more than 6, as determined by AASHTO T89-81 and T90-81, respectively.3. Material, inclusive of filler, shall meet following screen analysis requirements by weight:Sieve SizePercent Passing3/4-inch 100No. 4 30 - 65No. 8 25 - 50No. 200 3 - 152 .2 FILLER02725-1AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

A. Finely divided mineral matter such as rock or slag dust, hydrated lime, hydraulic cement, or othersuitable mineral matter free from organic impurities and clay.2 .3 WATERA. Section 02332.PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 PLACINGA. If the required compacted depth of the aggregate base course exceeds 6 inches, place course intwo or more layers of approximately equal thickness. The maximum compacted thickness of anyone layer shall not exceed 6 inches.3 .2 MIXINGA. Mix aggregate base course and appropriate amount of water for compaction in an approved mixer.After mixing, transport aggregate to the job site while it contains the proper moisture content andplace on the area to be paved with an approved aggregate spreader. Before compaction, removeexcess moisture.B. When commercial binders or fillers are used with aggregate, mix with a central mixing plant ofthe twin-pugmill type. Other methods that ensure a thorough and homogenous mixture may beused on written approval.3 .3 COMPACTIONA. Compact each layer to a density of not less than 95 percent of the maximum density, asdetermined by AASHTO T180-74, Method D. Contracting Officer will test density in-place, inaccordance with AASHTO T191-61, T205-64, or other recognized method. Random tests forcompacted depth will be made during the progress of the work.3 .4 SURFACE FINISHINGA. Use a smooth steel wheel roller for the final rolling of top surface base course. Water surface andevenly spread loose stones before final rolling. Make minimum of two complete passes over areato embed stones. Correct soft spots developed during rolling.B. Compacted base course surface shall be smooth and free from waves and other irregularities.Unsatisfactory portions of base course shall be torn up, reworked, relaid, and rerolled, at noadditional expense to the Government.3 .5 MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Acceptance will be based on periodic samples and tests taken following mixing and before laying.3 .6 TOLERANCESA. Surface: The Contracting Officer will test finished surface of the base course with a 10-footstraightedge or other device. The variation between any two contacts with the surface shall notexceed 1/2 inch. Any areas not complying with these tolerances shall be reworked to obtainconformity.02725-2AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

B. Width: Plan dimension, plus or minus 2 inches.C. Thickness: Plan dimension, plus or minus 1/2 inch.3 .7 MAINTENANCEA. Maintain base course in a satisfactory condition until surfaced or until final acceptance.PART 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT4 .1 AGGREGATE BASE COURSEA. Payment will be included in the bid item to which this work relates.END OF SECTION02725-3AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

SECTION 02743ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENTPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of constructing one or more surface courses composed of amixture of aggregate, filler if required, and bituminous material, placed on a prepared base. Thissection includes asphalt patching for areas where utility lines cross existing paved surfaces andwhere new structures are constructed in existing paved areas.1 .2 DEFINITIONSA. Standard Specifications: Whenever reference is made to 1992 CalTrans Standard Specifications,it shall be interpreted to mean the Standard Specifications issued by the State of CaliforniaBusiness and Transportation Agency, Department of Transportation (CalTrans), and the followingshall apply:1. In the case of conflict between the CalTrans Standard Specifications and thesespecifications, these specifications shall govern.2. Where the term “Engineer” is used in the CalTrans Standard Specifications, it shall beunderstood to mean the “Contracting Officer”.3. Where the term “Special Provisions” is used in the CalTrans Standard Specifications, itshall be understood to mean these specifications.4. Where the term “State” is used in the CalTrans Standard Specifications, it shall beunderstood to mean the “Government”.5. Any provision for measurement and payment specified in the CalTrans StandardSpecifications shall be disregarded and the provisions of these specifications shall govern.1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Standards as established by American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials(AASHTO) and 1992 CalTrans Standard Specifications govern the work of this section.B. Testing required to determine compliance with the work of this section will be the responsibilityof the Contractor. The tests shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory. TheContracting Officer may select the test sites.C. Frequency of compaction testing shall be one test for every 200 square feet of paved area. TheContractor shall not proceed with work over the area being tested until the results have beenverified by the Contracting Officer. If test results indicate an area does not meet the specifiedrequirements, the Contractor shall remove the defective work, replace, and retest at no additionalexpense to the Government.1 .4 SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01330.12/97 02743-1ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

B. Job-Mix Formula: Before producing bituminous mixture, submit a job-mix formula for eachmixture to the Contracting Officer for approval. Should a change in source of material beproposed, or should a job-mix formula prove unsatisfactory, submit a new job-mix formula forapproval. Each job-mix formula submitted shall include the following information:1. The percentage of aggregate passing each specified sieve, based on dry weight of aggregate(California Tests 202 and 105).2. Test results on the combined aggregate including the Los Angeles rattler test (CaliforniaTest 211), percentage of crushed coarse aggregate (California Test 205), and SandEquivalent test (California Test 217).3. The percentage of bituminous material to be added, based on the total weight of themixture.4. The percentage of any stabilizing agent such as lime, portland cement, or antistrip agent.5. Test results on the bituminous concrete mixture for Swell, Moisture Vapor Susceptibility,and Stabilometer Value. The testing shall be according to California Test 367.C. Samples: Asphalt cement, 1-quart minimum sample for each load delivered.D. Certificates:1. Certification from supplier to the Contracting Officer that the asphalt cement is of correcttype and meets requirements of this section. Two copies will be required for each load.2. Two copies of certified weight tickets for each load of bituminous concrete.1 .5 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Apply mixture only during hours of daylight; when air temperature is 50 degrees F or higher;when surfaces to be paved are dry and free of frost, snow, or ice; and when precipitation is notimminent.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 AGGREGATE BASE COURSEA. Section 02725.2 .2 AGGREGATEA. The aggregate shall meet the general and physical requirements of CalTrans Section 39, StandardSpecifications, Type A, 3/4-inch maximum, coarse grading. When crushed gravel is used, aminimum of 50 percent of the material passing the No. 4 sieve shall have at least one fracturedface. In the table below, the symbol “X” is the gradation which the Contractor proposes to furnishfor the specific sieve. The proposed gradation shall meet the gradation shown in the table under“Limits of Proposed Gradation”.12/97 02743-2ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

Sieve SizeLimits of ProposedGradationOperating RangeContract Compliance1-inch 100 1003/4-inch 90 - 100 87 - 1003/8-inch 60 - 75 55 - 80No. 4 45 - 50 X ± 5 X ± 8No. 8 32 - 36 X ± 5 X ± 8No. 30 15 - 18 X ± 5 X ± 8No. 200 3 - 7 0 - 102 .3 BITUMINOUS MATERIALA. Asphalt binder to be mixed with aggregate shall be steam-refined paving asphalt, Grade AR-4000,meeting the requirements of CalTrans Sections 39 and 92, Standard Specifications. The amountof asphalt in the mix will be determined by the approved job mix formula.2 .4 FILLERA. If filler is required, the filler material shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M17-77.2 .5 STORING, PROPORTIONING, AND MIXING MATERIALSA. Material storage, proportioning, and mixing shall meet the requirements of CalTrans Section 39,Standard Specifications. Mix temperature leaving the plant shall not exceed 300 degrees F.PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 EQUIPMENTA. Plant, hauling, placing, and rolling equipment shall be adequate to ensure uniformity andcontinuity of operations and be in good operating condition, and shall meet the requirements ofCalTrans Section 39, Standard Specifications.B. Hauling Equipment: Trucks used for hauling bituminous mixtures shall have tight, clean, smoothmetal beds which have been thinly coated with a minimum amount of paraffin oil, lime solution,or other approved material to prevent the mixture from adhering to the beds. Each truck shallhave a cover of canvas or other suitable material sized to protect the mixture from the weather.C. Bituminous Pavers:1. Bituminous pavers shall be self-contained, power-propelled units, provided with anactivated screed or strike-off assembly, heated if necessary, and capable of spreading andfinishing courses of bituminous plant mix material in widths applicable to the specifiedtypical section and thicknesses shown on the drawings.12/97 02743-3ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

2. The paver shall be equipped with a receiving hopper having sufficient capacity for auniform spreading operation. The hopper shall be equipped with a distribution system toplace the mixture uniformly in front of the screed.3. Maintain screed at the proper elevation at each end by controlling the elevation of one endand automatically controlling the transverse slope or by controlling the elevation of eachend independently or as directed by the Contracting Officer.4. The screed or strike-off assembly shall effectively produce a finished surface of therequired evenness and texture without tearing, shoving or gouging the mixture. The pavershall be capable of being operated at forward speeds consistent with satisfactory laying ofthe mixture.D. Rollers:1. Rollers shall be of the steel-wheel, vibratory, pneumatic tire type, or combination, capableof reversing without backlash. Steel-wheel rollers other than vibrating shall be capable ofexerting a force of not less than 250 pounds per inch of width of the roller. Vibratingsteel-wheel rollers shall have a minimum weight of 6 tons.2. Pneumatic-tired rollers shall have smooth tread tires of equal size that will provide auniform compaction pressure for the full width of the roller and shall be capable ofexerting a ground pressure of at least 80 pounds per square inch.3 .2 APPLICATIONA. Conditioning of Existing Surface:1. When the old base is irregular, it shall be brought to uniform grade and cross section asdirected by the Contracting Officer. Sawcut all existing pavement edges back to clean andsound material.2. Paint contact surfaces of sawcut asphalt concrete, curbing, gutters, manholes, and otherstructures with a thin, uniform coating of bituminous material before placing thebituminous mixture against them.B. Preparation of Bituminous Material: Provide a continuous supply of the bituminous material tothe mixer at a uniform temperature at all times; avoid local overheating.C. Material delivered to the paver shall not be less than 225 degrees F.3 .3 SPREADING AND FINISHING MIXA. The mixture shall be laid upon an approved surface, spread and struck off to the grade andelevation established. Use bituminous pavers to distribute the mixture either over the entire widthor over such partial width as may be practicable.B. The longitudinal joint in one layer shall offset that in the layer immediately below byapproximately 6 inches.C. On areas where irregularities or unavoidable obstacles make the use of mechanical spreading andfinishing equipment impracticable, the mixture shall be spread and raked by hand tools. For suchareas the mixture shall be dumped, spread, and screeded to give the required compacted thickness.12/97 02743-4ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

D. Transport and place bituminous mixture on the area to be paved in a manner that will minimizesegregation. Remove segregated areas behind the paver immediately and replace the segregatedmaterial with specification material before the initial rolling has taken place. The removal andreplacement of nonspecification material or unacceptable work shall be accomplished at noadditional expense to the Government.E. Place bituminous material as continuously as possible. Rollers shall not pass over the unprotectedend of a freshly laid mixture unless authorized by the Contracting Officer. Form transverse jointsby cutting back on the previous run to expose the full depth of the course. When directed, use acoat of bituminous material on contact surfaces of all joints just before additional mixture isplaced against the previously rolled material.3 .4 COMPACTING MIXA. After the bituminous mixture has been spread and struck off, and surface irregularities have beenadjusted, thoroughly and uniformly compact mixture by rolling.B. Roll surface when the mixture is in the proper condition and when the rolling does not causeundue displacement, cracking or shoving.C. The number, weight, and type of rollers furnished shall be sufficient to obtain the requiredcompaction while the mixture is in a workable condition.D. Continue rolling until all roller marks are eliminated and the minimum density specified has beenobtained.E. Any displacement occurring as a result of the reversing of the direction of a roller, or from othercauses, shall be corrected at once by the use of rakes and addition of fresh mixture when required.Care shall be exercised in rolling not to displace the line and grade of the edges of the bituminousmixture.F. To prevent adhesion of the mixture to the rollers, keep wheels properly moistened with water orwater mixed with very small quantities of detergent or other approved material. Excess liquid willnot be permitted.G. Along forms, curbs, headers, walls, and other places not accessible to the rollers, thoroughlycompact mixture with hand tampers or with mechanical tampers.H. Remove mixture that becomes loose and broken, mixed with dirt, or is in any way defective, andreplace with fresh hot mixture; compact to conform with the surrounding area.3 .5 PROTECTION OF PAVEMENTA. After final rolling, no vehicular traffic of any kind shall be permitted on the pavement until it hascooled and hardened.3 .6 ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Surface Tolerance: The variation between any two contacts with the surface shall not exceed 3/16inch in 10 feet. Correct all humps or depressions exceeding the specified tolerance by removingdefective work and replacing it with new material at no additional expense to the Government.B. Density: Acceptable density of the in-place bituminous concrete pavement shall be 95 percent ofthe optimum values as determined from the job-mix formula. Field sampling and density12/97 02743-5ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

C. A uniform compacted thickness shall be obtained for each course equal to or greater than thethickness shown. Individual tests shall not vary by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch.PART 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT4 .1 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENTA. Payment will be included in the bid item to which this work relates.END OF SECTION12/97 02743-6ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

SECTION 02831VINYL COATED CHAIN LINK FENCEPART 1: GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing vinyl coated chain link fence, gatesand accessories.1 .2 SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01330.B. Shop drawings or catalog cuts showing details of all construction and hardware for fence andgates. Provide product data indicating material compliance.C. Shop drawings showing location of fence, gates, each post and post size, and details of postinstallation, gate swing, hardware and accessories.D. Samples of PVC colors in the tan color range to match the adjacent buildings, in form of 6-inchlength of actual fabric wire to be used, and similar samples of PVC or polymer coating applied onposts, rails, and accessories in above colors specified. Contracting Officer shall select andapprove one color.1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Materials for fence and gates, including fittings and accessories, shall be products of onemanufacturer.B. Replace any components that have vinyl coating damage that permits the coating to be peeledback.C. Provide a copy of ASTM F567-93 for use on the job site.PART 2: PRODUCTS2 .1 MANUFACTURERA. Anchor Fence, Inc., 6500 Eastern Avenue, Baltimore, MD 21224, or approved equal.2 .2 VINYL COATED FABRICA. PVC coated over galvanized steel wire: ASTM F668-94, Type 2B, 7 mil thermally fusedpolyvinyl chloride. ASTM A641-92, galvanized steel core wire, tensile strength 75,000 psi, in 9gauge with 0.30 oz./ft 2 zinc coating.B. Size: Helically wound and woven to a height of 6 feet with 2-inch diamond mesh of 9 gauge wirewith diameter of 0.148 inch and breakload strength of 1290 lb.C. Selvage of fabric shall be twisted at one selvage and knuckled at other selvage.02831-1VINYL COATED CHAIN LINK FENCE

2 .3 VINYL COATED POSTSA. Steel Pipe: Type I, ASTM F 1083-93, standard weight Schedule 40; minimum yield strength of25,000 psi; size as indicated. Hot-dipped galvanized with minimum average 1.8 oz/ft 2 of coatedsurface area.1. Terminal posts (end, corner, or pull): Outside diameter, 2.875 inches; Wall thickness,0.203 inches; Weight, 5.79 lb/ft.2. Line posts: Outside diameter, 2.375 inches; Wall thickness, 0.154 inches; Weight, 3.66lb/ft.3. Rails and Braces: Outside diameter, 1.660 inches; Wall thickness, 0.140 inches; Weight,2.27 lb/ft.B. PVC-coated finish: In accordance with ASTM F 1234-93, apply supplemental color coating of10-14 mils of thermally fused PVC.2 .4 VINYL COATED CHAIN LINK SWING GATESA. Gate Frames: Fabricate chain link swinging gates in accordance with ASTM F 900-94 usinggalvanized round steel tubular members. Weld connections to form a rigid one-piece unit.Provide additional horizontal members as necessary to ensure proper strength.B. Vinyl Clad Fabric: Same as fence, color to match. Install fabric with hook bolts and tension barsat all 4 sides. Attach to gate frame at no more than 15 inches on center.C. Hardware Materials: ASTM F 900-94, hot dipped galvanized steel or malleable iron shapes tosuit gate size. Field coat moveable parts with special coating, provided by manufacturer, to matchadjacent finishes.D. Hinges: Structurally capable of supporting gate leaf and allow opening and closing withoutbinding. Non-lift-off type hinge design shall permit gate to swing 180 degrees outward.E. Latch: Forked type capable of retaining gate in closed position and have provision for padlock.Latch shall permit operation from either side of gate.F. Keeper: Gate keeper shall consist of mechanical device for securing free end of gate when in fullopen position.G. Drop Rod: Provide drop rod to hold inactive leaf. Provide gate stop pipe to engage center droprod. Provide locking device and padlock eyes as an integral part of latch, requiring one padlockfor locking both gate leaves.H. Gate Posts: Steel pipe, ASTM F 1083-93, standard weight schedule 40; minimum yield strength25,000 psi; size 3.00 inches. Hot-dipped galvanized with minimum 1.803 ft 2 of zinc.I. PVC Finish: Finish all components with 10-14 mils of thermally fused PVC.2 .5 VINYL COATED ACCESSORIESA. Chain Link Fence Accessories: ASTM F 626(Rev A)-94. Provide items required to completefence system. Galvanize each ferrous metal item in accordance with ASTM A 153-95 and finishto match framing. Finish all components with 10-14 mils of thermally fused PVC.02831-2VINYL COATED CHAIN LINK FENCE

B. Post Caps: Formed steel or cast malleable iron; weathertight closure, cap for tubular steel posts.Provide one cap for each post. Provide tops to permit passage of top rail.C. Top Rail and Brace Ends: Formed steel, malleable iron or cast iron, for connection of rails andbraces to terminal posts.D. Top Rail Sleeves: 6 inch sleeve allowing for expansion and contraction of top rail.E. Wire Ties and Clips: 9 gauge galvanized steel wire for attachment of fabric to line posts. Doublewrap 13 gauge for rails and braces. Hog ring ties of 12-1/2 gauge for attachment of wire totension wire.F. Brace and Tension Bands: Pressed steel.G. Tension Bars: One piece lengths equal to 2 inches less than full height of fabric with a minimumcross-section of 3/16 inch by 3/4 inch or equivalent fiberglass rod. Provide tension bars wherechain link fabric meets terminal posts.H. Truss Rods: Steel rods with minimum diameter of 5/16 inch.2 .6 PVC COATING COLORA. ASTM F934-96. Color as selected by the Contracting Officer.2 .7 NUTS AND BOLTSA. Galvanized but not vinyl coated.2 .8 CONCRETEA. Section 03300.PART 3: EXECUTION3 .1 SITE PREPARATIONA. Do not begin installation and erection before final grading is completed, unless otherwisepermitted by Contracting Officer.3 .2 FENCE FRAMING INSTALLATIONA. Install chain link fence in accordance with ASTM F 567-93 and manufacturer's instructions.B. Spacing: Space posts as shown on the drawings, but not more than 8’-4” on center.C. Terminal Post Location: Locate terminal posts at each fence termination and change in horizontalor vertical direction of 30 degrees or more.D. Setting Posts: Drill hole in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil. Holes shall have diameter asshown on drawings, and depths approximately 6 inches deeper than post bottom. Set posts plumb.Place concrete around posts in a continuous pour. Check each post for vertical and top alignment,and maintain in position during placement and finishing operations. Trowel finish around post.Slope to direct water away from posts.02831-3VINYL COATED CHAIN LINK FENCE

E. Gate Hardware: Set keepers, stops, sleeves and other accessories in concrete.F. Bracing: Install horizontal pipe brace at mid-height on each side of terminal posts. Firmly attachwith fittings. Install diagonal truss rods at these points. Install braces and adjust truss rod,ensuring posts remain plumb.G. Tension Wire: Provide tension wire at bottom of fabric. Install tension wire before stretchingfabric and attach to each post with ties or clips. Secure tension wire to fabric with 12.5 gauge hogrings 24 inches on center.H. Top Rail: Install lengths, 21 feet. Connect joints with sleeves for rigid connections withexpansion/contraction.I. Bottom Rails: Install bottom rails between posts with fittings and accessories.3 .3 INSTALLING FABRICA. Install fabric on security side, and attach so that fabric remains in tension after pulling force isreleased. Leave approximately 1 inch between finish grade and bottom selvage. Attach fabricwith wire ties or clip to line posts at 15 inches on center and to rails, braces and tension wire at 24inches on center.3 .4 GATE FRAMING INSTALLATIONA. Install gate posts in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Setting Posts: Drill hole in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil. Set posts plumb. Place concretearound posts in a continuous pour. Check each post for vertical and top alignment, and maintainin position during placement and finishing operations. Trowel finish around post. Slope to directwater away from posts.C. Gate hardware: Set keepers, stops, sleeves and other accessories in concrete. Check each post forvertical and top alignment and maintain in position during placement and finishing operations.3 .5 GATE INSTALLATIONA. Install gates plumb, level and secure for full opening without interference.B. Attach hardware by means which prevent unauthorized removal.C. Adjust hardware for smooth operation.D. Adjust hinges and bracing, of swing gates, allowing gate to hang level and swing freely.3 .6 ACCESSORIESA. Tie Wires: Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to persons and clothing.B. Fasteners: Install nuts on side of fence opposite fabric side for added security.3 .7 PAINTINGA. After installation, paint nuts, bolts, and any superficial scratches that do not require componentreplacement with liquid vinyl supplied by manufacturer.02831-4VINYL COATED CHAIN LINK FENCE

PART 4: PAYMENT4 .1 VINYL COATED CHAIN LINK FENCEA. Payment will be included in the bid item to which this work relates.END OF SECTION02831-5VINYL COATED CHAIN LINK FENCE

SECTION 02855BOLLARDSPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing metal bollards.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 POSTSA. Bollard posts shall be 6-inch diameter Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe, with length as shown onthe drawings.2 .2 CONCRETEA. Section 03300.2 .3 PAINTA. Section 09901.B. Paint Color: Finish paint color shall be Safety Yellow. Contracting Officer shall select andapprove finish paint color.2 .4 REFLECTORSA. Reflectorized metal band, 2 inches wide and long enough to cover 115 degrees of thecircumference of the post. Scotchlite, manufactured by 3M company, St. Paul, Minnesota, orapproved equal.PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 INSTALLATIONA. Excavate post holes to size and depth as shown on the drawings. Place posts as shown. Alignposts so that variation from vertical plane does not exceed 1/2 inch in 42 inches. Maintain postsin a plumb position while backfilling holes with concrete. Finish off top of concrete footing withpositive drainage slope as shown.B. Fill post with concrete and round off top cap as shown. Remove excess concrete from aroundpost.3 .2 PAINTINGA. Clean galvanized steel surfaces free of dirt, concrete, oil, and other surface contaminants. Paint allexposed metal parts of posts in accordance with Section 09901. Apply one coat of primer and twocoats of finish paint.02855-1BOLLARDS

3 .3 REFLECTORSA. Install reflectorized metal bands on bollards per manufacturer’s recommendations and as shownon the drawings.PART 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT4 .1 BOLLARDSA. Payment will be included in the bid item to which this work relates.END OF SECTION02855-2BOLLARDS

SECTION 03300CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETEPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of furnishing and placing concrete, including formwork,reinforcement, finishing, curing, and all related work. The work also includes required materialstesting.1.2 REFERENCESA. ACI 117 - Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.B. ACI 211.1 – Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and MassConcrete.C. ACI 301 - Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete.D. ACI 304 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete.E. ACI 305 and 306 - Hot and Cold Weather Protection for Concrete.F. ACI 309 - Recommended Practice for Consolidation of Concrete.G. ACI 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.H. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.I. ACI 347 - Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.J. ANSI/ASTM A82 - Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement.K. ASTM A615 – Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.L. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates.M. ASTM C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete.N. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement.O. ASTM C309 - Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.P. ASTM C494 - Water Reducing Admixtures for Concrete.Q. ASTM C618 - Fly Ash Mineral Admixture for Concrete.R. CRSI - Manual of Standard Practice.03300 - 104/07 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Testing of concrete shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Work and materials that aredefective shall be repaired or replaced and re-tested at the Contractor's expense. All testing shall bedone by a certified testing entity with relevant experience, and reported in accordance with theseSpecifications.B. Concrete Mix Design:1. Strength Requirements: ASTM C 94.2. Testing:3. Slump Tests: Samples shall be taken from every truck after discharge of approximately 15percent of load. If slumps differ by more than 2 inches, the mixer or agitator shall not beused until condition causing this variation is corrected. The equipment for these tests will befurnished by Contractor's certified independent testing laboratory technician.4. Compression Tests: Test specimens shall be made and cured in accordance with ASTM C 31and tested in accordance with ASTM C 39, using standard 6-inch diameter by 12-inch highcylinders. The Contractor shall obtain 4 cylinders for each major placement during the day.One cylinder shall be tested at an age of 7 days for information, two at an age of 28 days foracceptance, and one held in reserve to be tested if required.5. Field - Cured Compression Specimens: At the Contractor's option, additional specimens tobe field - cured may be taken to confirm strength of in-place concrete prior to backfillingoperations. Such specimens shall be cured on-site in close proximity to the concreteplacement.6. Enforcement of Strength Requirements: If the 28-day strength test fails to meet therequirements of ASTM C 94, the Project Manager may require that additional core samplesbe taken and tested in accordance with ASTM C 42. If the core tests are below strength, ifthere is evidence of damage by freezing, or if the concrete fails to meet specifications inother ways, the Project Manager may require that the defective concrete be removed andreplaced at no additional expense to the Government.C. The Contractor is responsible for quality control, including workmanship and materials furnished byhis subcontractors and suppliers.1. Inspection or testing does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to perform theWork in accordance with the Contract Documents.2. Workmanship: The Contractor is responsible for and shall bear the cost of correctingconcrete work which does not conform to the specified requirements including, but notlimited to, strength, tolerances, joint types and patterns, and finishes. Correct deficientconcrete by means acceptable to the Project Manager. The cost of extra work incurred toapprove corrective work shall be borne by the Contractor.D. Record of Work: A record shall be kept by the General Contractor listing the time and date ofplacement of all concrete for the structure. Such record shall be kept until the completion of theproject and shall be available to the Project Manager for examination at any time.03300 - 204/07 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

1.4 SUBMITTALSA. Shop Drawings:1. All shop drawings shall be original drawings and shall not be reproductions of the contractdocuments.2. Drawings: Submit detailed drawings for fabrication, bending and placement of concretereinforcement indicating size, dimension, bending, placing and construction joint details.Submit drawing showing locations of any construction joints not shown. Include allaccessories specified and required to support reinforcement. Comply with ACI DetailingManual SP 66 and requirements of ACI 318.B. Product Data:1. Submit data for proprietary materials and items, including admixtures, patching compounds,joint systems, curing compounds, sealants, and others as requested by the Project Manager.C. Certificates and Reports:1. Concrete Mix Design: Comply with ASTM C 94; furnish statement of composition ofconcrete mix and evidence that mix will meet quality specified herein, including cementcontent; entrained air content, design slump and unit weight.2. Admixtures: Submit admixture types and manufacturers with a written statement showingchloride content if any chloride was added during manufacture.3. Submit results of concrete slump and compressive strength tests.1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. General: Materials handling and batching shall conform to applicable provisions of ASTM C94.B. Reinforcing: Unload and store reinforcing bars so they will be kept free of mud and damage.C. Extra Water:1. Deliver concrete to site in exact quantities required by design mix.2. Should extra water be required for workability before depositing concrete, and water/cementratio of accepted mix design has not been exceeded, General Contractor's superintendentshall have sole authority to authorize addition of water. Any additional water added to mixafter leaving batch plant shall be indicated on truck ticket and signed by person responsible.3. Where extra water is added to concrete it shall be mixed thoroughly for 50 revolutions of drumbefore depositing.4. Water may be added to the site only once for each batch.5. An additional slump test shall be performed following the addition of any water.D. Redosage with High Range Water Reducing Mixture (Superplasticizer): May be done with prioracceptance of Project Manager regarding dosage and time periods.1.6 JOB CONDITIONSA. Environmental Requirements:1. Cold Weather Placement:a. When for three successive days prior to concrete placement the average dailyoutdoor temperature drops below 40 o F or when the average outdoor temperature is03300 - 304/07 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

expected to drop below 40 o F on the day of concrete placement, preparation,protection and curing of concrete shall comply with ACI 306.R.b. Concrete temperature at time of placement shall conform to minimum values of ACI306.R, and shall not exceed minimum values by more than 20 o F.c. Subject to acceptance by the Project Manager, an accelerating admixture may beused. Admixtures shall meet requirements of Part 2. Calcium Chloride and otherchloride-type accelerating admixtures will not be allowed.d. Comply with concrete protection temperature requirements of ACI 306.R. Recordconcrete temperatures during specified protection period at intervals not to exceed16 hours and no less than twice during any 24-hour period.e. Submittal of detailed procedures, means, and methods, for production,transportation, placement, protection, curing, and temperature monitoring ofconcrete during cold weather is required.2. Hot Weather Placement:a. When depositing concrete in hot weather, follow recommendations of ACI 305R.b. Temperature of concrete at time of placement shall not exceed 85 o F, makeprovisions for windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling, ice, or wet cover, orother means to provide concrete with temperature specified.c. When air temperatures on day of placement are expected to exceed 90 o F, mixingredients shall be cooled before mixing. Flake ice or well-crushed ice of a size thatwill melt completely during mixing may be substituted for all or part of mix water.d. Retarding admixture may be used subject to acceptance by the Project Manager.Admixtures shall meet requirements of Part 2.e. Prevent differential temperature between reinforcing steel and concrete by shadingor misting reinforcement, or other approved means.f. Protect to prevent rapid drying. Start finishing and curing as soon as possible.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 FORMWORKA. Contractor shall be responsible for design, strength, and safety of formwork. Formwork shall bedesigned to withstand vibrator action. Design, strength, spans, details, etc. of forms, shall be theContractor's responsibility, and shall be in full conformance with the form manufacturer'srecommendations.B. Form Ties: Snap-off metal, of required length, 1-inch diameter cone ends at exposed concrete. Formties shall be constructed so that no metal is closer than 1 1/2 inches to concrete surface when forms,inserts, and tie ends are removed.C. Fillets for Chamfered Corners: Wood strips or rigid plastic type; size as detailed; maximum possiblelengths.2.2 REINFORCEMENTA. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615 grade 60; billet-steel deformed bars, uncoated finish.B. Tie Wire: ASTM A82, minimum 16 gage annealed type.03300 - 404/07 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

C. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcementduring installation and placement of concrete. Wood, brick or other unacceptable material is notpermitted.2.3 CONCRETEA. General Requirements:1. Portland Cement:a. ASTM C 150, Type II. Use cement containing not more than 0.60 percent alkalies(calculated as the percentage of sodium oxide plus 0.658 times the percentage ofpotassium oxide) in concrete with aggregate that may be deleteriously reactive.b. Use one brand of cement throughout project unless approved otherwise.2. Fly ash will be required as a cementitious component of the mix. Fly ash shall conform toASTM C618 Class C or F. Fly ash shall constitute not less than 25% of total cementitiousmaterial by weight.3. Aggregate: ASTM C33 Class 3S. Obtain from same source throughout project.a. Fine Aggregate: Natural sand.b. Coarse Aggregate: Gravel or crushed stone containing no deleterious substances.c. Maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be 3/4 inch.4. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.B. Ready-Mix Concrete:1. Materials: Materials, including cement, aggregates, water, and admixtures, shall meet therequirements of ASTM C 94, subject to the additional requirements of this section.2. Quality of Concrete: Concrete shall be furnished under Option C, ASTM C 94, whereby themanufacturer assumes full responsibility for the selection of the proportions for the concretemixture, with the minimum allowable cement content specified. Submit statement ofcomposition as specified in Part 1 of this section.3. Required Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.4. Cementittious Content: Minimum of 564 pounds per cubic yard.5. Slump: Shall not exceed 4 inches, 6-inch maximum with superplasticizer; with tolerances asspecified in ASTM C 94.6. Maximum water - cement ratio: 0.45.7. Manufacture and Delivery:a. Measurement of materials, batching, mixing, transporting, and delivery shall be asspecified in ASTM C 94.b. Hauling Time: Discharge all concrete transmitted in a truck mixer, agitator, or othertransportation device not later than 1-1/2 hours, or 300 revolutions of the drum afterthe mixing water has been added, whichever is earliest. In hot weather, limit mixingtime to 45 minutes or 125 revolutions. If the supplier cannot meet theserequirements, then the water shall be introduced at the project site and the concretethoroughly mixed.2.4 ADMIXTURESA. General: Unless specified, no admixtures may be used without specific approval of the ProjectManager.B. Prohibited Products: Calcium chloride or admixtures containing more than 0.05% chloride ions orthiocyanates are not permitted.03300 - 504/07 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

C. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A.1. Subject to compliance with requirements recommended by manufacturer, provide one of thefollowing:a. "Eucon WR 75" - Euclid Chemical Co.b. “WRDA 64” - Grace Const. Productsc. “Pozzolith 322N" - Master Buildersd. “Plastocrete 161" - Sika Chemical Co.D. High Range Water Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): ASTM C494, Type F or G. Holdmaximum slump to less than 6 inches with water-cement ratio specified. Use superplasticizer in wallsand any other locations at contractor’s option.1. Subject to compliance with requirements recommended by manufacturer, provide one of thefollowing:a. “Eucon 37" - Euclid Chemical Co.b. “ADVA 100” - Grace Const. Productsc. “Pozzolith 400N" - Master Buildersd. “Sikament 86" - Sika Chemical Co.E. Non-Corrosive, Non-Chloride Accelerator: ASTM C494, Type C or E. The admixture manufacturermust have long-term, non-corrosive test data (of at least a year's duration) using an acceptableaccelerated corrosion test method such as electrical potential measurements.1. Subject to compliance with requirements recommended by manufacturer, provide one of thefollowing:a. "Accelguard 80" - Euclid Chemical Co.b. “PolarSet” - Grace Const. Productsc. “Pozzolith NC534" - Master Buildersd. “Plastocrete 161FL” - Sika Chemical Co.F. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494, Type D.1. Subject to compliance with requirements recommended by manufacturer, use one of thefollowing:a. "Eucon Retarder 75" - Euclid Chemical Co.b. “Daratard 17” - Grace Const. Productsc. “Pozzolith 122R" - Master Buildersd. “Plastiment” - Sika Chemical Co.G. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements.2.5 PATCHING GROUTA. Portland cement, water, and fine sand passing a No. 30 mesh sieve.B. Sika Top 122 plus, manufactured by Sika Corporation, or approved equivalent.2.6 NONSHRINK GROUTA. Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizingagents; capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 8,000 psi in 28 days.1. Subject to compliance with requirements, use one of the following:a. “Masterflow 928” – Master Buildersb. “Five Star Grout” – Five Star Products03300 - 604/07 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

2.7 SLEEVESA. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, sleeves shall consist of galvanized steel schedule 40 pipe,two pipe sizes larger than the carrier pipe.2.8 OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMSA. Items encased in concrete shall not be painted.2.9 BONDING AGENTA. Construction joint bonding agent.1. Subject to compliance with requirements, use one of the following:a. “Day-Chem Ad Bond (J-40)” – Dayton Superiorb. “Superior Concrete Bonder (J-41)” – Dayton Superiorc. “EUCO Weld” – Euclid Chemical CompanyB. Epoxy bonding agent.1. Subject to compliance with requirements, use one of the following:a. "Sikadur 32" - Sika Chemical Co.b. “Sika Armatec 110" - Sika Chemical Co.c. "Resi-Bond" - Dayton Superiord. "Concresive LPL" - Master Builders2.10 CURING MATERIALSA. Curing compound or material shall be compatible with required finishes and/or coatings. Must mettthe requirements of ASTM C309 or ASTM C171.B. Sheet Materials: ASTM C171 and ASTM D 4397, 4-mil polyethylene film or waterproof paper.C. Spray Applied Membrane Forming Liquids (applied in accordance with ACI 301).1. Subject to compliance with ASTM C309 requirements, use one of the following:a. "Kure-N-Seal" - Sonnebornb. "Safe Cure & Seal (J-18)" - Dayton Superiorc. "Masterkure 200W" - Master Buildersd. “Eucocure VOX” – Euclid Chemical Co.D. Moisture cure surfaces where curing compound or material are incompatible with required finishesand/or coating.E. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.2.11 ANCHORING SYSTEMSA. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554 Grade 36, unless otherwise indicated.B. Adhesive Anchors: “HIT HY 150” Injection Adhesive Anchor – Hilti Fastening System or approvedequal.03300 - 704/07 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 FORMWORKA. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that mightbe applied until such loads can be supported by concrete structure. Construct formwork so concretemembers and structures are correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position. Design formworkto be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast-in-place concrete surfaces andadjacent materials.B. Arrange formwork construction to allow for proper sequencing and removal without damage. Useorderly and symmetrical panel arrangement with minimum number of joints. Mount panels on rigidsupports to minimize deflection. Before proceeding, secure approval of formwork and procedures.C. Forms:1. Sufficiently tight to prevent loss of mortar.2. Seal wood with coating material to minimize absorption of moisture from the concrete.3. Coat textured forms with release agent and others where required. Application shall be priorto reinforcement placement.4. Coat steel forms with a non-staining, rust-preventive form oil or otherwise protect againstrusting. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable.D. Thoroughly remove all dirt, mortar, ice and foreign matter before each use. Where the bottom of theform is inaccessible from within, access panels shall be provided to permit thorough removal ofextraneous material before placing concrete.E. Chamfer all exposed horizontal and vertical edges or outer corners 3/4 inch, both interior and exteriorof structures, except where other construction contacts the concrete.F. Where tolerances are not stated elsewhere in these specifications or drawings for any individualstructure or feature, permissible deviations from established lines, grades, and dimensions are listedbelow:1. Variation From the Plumb:a. In the lines and surfaces of walls and arises: In 10 feet, 1/4-inch; in 20 feet, 3/8-inch;in 40 feet or more, 3/4-inch.2. Variation From the Level or From the Grades Shown:a. In Top of Walls: In any 10 feet, 1/4-inch maximum.3. Variation of the linear building lines from established position in plan and related position ofwalls: 1/2-inch maximum.4. Variation in the sizes and locations of sleeves, floor openings and wall openings: 1/4-inch.5. Variation of cross-sectional dimensions in the thickness of slabs and walls: Minus, 1/4-inch;plus, 1/2-inch.3.2 REINFORCEMENTA. Design: The reinforcement design shown on drawings shows only the necessary information fordetailing the reinforcement and preparing placing and bending details.B. Bending: In accordance with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, Chapter 7.03300 - 804/07 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

C. Placement: Place reinforcement accurately as shown. Adequately secure reinforcement in position byconcrete or metal chairs and spacers, in accordance with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. Distancebetween the steel and the surface, as shown; otherwise, in accordance with the CRSI Manual. Inwalls, use bolsters or chairs between form and reinforcement to prevent lateral displacement ofreinforcement and to ensure proper concrete cover.D. Placing bars in fresh concrete as the Work progresses (stabbing), and adjusting bars during theplacement of concrete shall not be permitted.E. Splices:1. Bar laps shall be in contact and securely tied.2. Locate splices of reinforcement as shown. For any splices not shown, provide splice lengthas called for on the Drawings or in accordance with ACI 318.F. Reinforcement shall be continuous around corners.G. Bars shall not be field bent unless otherwise approved by the Project Manager. Bars shall not be bentor straightened in a manner that will damage the bars. The use of heat to bend or straighten bars shallnot be permitted.H. Welding of reinforcing bars is not permitted without written permission of the Project Manager.I. Inspection: After reinforcement has been placed, it shall be inspected prior to placing the concrete.J. Condition of Surfaces: At time concrete is placed, all metal reinforcement shall be free from rust,scale, frost, or other coatings that would destroy or reduce the bond.3.3 JOINTS AND EMBEDDED ITEMSA. Construct all joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface.B. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints where shown.1. Obtain approval for joints not shown and locate them where they least impair the strength ofthe structure. Make joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement.2. Continue all reinforcing steel across construction joints.3. Use bonding agent at joints between fresh concrete and existing or fully cured, hardenedconcrete. Clean surfaces of laitance, coatings, loose particles, and foreign matter. Applybonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Bonding agent shall beDayton Superior, Day-Chem Ad Bond (J-40) or approved equal.C. Other Embedded Items, Penetrations, and Blockouts:1. Before concreting, place all required sleeves, inserts, anchor bolts, and embedded items.Anchor to prevent floatation and displacement.2. Give all trades whose work is related to the concrete ample notice and opportunity tointroduce embedded items before concrete is placed.3. Position embedded items accurately and support them against displacement. Fill voids insleeves, and inserts, and anchor slots temporarily with readily removable material to preventthe entry of concrete.03300 - 904/07 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

3.4 MIXINGA. When the concrete is mixed completely in a truck mixer, 70 to 100 revolutions at the mixing speedspecified by the manufacturer are required to produce uniformity of the concrete.3.5 PLACING OF CONCRETEA. Preparation Before Placing:1. Remove hardened concrete and foreign materials from inner surfaces of conveyingequipment.2. Check formwork for completion, check position and securement of reinforcement, jointmaterial, sleeves, anchors, and other embedded items, and obtain approval on entirepreparation.3. Remove ice and excess water and sprinkle semiporous subgrades sufficiently to eliminatesuction.4. Do not place concrete on frozen ground.5. Do not place concrete during rain, sleet, or snow unless protection is provided.B. Depositing:1. Place concrete in final position to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing.2. Direct concrete down the center of forms. Use drop chutes where necessary to prevent thestream of concrete from being separated by striking reinforcing or other embedded objects.3. Spread concrete in horizontal lifts between 6 inches and 20 inches high. Lifts shall be of aheight to minimize surface defects and eliminate rock pockets.4. Deposit concrete continuously and rapidly enough so that the layer supporting the one beingplaced is still plastic. If continuous placement is impossible, locate construction joints whereshown or as approved. Do not deposit concrete that has partially hardened or becomecontaminated by foreign material.5. Remove temporary form spreaders when concrete reaches them.C. Compacting:1. Use high frequency vibrators in the placement of concrete forms. When concrete is beingplaced on hardened concrete or in bottom of forms, exercise care to ensure completeconsolidation. After the initial lift, vibrator shall penetrate through and into top of previouslift of concrete.2. Internal vibrators shall have a minimum frequency of 8,000 rpm. Overvibrating and use ofvibrators to transport concrete within forms shall not be allowed. Insert and withdrawvibrators at many points, from 18 to 30 inches apart, for 5 to 15-second duration. Keep aspare vibrator on the project site during all concrete placing operations.3. Once concreting is started, it shall be carried on as a continuous operation until the placing ofthe panel or section is completed, preventing fresh concrete from being deposited onconcrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams and planes ofweakness within the section.4. Remove splashes or accumulations of hardened or partially hardened concrete or mortar onforms or reinforcement above general level of the concrete already in place before the workproceeds.5. Maintain reinforcement in proper position during concrete placement operations.3.6 FORM REMOVALA. Carefully remove forms to ensure the safety of the structure and avoid damage to concrete.03300 - 1004/07 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

B. Non-supporting forms (sides of columns, walls, etc.) may be removed after 24 hours, provided theconcrete will not be damaged, and curing operations are maintained.C. Supporting forms shall remain in place until all the following requirements are met:1. Concrete has cured a minimum of 7 days.2. Concrete has reached 80% of the specified 28-day compressive strength as determined bytest cylinders.3. Members have acquired sufficient strength to safely support their weight and all imposedloads. Carefully remove forms to ensure the complete safety of the structure.3.7 REPAIRING AND PATCHINGA. Patch all the tie holes, surface voids 1" or greater in diameter, and all repairable defective areasimmediately after form removal.B. All honeycombed and other defective concrete shall be removed to sound concrete with edgesperpendicular to the surface.C. Prepare surface and apply bonding agent in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.D. Mix, apply, and cure patching grout in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.3.8 FINISHES FOR FORMED SURFACESA. Rough Form Finish: Leave surface with texture imparted by the forms on concrete below finishedgrade.B. Smooth Form Finish: On concrete above finished grade and exterior concrete exposed to view,completely remove all fins. All form marks should be ground flush so that the concrete surface issmooth.C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At top of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfacesoccurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacentformed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacentunformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.FINISHES FOR CUT SURFACESCut Surfaces: Where existing concrete has been cut and removed leaving exposed structural steel; allsteel shall be recessed beyond the plane of the cut surface by grinding or melting, and the cut surfaceshall be ground and finished with an approved epoxy coating (see Division 09 for approved coating).3.9 FINISHES FOR SLABSA. Screening: After concrete has been thoroughly consolidated, screed slabs to the desired elevation andcontours by means of accurately placed edge forms and intermediate screed strips.B. Jointing: Locate and construct control joints as shown or specified.03300 - 1104/07 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

C. Float Finish:1. Place, consolidate, strike off, and level concrete, but do not work it further until ready forfloating. Begin floating when water sheen has disappeared and when the surface hasstiffened sufficiently.2. During or after the first floating, check planeness of surface with a 10-foot straightedgeapplied at not less than two different angles, and then cut down all high spots and fill all lowspots to achieve a true plane within 1/4 inch in 10 feet.3. Refloat slab immediately to a uniform sandy texture.3.10 CURING AND PROTECTIONA. General: Beginning immediately after placement, protect concrete from drying, excessively hot orcold temperatures, and mechanical injury. Keep moisture loss to a minimum until cement hashydrated and concrete is cured.B. Curing:1. Formed Surfaces: Keep forms wet. Cool metal forms exposed to the sun with water. Formsshall remain in place for 7 days unless a curing method as specified below is used.2. Duration of Curing: 7 days minimum.3. Methods of curing shall be as follows:a. Provide moisture-retaining cover curing as follows: Cover concrete surfaces withmoisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practical width withsides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive.Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material andwaterproof tape.b. Provide water curing as follows: Keep concrete surface continuously wet bycovering with water, or continuous water-fog spray. Cover concrete surface withabsorptive cover, thoroughly saturate cover with water and keeping continuouslywet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers.c. Provide Liquid Membrane Forming Curing Compound as follows: Apply specifiedcuring and sealing compound to concrete surfaces as soon as final finishingoperations are complete (within 2 hours). Apply uniformly in continuous operationby power-spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areassubjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintaincontinuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. Use LiquidMembrane Curing Compound only as approved by the Project Manager.C. Protection:1. In cold weather, maintain the moisture conditions but also, by heating or covering, maintaintemperature of the concrete between 50 degrees F and 70 degrees F for a period of at least 7days.2. In hot weather, take immediate steps to protect newly finished concrete from the dryingeffects of wind and sun, and maintain temperature of the air surrounding the concreteuniform within 5 degrees F in any one hour or 50 degrees F in any 24-hour period. Thetemperature of concrete when placed shall not exceed 90 degrees F.3. During curing period, protect concrete from mechanical damage, loading, shock, andvibration.03300 - 1204/07 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

3.11 DAMAGED OR DEFECTIVE CONCRETEA. Remove damaged or defective concrete before completion and acceptance of the work and replacewith acceptable concrete.END OF SECTION03300 - 1304/07 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

SECTION 03306CONCRETE FOR UTILITIESPART 1 – GENERAL1.01 WORK INCLUDEDA. All cast-in-place concrete used in the construction of pipelines and appurtenances includingcradles, encasements, thrust blocks, and anchors.B. All cast-in-place concrete used in the construction of sidewalks, gutters, curbs and other items ofrestoration.C. Reinforcing steel, formwork, and items of concrete accessories required for the completion of thework.1.02 RELATED SECTIONSA. Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting for Utilities1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Applicable codes, Standards and Specifications1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)2. American concrete Institute (ACI)B. Tests1. Tests for all materials shall be current within the past twelve (12) months prior to use inthe work.2. Make available to the Engineer upon request.1.04 SUBMITTALSA. Name and location of concrete supplier.B. Concrete mix design indicating amount of all ingredients for each class of concrete to be used inthe work.C. Manufacturer’s literature for curing compounds, joint materials, admixtures, etc.PART 2 – PRODUCTSA. Cement1. Conform to ASTM C150, Type II, low alkali03306 - 111/07 CONCRETE FOR UTILITIES

B. Fine and coarse Aggregates1. Aggregates shall comply with ASTM C33 and shall be non-reactive when tested inaccordance with ASTM C289.2. Fine aggregate shall be composed of clean, hard, durable, uncoated particles of sand, freefrom injurious amounts of clay, dust, soft or flaky particles, loam, shale, alkali, organicmaterial, or other deleterious matter.3. Coarse aggregate shall consist of broken stone or gravel composed of clean, hard, toughand durable stone and shall be free from soft, think, elongated or laminated pieces,disintegrated stone, clay, loam, organic, or other deleterious matter.C. Water1. Water shall be clean and free from sand, oil, acid, alkali, organic matter, and otherdeleterious substances.2. Water from public potable water supplies or water which has been proven to be suitablefor drinking is acceptable.D. Admixtures1. Water reducing – conform to ASTM C494, Type A.2. Air-entraining – conform to ASTM C260.3. All admixtures shall be approved by the Engineer prior to use.E. Reinforcing Steel1. Reinforcing steel bars shall be deformed new billet steel conforming to ASTM A615,Grade 60.2. Wire fabric shall be cold drawn steel conforming to ASTM A185.F. Premolded Joint Filler1. Expansion joint material shall be resilient and nonextruding type premolded bituminousimpregnated fiberboard, ½ inch thickness and of the width required for full depth joints.G. Membrane Curing Compound1. Membrane curing compound shall be pigmented and conform to the requirement ofASTM C309.H. Grout1. All grout shall be non-shrink, non-metallic, non-gas forming, preblended and ready foruse requiring only the addition of water.PART 3 – EXECUTION3.01 CONCRETE MIX DESIGNA. Mix design shall be established by the concrete supplier based on a proven strength for concretemade with similar ingredients.03306 - 211/07 CONCRETE FOR UTILITIES

B. Conform to ACI 211, except as specified herein, using approved materials.C. The concrete class to be used for various types of construction are as follows:Type of ConstructionThrust Blocks, Pipe Bedding, and Pipe EncasementCurbs, Gutters, SidewalksConcrete not otherwise specifiedConcrete ClassDCB1. The various combined aggregate gradings are as follows:Percentage Passing SievesSieve SizeGradingAGradingBGradingCGradingDGradingE50 mm (2 in) 100 100 - - -37.5 mm (1-1/2 in) 95 – 100 95 – 100 100 - -25.0 mm (1 in) 64 – 80 80 – 96 95 – 100 - -19.0 mm (3/4 in) 55 – 71 64 - 80 77 – 93 100 1009.5 mm (3/8 in) 37 – 53 40 – 52 50 – 70 92 – 100 90 - 1004.75 mm (No. 4) 32 – 42 35 – 45 39 – 51 42 – 60 60 – 802.36 mm (No. 8) 25 – 35 28 – 38 31 – 41 33 – 47 50 – 701.18 mm (No. 16) 18 – 28 21 – 31 22 – 32 22 – 38 33 – 53600 μm (No. 30) 10 – 18 10 –20 12 – 22 17 – 25 19 – 35300 μm ( No. 50) 3 – 9 3 – 9 3 – 9 6 – 12 5 – 15150 μm ( No. 100) 0 – 3 0 – 3 0 – 3 1 – 5 2 – 675 μm (No. 200) 0 – 2 0 – 2 0 – 2 0 – 2 0 - 2Class2. The various classes of concrete are designated as follows:DesignCompressiveStrength @ 28 days(psi)MinimumCement(lb/cy)MaximumWater/CementRatioMaximumSlump (in.)CombinedAggregateGradingA 4,000 650 0.49 4 CB 3,250 560 0.57 4 CC 2,500 520 0.62 4 DD 2,000 450 0.71 4 CD. Except where otherwise specified, all concrete exposed to the weather, or in contact with sewageshall be air-entrained in the range of 5% to 7%.3.02 BATCHING AND MIXINGA. Batching1. The Contractor shall have at his disposal a modern and dependable batch plant within areasonable distance from the work.2. Conform to ACI 3043. Use only approved materials03306 - 311/07 CONCRETE FOR UTILITIES

B. Mixing and Delivery1. Conform to ASTM C943.03 PLACING CONCRETEA. Conform to ACI 304B. Forms shall be substantially free from surface defects and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage ofmortar. They shall be properly braced and tied so as to maintain position and shape during andafter placing of concrete.C. The Contractor shall build into the concrete reinforcing steel, sleeves, waterstops, etc., as shownon the Contract Drawings, or in restoration work, reinforcing steel and other embedded itemsequal to that found in the concrete being replaced.D. All concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by the use of vibrators or by spading or puddlingsticks and tampers.E. No concrete shall be deposited under water without written permission of the Engineer and thenonly in accordance with proper tremie techniques.F. Cold weather concreting: Conform to ACI 306.G. Hot weather concreting: Conform to ACI 305.3.04 FINISHINGA. All formed concrete surfaces to be exposed shall be given a rubbed finish. In the case ofrestoration, the rubbed finish shall be equal to that of the concrete surface being replaced.B. Inverts, benchwalls, floors or structures and similar surfaces shall be given a float finish.C. Sidewalks shall be hand floated using a magnesium float and given a broom finish perpendicularto traffic, edges of slabs to be tooled.3.05 CURINGA. Concrete shall be maintained in a moist condition for seven (7) days using methods that willinsure complete and continuous saturation.B. Sidewalks, curbs, and gutters may be cured by the use of a membrane curing compound appliedin accordance with the manufacture’s directions.3.06 NON-SHRINK GROUTINGA. For openings that are left in new concrete or where made in existing concrete for the insertion ofwall castings, pipes or other fixtures, the space around these items shall be made watertight bycompletely filling with a non-shrink grout unless another means is specified elsewhere in theContract Documents.03306 - 411/07 CONCRETE FOR UTILITIES

B. All work shall be done in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.3.07 QUALITY CONTROLA. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the quality control of all concrete.B. Concrete which does not meet the requirements of these specifications may be rejected by theEngineer.END OF SECTION03306 - 511/07 CONCRETE FOR UTILITIES

SECTION 09900PAINTINGPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work in this section consists of painting and finishing work.B. Prime and finish coat new internal surfaces unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or inthis section of specification.C. Paint following elements unless otherwise indicated in this section or on Drawings:1. Steel pipe supports.2. Plain, insulated, or wrapped interior piping, valves, fittings, and appurtenances.3. Ferrous metals.D. Do not paint following elements:1. Stainless steel, or finish metal surfaces.2. Exposed to view aluminum surfaces including immersed surfaces except thosenoted previously.3. Fiberglass surfaces, unless indicated otherwise.4. Interior of pipe, ductwork, and conduits.5. Moving parts of mechanical and electrical units.6. Code labels and equipment identification and rating plates.7. Exterior concrete or precast concrete surfaces except as noted previously.8. Piping, ductwork or pipe conduit when enclosed between suspended ceiling andoverhead slabs, or located in pipe chases.9. Factory finished furniture, laboratory casework, metal toilet partitions, kitchenunits, lockers, mechanical equipment, electrical equipment, shop and storageequipment with an approved corrosion resistant finish, exterior louvers.10. Factory furnished motor control centers, control panels, engines, enginegenerators, outdoor electrical panels, electrical switchgear, and centrifuges.11. Threads on bolts, nuts, and threaded taps.12. Glazing.13. Plastic laminate surfaces.14. Copper flashing, gutters and downspouts.1.2 QUALITY STANDARDSA. Comply with applicable regulations of Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) 28CFR 1926-1993B. Paint thickness specified is minimum dry mil thickness. Painting coverage rates in gallonper square foot quoted are based on manufacturer's published theoretical coverage data09900-111/07 PAINTING

less 20 percent to arrive at practical coverage usage. In situations of discrepancy betweenmil thickness on surface and coverage rates applied, mil thickness governs.C. Paint includes fillers, primers, sealers, emulsions, oils, alkyds, latex, enamels, thinners,stains, epoxies, vinyls, chlorinated rubbers, coal tars, urethanes, shellacs, varnishes, andother applied coatings.D. For unspecified materials such as turpentine or linseed oil provide best graderecommended by selected manufacturer.1.3 SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01330.B. Paint Analysis: The Contractor shall perform a paint analysis of existing piping,appurtenances, and components to determine the paint material composition and colorfor each paint coating.C. Detailed product data sheets, recommended application procedures, and coverages.D. Samples: Complete range of colors for selection.E. Test Reports.1. Provide test reports of flame spread per ASTM E84-91aE1 for paints. Supply forpaints requiring ratings per NFPA 101-91.2. Provide performance and chemical test reports.F. Coating Test Panels: Field apply coatings to 12 IN x 12 IN test panel illustrating colorsand textures for each surface, material, color, and texture for Contracting Officersapproval.G. At project completion furnish two quarts of paint of each type and color used.H. At completion of project furnish final paint schedule documenting for each paint product,manufacturer, product name/number, color name/number or formula, and use inaccordance with Section 01330.1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLINGA. Deliver in original containers, labeled as follows:1. Name or type number of material.2. Manufacturer's name and stock number.3. Contents, by volume, of major constituents.4. Application instructions.5. Warning labels.6. All unlabeled containers shall be removed from project site.09900-211/07 PAINTING

B. Protect from freezing or damage.C. Store materials in accordance with local, state, and federal requirements for paints, toxicmaterials, and hazardous materials, in place designated by Contracting Officer.1. Keep storage neat and clean.2. Repair damage thereto or to surroundings.3. Remove rags and waste from building daily.4. Avoid danger of fire.5. Provide spill containment.PART 2 - MATERIALS2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERSA. Paint systems presented in this specification are based on coatings manufactured byTnemec, Thoro System Products, and Benjamin Moore.B. The manufacturers listed below are acceptable suppliers. Products of othermanufacturers may be used if approved as equal.1. TNEMEC Company, Inc., P.O. Box 411749, Kansas City, MO 64141-1749,Phone: 816/483-3400, FAX: 816/483-12512. Benjamin Moore Paints, 1000 Walsh Avenue, Santa Clara, CA 95050, (408)727-35653. Thoro System Products, 7800 NW 38th Street, Miami, FL 33166, 800-327-1570.4. Or Approved Equal2.2 PAINT CODING SCHEDULEA. Color for new piping, fittings, and appurtenances shall match existing pipe color.1. After painting, all pipelines shall be marked with a flow arrow indicatingdirection of flow.2.3 PAINT SYSTEMSA. P = prime coat. F1, F2 . . . Fn = first finish coat, second finish coat...nth finish coat.Where a finish coat of paint is indicated to be at exterior only, it shall be in addition tothe other prime and finish coats specified.B. All paint and coating materials furnished for each coating system shall be the products ofa single manufacturer.C. Only compatible materials shall be used in the work.D. All coatings utilized shall be certified "non-lead" (less than 0.06% lead by weight in thedried film) as defined in Part 1303 of the Consumer Product Safety Act.09900-311/07 PAINTING

E. System No. 1 - Modified Polyamine Epoxy (low VOC) - for exposed metals, piping,hydrants, and hose bib extensions.1. General: Ferrous metals including but not limited to piping, valves, and othersimilar items.2. TnemecP1 = 140 (VOC = 2.36 to 2.45 lbs/gal)*1 coat, 4 dry milsF1 = 140 (VOC = 2.36 to 2.45 lbs/gal)*1 coat, 4 dry milsF2 = 140 (VOC = 2.36 to 2.45 lbs/gal)*1 coat, 4 dry milsF3 at exterior only = 75 (VOC = 1.85 to 2.11 lbs/gal)1 coat, 2.5 dry milsF. System No. 11 for Plastic:1. Paint Material:a. Polyamidoamine Epoxy2. TnemecP1 = N69 (VOC = 2.38 to 2.79 lbs/gal)1 coat, 4 dry milsPART 3 - EXECUTIONF1 = N69 (VOC = 2.38 to 2.79 lbs/gal)1 coat, 4 dry milsF2 at exterior only = 1075 (VOC = 1.84 to 2.55 lbs/gal)1 coat, 2.5 dry mils3.1 SURFACE PREPARATIONA. General:1. Prepare surfaces requiring paint and make sound, clean and free of harmful scale,rust, dust, dirt, oil, loose paint, grease, moisture and other foreign matter.Remove grease, oil or soap accumulations by means of suitable solvents and bythorough washing of surface with clean water.2. Scrape damaged paint and rust pits back to sound material using scalinghammers, chisels, scrapers, hand or power operated tools.3. Strip bubbled, cracked, crazed or otherwise defective paint with hand or powertools. Flatten gloss paint with sandpaper. Leave surfaces suitable to receivedesignated finishes. The use of sandblasting or burning tools on historicmaterials, except existing piping and valves, is prohibited.09900-411/07 PAINTING

4. Remove by brush, air blast, or vacuum cleaner shot or grit. Do not contaminateblasted cleaned surfaces prior to painting.5. Prepare surfaces and prime prior to installation all elements of construction thatare closer than 4 inches to structures to allow for proper preparation afterinstallation. Apply final coatings after installation.6. Prepare surfaces as specified and in accordance with recommendations by thepaint manufacturer.B. Factory Finished Equipment:1. Solvent clean in effort comparable to SSPC-SP1-82.2. Spot primer damaged areas on existing coatings.3. Lightly sand and wipe clean before painting.C. Insulated Pipe: Remove powder, surplus adhesive and size.D. Non-Insulated Water Piping: Paint prior to placing in service.3.2 PRIME COATA. Primer coats specified in painting system shall be field applied unless shop appliedprimer is provided.B. Remove powder, surplus adhesive and size from insulated pipe surfaces.C. Ensure prime coatings are compatible with finish coatings. If prime coating is notcompatible apply a universal barrier coat of 2 mils thickness prior to finish coats, orremove primer coat and reprime.3.3 APPLICATIONA. Apply paint using skilled and competent tradesmen, proper tools and applicationtechniques for different aspects of work. Protect machinery, electrical panels and motors,couplings, and other equipment that may be damaged by paint operations. Clean offpaint stops and splashes on areas not designated to receive paint as work proceeds.B. Brush, spray or roller, apply in strict accordance with selected painting manufacturer'spublished recommendations for each paint system primer and finish coats.C. Use clean brushes, spray equipment and rollers.D. Ensure mixing, thinning, pot life, application procedure, equipment, coverage, curing,recoating, storage and number of coats are in accordance with this specification andcoating manufacturer's instructions.E. Avoid degradation and contamination of intercoat contamination. Ensure method ofcleaning contaminated surface follows manufacturer's recommendations.09900-511/07 PAINTING

F. Protect all equipment and previously painted surfaces. Protect brick and stone masonryindicated to be unpainted.G. Work each application of material into corners, crevices, joints and other difficult towork areas, and distribute evenly over flat surfaces.H. Allow coated surfaces to cure prior to allowing traffic or other work to proceed whichmight damage finished surface.I. Have spraying operation conform to following procedures:1. Have spray equipment to be used for each application of particular coatingavailable for inspection.2. Place operative moisture trap between air supply source and applicationequipment. Bleed water continuously from moisture trap.3. Ensure air source is sufficient to provide continuous volume of 20 CFM air ateach gun nozzle at 80 psi for applying coatings by conventional spray technique.When coatings are applied by airless spray technique, ensure input pressure topump is such to produce uniform spray patterns.4. For spraying applications, provide regulators and gauges in good working orderon both air and material lines. Use operating pressures compatible for particularpaint.5. Keep dry overspray to minimum.6. Spray nozzle to be a minimum of 8 inches to a maximum of 18 inches fromsubstrate during application of paint.J. Do not paint when surface temperature being painted is less than 5°F above dew point,relative humidity is greater than 85 percent, wind velocity is above 15 mph, and surfacetemperature is less than 50°F or greater than 140°F unless precautions accepted byContracting Officer are taken. Provide adequate ventilation and keep temperatureconstant to prevent condensation.K. Paint coats are intended to cover surfaces to mil thickness specified. If surfaces are notcovered adequately by this thickness, apply additional coats as required at no additionalexpense to the Government.L. Brush out immediately runs or sags, or remove and recoat entire surface.M. Brush or spray bolts, welds, sharp edges and difficult access areas with primer prior toprimer spray application.N. Apply zinc-rich primers under continuous agitation.O. Clean equipment at completion of each painting operation while material is still wet oruncured. Flush fluid hoses and guns at completion of each painting operation.P. Maintain current schedule showing when work or respective coats of paint in variousareas is to be completed.09900-611/07 PAINTING

Q. Assure hardware and accessories, plates, fixtures, finished work, and similar items areremoved or protected.R. Paint surfaces prior to installation on items that cannot be properly prepared afterinstallation.3.4 INSPECTIONA. Provide access to work for Contracting Officer and painting manufacturer while work isbeing performed.B. Contracting Officer will approve prepared surfaces before primer and successive coatsare applied.C. Have profile depth measurements made in presence of Contracting Officer in accordancewith Steel Structures Painting Council steel structures painting manual latest edition ofGood Painting Practices.D. Have measurements of paint dry film thickness made with Mikrotest gauge calibratedagainst National Bureau of Standards "Certified Coating Thickness CalibrationStandards" in presence of Contracting Officer. Contracting Officer may measure paintthickness at any time during project to ensure conformance with specification.E. Ensure finished work is free of abrasions and uniform in color and appearance.F. Provide wet film thickness gauges. Monitor work of painters. Provide temperature gaugeand determine surface temperature of items to be painted. Provide sling psychrometer tomonitor humidity and dew point at all times.G. Replace or repair work, materials or equipment not meeting these specifications.3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UPA. Protect work of other trades, against damage by painting and finishing work. Leave allsuch work undamaged. Clean, repair or replace, and repaint any damaged areas asdirected by Contracting Officer.B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required.C. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their workafter completion of painting. Clean all window glass and other paint spattered surfaces.Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping. Do not damagefinished surfaces.09900-711/07 PAINTING

D. On job completion remove all sand, debris, and rubbish, and repair or clean surfaceswhich are marred or spotted with other paint.E. Remove any surplus materials, scaffolding and debris.END OF SECTION09900-811/07 PAINTING

SECTION 15050BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODSPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section describes materials and methods common to multiple sections of Division15. Mechanical materials specified under other sections of Division 15 shall meet requirements ofthis section, unless part of larger factory-assembled equipment.1 .2 COORDINATION OF ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL WORKA. As specified in Section 01312.B. Electrical Requirements:1. Provide mechanical system controls, controllers, control transformers, disconnects, starters,control wiring, power wiring, and all other electrical work necessary for complete andoperable mechanical systems. Motors, motor circuits, and controllers shall meetrequirements of NEC 430-96. Air conditioning and refrigeration equipment shall meetNEC 440-96. All electrical work, including materials provided under Division 15, shallmeet requirements of Division 16.2. HVAC Control Wiring: As specified in Section 15901.3. Wiring Diagrams: Provide complete and approved wiring diagrams for all electrical powerand control work relating to mechanical systems.4. Install wiring for all mechanical work in conduit as specified in Section 16050.1 .3 RELATED WORKA. General Mechanical Provisions - Section 15010.1 .4 SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01330.B. Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions.C. Pipe hanger and support schedule showing manufacturer's model number, size, location, andfeatures for each required pipe hanger and support.D. Current welder AWS certification for welding processes involved and employer signed recordaccepting responsibility for welder's ability.E. Motor literature showing nominal efficiency rating for each motor at rated load and voltage at anambient temperature of 40 degrees C.1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE15050-1BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

A. Mechanical Welding:1. Perform welding of pressure piping systems in accordance with provisions of ASMEBoiler and Pressure Vessel Code, 1995, and ASME B31.9-96, Code for Building ServicesPiping.2. Contact Contracting Officer 48 hours prior to any welding operations.B. Hangers, supports, and components shall be UL listed and FM approved.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 MOTORSA. Motors shall be energy efficient with nominal efficiency equal to or greater than that stated inNEMA MG 1-97, Table 12-6C, for that type and rating of motor. Motors specificallymanufactured for a particular piece of equipment with a lower efficiency shall be brought to theattention of the Contracting Officer for approval.B. Motors shall be ball bearing, squirrel cage, open dripproof, normal starting torque of thehorsepower and current characteristics scheduled, with thermal overload protection and dustproofand leakproof bearing rings. Insulation shall be rated for continuous duty at 40 degrees Cambient.C. Motors shall be dynamically balanced and tested and selected for quiet operation. Motors shalloperate continuously at full load with temperature rise in any part not to exceed NEMA standards.D. Motors shall have 1.15 safety factor at project altitude.2 .2 DRIVESA. V-belt with cast iron sheaves rated not less than 1-1/2 times motor horsepower. Motors 5horsepower and less for belt-driven equipment shall have adjustable pulleys. Provide two motorsheaves, one of the adjustable pitch type to be used for air balance, and one of the fixed pitch typeto be used for final rpm.B. Multiple V-belts shall be matched sets.2 .3 DRIVE GUARDSA. Meet requirements of OSHA.B. All drive guards shall be removable.C. Belt Drives: Enclosed in a 16-gauge expanded metal or wire screen drive guard with 70 percentfree area, with steel frame covering both sides of belt drive. Provide holes in belt guards fortachometer readings. Provide access door in guard to permit checking of belt tension.D. Rotating Shafts and Couplings: Provide a solid 16-gauge sheet metal inverted U-cover over entirelength of exposed shaft. Extend cover to below bottom of shaft and couplings.2 .4 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS15050-2BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

A. General: Provide adjustable pipe hangers on suspended pipe. Chain or perforated strap will notbe permitted. Isolate hangers coming in contact with bare copper pipe with dielectric hangerconnectors. Hanger rods shall be continuous threaded steel. Turnbuckles shall have capacity ofnot less than attached rod. Provide bracing to prevent lateral motion.B. Individual Hangers:1. Uninsulated Copper Pipe: Copper plated or coated steel, adjustable swivel ring hanger.2. Uninsulated Steel and Insulated Steel or Copper Piping and Ducts: Zinc plated adjustableswivel ring hangers for pipe sizes up through 1-1/2-inch, and wrought steel adjustableclevis hangers for pipe sizes 2-inch and over.C. Grouped Horizontal Piping and Piping on Walls: Cold formed, lipped channels, not less than 1-1/2-inch by 1-1/2-inch, No. 12 gauge with mounting holes. Hot-dipped galvanized clamps shallbe sized for outside diameter of insulation on insulated pipes. Hangers shall support five times theweight or thrust applied without failure.D. Vertical Supports: Friction riser clamps, supported and braced.E. Piping Run in Metal Studs: One-piece plastic sleeve with integral synthetic rubber pipe insulator.F. Insulated Pipe Supports: As specified in Section 15080.G. Spring Hangers and Supports: As specified in Section 15070.2 .5 SLEEVESA. Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete Walls, Floors, and Roofs: ASTM A53-96, Schedule 40,galvanized steel pipe.B. Sleeves in Partitions, Walls, Floors and Roofs Other than Masonry or Concrete: Minimum 24gauge galvanized sheet steel.2 .6 ESCUTCHEONSA. One-piece or split-hinge adjustable metal plates with nickel-plated or paintable surface dependingon finished surface.B. Chrome Plated Pipe: Solid pattern, smooth chrome plated cast brass.C. Other Types of Pipe: Heavy solid pattern steel, cast iron, or malleable iron with set screws.Escutcheons installed over sleeves which project above finished floors shall be deep cup type.2 .7 ACCESS DOORSA. Hinged steel access door, screwdriver actuated latching mechanism, prime painted for field finishpainting.2 .8 SEALANTSA. Paintable siliconized acrylic sealant, 25 year service life.15050-3BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 MOTORSA. Mount belt driven equipment with motors on common steel base with adjustable motor mount.Align all drives. Use belts identified by the manufacturer and tension belts in accordance withmanufacturer recommendations.3 .2 DRIVESA. Fan static pressures and rpm shown are approximate. Adjust or change drives as required toachieve air quantities shown.3 .3 ACCESS DOORSA. Install access doors for access to concealed valves, dampers, cleanouts, control devices, andequipment requiring service. Coordinate access door location with other trades. Access doorsshall carry proper fire rating for surfaces.3 .4 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTSA. General: Maintain uniform grading of piping system and install hangers to provide indicated pipeslopes. Install supports between piping and building structure to prevent swaying and vibration.Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch clear space between finished covering and adjacentwork. Do not support weight of piping from mechanical equipment, ductwork, pump flanges, coilconnections, and related items. Threaded rods shall have two locknuts. Support hanger rods bycoach screw rods, angle iron clips, or beam clamps. No drilling of structural members will bepermitted without approval. Do not bend pipe hanger rods to provide alignment of piping offsetfrom overhead supports. Size hangers on insulated pipe to fit outside diameter of insulation.B. Hanger Spacing: Install adjustable type hangers and support the piping systems without sagging.Install hangers at locations not more than 3 feet from the end of each runout and not over 1 footfrom each change in direction or offset and at the following maximum spacing:PIPE TYPEPIPE SIZE (INCHES)MAXIMUMSPACINGSteel 1/2 through 1-1/4 7 Feet 3/8 Inch1-1/2 through 2 10 Feet 3/8 Inch2-1/2 through 3 12 Feet 1/2 Inch4 through 5 12 Feet 5/8 Inch6 12 Feet 3/4 Inch8 through 12 12 Feet 7/8 InchCopper 3/8 through 3/4 5 Feet 3/8 Inch1 through 1-1/2 6 Feet 3/8 Inch2 through 2-1/2 8 Feet 1/2 Inch3 and above 10 Feet 1/2 InchCast Iron 2 1 each joint 3/8 Inch3 1 each joint 1/2 InchMINIMUMHANGER ROD SIZE15050-4BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

PIPE TYPEPIPE SIZE (INCHES)MAXIMUMSPACING4 through 5 1 each joint 5/8 Inch6 1 each joint 3/4 Inch8 through 12 1 each joint 7/8 InchPVC 2 and smaller 4 Feet 3/8 Inch2-1/2 through 3-1/2 4 Feet 1/2 Inch4 through 5 4 Feet 5/8 Inch6 4 Feet 3/4 Inch8 4 Feet 7/8 InchMINIMUMHANGER ROD SIZEC. Support horizontal soil pipe near each hub or hubless clamp with spacing of 5 feet maximumbetween hangers. Provide adequate support for no hub pipe to prevent sagging and to maintainstraight runs of DWV pipe.D. Trapeze Hangers: Trapeze hangers shall be spaced for smallest pipe in group. Provide additionalhanger rod at mid span where trapeze length exceeds 4 feet. Secure pipe at each trapeze withstandard pipe straps. Uninsulated copper pipe shall rest on neoprene sleeves. Trapeze typehangers may be used for multiple parallel horizontal pipes.E. Vertical Supports:1. Cast Iron Soil Pipes: Support at not less than every story height and at pipe base.2. Screwed Pipe: Support at 8 feet on center for 1-1/2-inch and smaller pipe. Support at 10feet on center for 2-inch and larger pipe.3. Copper Tubing: Support at 6 feet on center for 1-1/2-inch and smaller pipe. Support at 8feet on center for 2-inch and larger pipe.F. Remove rust from ferrous hanger equipment and rods, and apply one coat of rust inhibitive paintbefore or immediately after erection.G. Provide additional support for heavy valves, specialties, and sway bracing where required.3 .5 SLEEVESA. Provide sleeves where piping passes through walls, floors, roofs, and partitions. Sleeves shallpass through entire thickness of building material and be secured. Sleeves shall be sized largeenough to allow for pipe movement and for continuous insulation. Sleeves shall be installed with1/2 inch annular space between pipe insulation or bare pipe and the interior of the sleeve.Terminate sleeves flush with walls, partitions, and ceilings. Each sleeve shall be utilized for onlyone pipe. Firmly pack space between sleeve and pipe with insulation and seal both ends withsealing compound.B. Seal annular space with fire barrier UL/FM approved foam where sleeves pass through fire ratedassemblies.C. Sleeves used below grade and for penetration of waterproofed walls shall contain integral waterstop. Pipe sleeves shall be watertight with 25-year siliconized sealant joints on both sides of wall.15050-5BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

D. In floors containing floor drains, extend floor sleeves 2 inches above finished floor.3 .6 ESCUTCHEONSA. Install escutcheons where pipes pass through walls, floors, or ceilings in finished areas. Installnickel-plated escutcheons in finished areas after painting is completed. Paint escutcheons inunfinished areas after painting of surface is completed. Firmly secure escutcheons to uninsulatedpipes with set screws.3 .7 SEALANTSA. Penetrations in floors, mechanical room walls, and other fire wall construction shall be closed andsealed with firestopping material.B. The annular space between exposed pipe or ductwork and walls or floors shall be filled, sealed,and painted to match adjacent surfaces.3 .8 CLEANINGA. Remove foreign materials including dirt, grease, and splashed paint. Restore damaged finishes ofequipment to original condition.3 .9 PAINTINGA. Section 09901. Paint all new mechanical work and touch up previously painted surfaces whereexposed in finished areas or exterior to the building.3 .10 PRELIMINARY OPERATIONA. Operate any portion of installation if requested. Such operation does not constitute acceptance ofwork as complete.PART 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT4 .1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODSA. Payment will be included in the bid item to which this work relates.END OF SECTION15050-6BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

SECTION 15060PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS: GENERAL STATEMENTPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION INCLUDESA. Utility piping systemsB. Pipe pressure testingC. Pipe cleaning and disinfection1.2 RELATED SECTIONSA. Section 15062 – Pipe: Ductile IronB. Section 15064 – Pipe: PVC PressureC. Section 15078 – Pipe: Polyethylene1.3 REFERENCESA. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)1. B16.3, Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings2. B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings3. B31.1, Power Piping4. B31.3, Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping5. B31.9, Building Services Piping6. B40.1, Gages - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic ElementB. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)1. A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded andSeamlessC. American Water Works Association (AWWA)1. C104, Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water2. C110, Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings, 3 IN through 48 IN for Water and Other Liquids3. C111, Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Pressure Pipe and Fitting4. C200, Steel Water Pipe 6 in and Larger5. C203, Coal Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Lines - Enamel and Tape -Hot Applied6. C205, Cement Mortar Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe 4 IN and Larger, ShopApplied7. C207, Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 IN through 144 IN8. C208, Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings9. C210, Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines10. C214, Tape Coating Systems for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines15060 - 104/08 PIPING AND PIPE FITTINGS: GENERAL STATEMENT

11. C606, Grooved and Shouldered Joints12. C651, Disinfection of Water Mains13. C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) pressure pipe 4 IN through 12 IN for water14. C901 Polyethylene (PE) pressure pipe and tubing ½ IN through 3 IN for water service15. C906 Polyethylene (PE) pressure pipe and fittings 4 IN through 63 IN for water distribution16. M11, Steel Pipe - A Guide for Design and Installation1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. All pipe and appurtenances of similar type and material shall be furnished by a single manufacturer.1.5 SUBMITTALSA. Certifications and Testing consistent with Section 01330 and including1. Certification that products used meet standards referenced.2. Copies of pressure test results on all piping systems3. Certification of all welders4. Reports defining results of dielectric testing and corrective action taken5. Qualifications of lab performing disinfection analysis on water systems6. Disinfection test report7. Notification of time and date of piping pressure tests8. Certification that pipe manufacture has inspected at the plant pipe and fittings supplied forwork specified and meet the requirements of these specifications.B. Shop Drawings consistent with Section 01330 and including1. Schedule showing pipe type, size, schedule of pipe and piping system appurtenances, type oflinings and coatings, cathodic protection2. Exterior yard piping drawings (minimum scale 1 IN equals 10 FT) with informationincludinga. Dimensions of piping lengthsb. Invert elevations of piping crossingsc. Acknowledgement of bury depth requirementsd. Details of fittings, tapping locations, thrust blocks, restrained joint segments,harnessed joint segments, hydrants, and related appurtenancese. Acknowledgement of designated valve or gate tag numbers, instrument tag numbers,pipe and line numbersf. Line slopes and vents3. Interior piping drawings (minimum scale 1/8 IN equals 1 FT) with information includinga. Dimensions of piping and end connectionsb. Invert elevationsc. Location and type of pipe supports and anchorsd. Locations of valvese. Details of fittings, tapping locations, equipment connections, flexible expansionjoints, connections to equipment, and related appurtenancesf. Acknowledgement of valve and equipment tag numbers and instrument tag numbersg. Provisions for expansion and contraction4. Copies of any manufacturer's written directions regarding material handling, delivery, storageand installation5. Technical product data on piping appurtenances15060 - 204/08 PIPING AND PIPE FITTINGS: GENERAL STATEMENT

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Protect pipe coating during handling using methods recommended by manufacturer. Use of barecables, chains, hooks, metal bars or narrow skids in contact with coated pipe is not permitted.B. Prevent damage to pipe during transit. Repair abrasions, scars, and blemishes. If repair of satisfactoryquality cannot be achieved, replace damaged material immediately.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 MATERIALSA. Furnish piping, fittings and appurtenances meeting the requirements of this Section.B. Pipe sizes indicated are nominal inside diameter.C. Use straight, round pipe.D. For temporary piping not specifically addressed in Piping Schedule, utilize materials, joints andfittings equal to those specified for similar applications of permanent construction.2.2 COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIESA. Protective Coating and Lining1. Where coatings, linings, paint, tests and other items are stated on schedules of service, pipeand fittings shall be included in referenced conditions.2. Where specified in piping schedule, provide coal-tar epoxy linings and coatings inaccordance with AWWA C203 (for steel pipe) and ANSI C151 (for ductile pipe) to aminimum thickness of 20 mils in not less than two coats.3. Where specified in piping schedule, provide cement mortar lining in accordance with AWWAC205 for steel pipe and AWWA C104 for ductile iron pipe.4. Ensure interior lining does not interfere with the operation of adjacent valves.5. Where specified in piping schedule, galvanize surface in accordance with hot-dip methodusing any grade of zinc acceptable to ASTM B6.6. Where specified in the piping schedule, field paint pipe in accordance with DIVISION 9 –FINISHES.7. For factory applied epoxy coatings, wrap exposed joints and fittings with coating tape asmanufactured by coating manufacturer.8. Equip with white faces, black numerals and black pointers.9. Provide pressure gages with pressure range of 200 percent of normal operation.10. Provide diaphragm seal housing of stainless steel construction.11. Assure gage accuracy to within 1 percent15060 - 304/08 PIPING AND PIPE FITTINGS: GENERAL STATEMENT

2.3 THERMAL INSULATION FOR PLUMBING AND PIPINGA. General:1. Delivery: Deliver insulation materials to the job in original packages with manufacturer's"R" values clearly shown. Provide certification of compliance.2. Warning: The Contractor is warned that working with fiberglass or rock wool materialsmay constitute a serious health hazard. The Contractor shall take all necessaryprecautions to ensure the safety of the workers.3. Shields: Insulation may be required.4. The following table summarizes the insulation system by use and service:Insulation InsulationSystem Location Service System Thickness (Inches)CW (Cold Water) (P) All exposed pipe E A 1/2-inchFor System:For Service:P = Potable WaterE = Exposed including concealed spaceB. Insulation System A:1. Material: Insulation shall be a pre-molded fiberglass with a maximum "K" factor of 0.25at 70°F and having a factory-applied jacket. Fittings shall be insulated with insulatingcement or mitered section of pre-molded fiberglass.2. Fittings shall be covered with a Zeston, Thermazip, or equal jacket. Pipe insulation shallbe Schuller "Micro-Lok 850-AP" with foil scrim kraft jacket, with laps and butt strapssecured with Benjamin Foster or Arobol adhesive; Owens-Corning Fiberglas Type 25ASJ/SSL; or equal.3. Insulation exposed to the weather shall have, in addition, an aluminum waterproof jacketalloy 3003 (0.024-inch); Childers, Alcorjac, or equal.C. Insulation Protection Shields: Provide insulation protection shields at all pipe supports forinsulated piping.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Prior to installation, inspect and verify condition of piping and appurtenances. Installation constitutesinstaller's acceptance of product condition for satisfactory installation.3.2 PREPARATIONA. Correct defects or conditions which may interfere with or prevent a satisfactory installation3.3 EXTERIOR PIPING ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATIONA. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, provide a minimum of 24 IN earth cover over exteriorburied piping systems and appurtenances conveying water, fluids, or solutions subject to freezing.15060 - 404/08 PIPING AND PIPE FITTINGS: GENERAL STATEMENT

B. Enter and exit through structure walls, floors and ceilings using wall penetrations specified in Section15033.C. Provide flexible joint within 2 FT of point where pipe enters or leaves structure. Provide secondflexible joint not more than 6 FT nor less than 4 FT from first joint. Provide balance of piping withstandard laying lengths.D. Gate valve to pipe joints shall be flange by flange connections using appropriate piping material andflange adapters.E. Laying Pipe In Trench1. Excavate and backfill trench in accordance with Section 02320.2. Clean each pipe length thoroughly and inspect for compliance to Specifications.3. Grade trench bottom and excavate for pipe bell and lay pipe on trench bottom or beddingmaterial if rock excavation.4. Install gasket or joint material according to manufacturer's directions after joints have beenthoroughly cleaned and examined.5. Except for first two joints, before making final connections of joints, 2 full sections of pipeshall have been previously installed with earth tamped along side of pipe or final beddingmaterial placed.6. Lay pipe in only suitable weather with good trench conditions. Never lay pipe in waterexcept where approved by Contracting Officer.F. Lining-up Push-on Joint Piping1. Lay piping on route lines shown on Drawings.2. Deflect from straight alignments or grades by vertical or horizontal curves.3. Maximum offset between extended centerlines of any 2 adjacent pipe lengths is in strictaccordance with the pipe manufacturers published literature on deflections and offsets.4. Provide special bends when specified or where required alignment exceeds allowabledeflections stipulated.5. Provide shorter lengths of pipe in such length and number that angular deflection of anyjoint, as represented by specified maximum deflection, is not exceeded.G. Thrust Restraint1. Provide thrust restraint for preventing movement of piping caused by forces in or on buriedpiping tees, wye branches, plugs, or bends.2. Provide mechanical restraint to resist against thrust forces.3. Thrust blocking shall only be used where indicated on the drawings.a. Place concrete blocking so that it extends from fitting into solid undisturbed earthwall. Concrete blocks shall not cover pipe joints.b. Provide bearing area of concrete in accordance with details on Drawings.c. Provide insulating components where dissimilar metals are joined together.H. Utility line marking: Section 02502.I. Provide insulating components where dissimilar metals are joined together.J. Installation of Insulation: Apply insulation material, accessories, and finishes according to themanufacturer’s printed instructions. Seal joints and seams to maintain vapor barrier. Seal15060 - 504/08 PIPING AND PIPE FITTINGS: GENERAL STATEMENT

1. Wall Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls. Apply aluminum jacketwith factory-applied moisture barrier over insulation. Extend 2 inches from both surfacesof wall. Secure aluminum jacket with metal bands at both ends. Seal ends of jacket withvapor barrier coating. Seal around penetration with joint sealer.2. Whenever possible, slip insulation on pipe before making connections. Seal joints withadhesive. Where the slip-on technique is not possible, cut one side longitudinally andapply to the pipe. Seal seams and joints with adhesive.3. Cover exterior insulation, except for metal jacketed insulation with PVC fitting coversand seal circumferential joints with butt strips. Paint all exterior PVC covering.K. Protection of Buried Valves and Fittings: All buried metallic valves and fittings shall be wrappedwith 8 mils polyethylene sheeting.3.4 CONNECTIONS WITH EXISTING PIPINGA. Verify exact material diameter, alignment and joint of existing piping. Perform verifications withsufficient time prior to ordering materials and so as not to delay work progress.B. Where connection between new work and existing work is made, use suitable and proper fittings tosuit conditions encountered.C. Perform connections with existing piping at time and under conditions which will least interfere withservice to those affected by such operation.D. Undertake connections in fashion which will disturb existing system as little as possible.3.5 INSTALLATION OF THERMAL INSULATIONA. Utilize suitable equipment and facilities to dewater, drain, and dispose of liquid removed withoutdamage to adjacent property.B. Where connections to existing systems necessitate employment of past installation methods notcurrently part of trade practice, utilize necessary special piping components.C. Where connection involves potable water systems, provide disinfection methods as prescribed inthese specifications.D. Connections to existing mains shall be made after pressure testing and disinfection of the proposedsystem.E. A temporary plug or cap shall be installed on the new main until the pressure tests and disinfecting arecompleted. Upon satisfactory completion, the cap or plug shall be removed from both mains and theconnection made with tapping sleeve, valve, transition couplings, or pipe which has been swabbedout with a solution of chlorine and water. The connection shall be made as swiftly as possible and anywater in the ditch shall be kept below the level of the pipe. The main may only be placed in service bythe Contracting Officer. Follow disinfection procedures when connecting into existing mainsspecified in AWWA-C651.15060 - 604/08 PIPING AND PIPE FITTINGS: GENERAL STATEMENT

F. Prior to exposing the connection points to existing mains, verify the thrust restraint on the existingmain. Provide all temporary thrust restraint required to make the connection. Restrain the existingmains in accordance with the Drawings for permanent services.3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. General1. Upon completion of piping, but prior to application of insulation on exposed piping orcovering concealed/buried piping, test all piping systems.2. Utilize pressure, media and pressure test duration as specified on Piping SpecificationSchedules.3. Isolate equipment that may be damaged by the specified pressure test conditions.4. Perform pressure test using calibrated pressure gages and calibrated volumetric measuringequipment to determine leakage rates. Select each gage so that the specified test pressure fallswithin the upper half of the gage's range. Notify Contracting Officer 24 hours prior to eachtest.5. Completely assemble and test new piping systems prior to connection to existing pipesystems.6. Acknowledge satisfactory performance of tests and inspections in writing to ContractingOfficer prior to final acceptance.7. Provide all necessary equipment and perform all work required in connection with the testsand inspections.8. Bear the cost of all testing and inspecting, locating and remedying of leaks and any necessaryretesting and re-examination.B. Testing methods and criteria1. Liquid systemsa. Exposed piping shall have zero allowable leakage at the specified test pressure for aminimum testing duration of 2 hours.b. Allowable leakage from buried liquid piping systems shall be less than 0.02 gallonsper hour per IN diameter per 100 FT of buried piping.2. Hydrostatic pressure testinga. For buried piping: Perform testing after backfill and proper compaction oftrenches. Where lines are installed under the National Monument entrance road,perform tests after completion of final subgrade preparation and prior toapplication of surface courses. Notify Contracting Officer at least 48 hours priorto testing. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints for additionalpressure load under test. Isolate equipment in piping system with rated pressurelower than pipe test pressure by valves or blind flanges.b. For exposed piping: Prepare each section for testing, using adequate bracing andprotect system equipment susceptible to damage by test pressures. Do not paintor insulate exposed piping until successful performance of pressure test.c. Hydrostatic testing of HDPE pipe shall be by monitored make-up water test or,non-monitored make-up water test.1) Monitored make-up water test procedure consists of initial expansion,and test phases. During the initial expansion phase, the test section ispressurized to the test pressure, and enough make-up liquid is added eachhour for three hours to return to test pressure.2) The test phase follows immediately, and shall be two hours. At the end15060 - 704/08 PIPING AND PIPE FITTINGS: GENERAL STATEMENT

of the test time, the test section is returned to test pressure by adding ameasured amount of liquid. If the amount of make-up water added doesnot exceed the values listed below, leakage is not indicated.Nominal Pipe SizeMake-Up Water Allowance(IN)(U.S. Gallons/100 FT Pipe)2 0.116 0.603) Non-monitored make-up water test procedure consists of initialexpansion, and test phases. For the initial expansion phase, make-upwater is added as required to maintain the test pressure for three hours.For the test phase, the test pressure is reduced by 10 psi. If the pressureremains steady (within 5% of the target value) for an hour, no leakage isindicated.4) If the test is not completed due to leakage, equipment failure, etc.,depressurize the test section, and then allow it to “relax” for at least eighthours before bringing the test section up to test pressure again.d. Hydrostatic testing of PVC pipe shall show that at the specified test pressure, theallowable leakage shall not exceed 0.01 gallons per hour per inch diameter per100 feet of piping.3.7 CLEANING AND DISINFECTIONA. Cleaning1. Clean interior of piping systems thoroughly before installing.2. Maintain pipe in clean condition during installation.3. Before jointing piping, thoroughly clean and wipe joint contact surfaces and then properlydress and make joint.4. Immediately prior to pressure testing, clean and remove grease, metal cuttings, dirt, or otherforeign materials which may have entered the system.5. At completion of work and prior to final acceptance, thoroughly clean work installed underthese specifications. Clean equipment, fixtures, pipe, valves, and fittings of grease, metalcuttings, and sludge which may have accumulated by operation of system, from testing, orfrom other causes. Repair any stoppage or discoloration or other damage to parts of building,its finish, or furnishings, due to failure to properly clean piping system, without cost toGovernment.B. Disinfection of Potable Water Systems1. After favorable performance of pressure test and prior to final acceptance, thoroughly flushentire potable water piping system any appurtenant devices and perform disinfection asprescribed.2. Perform work, including preventative measures during construction, in full compliance toprovide flushing velocity of not less than 2.5 FT per second.3. As allowed by local authority, drain flushing water to sanitary sewer. Do not drain flushingwater to receiving stream.4. Use continuous feed method of application. Completely isolate system during disinfectionprocedure.15060 - 804/08 PIPING AND PIPE FITTINGS: GENERAL STATEMENT

5. After required contact period, dechlorinate and flush system to remove all heavily chlorinatedwater. As allowed by local authority, drain dechlorinated flushing water to sanitary sewer.6. After final flushing and before placing water in service, obtain an independent laboratoryacceptable to the Contracting Officer, to collect samples and test for bacteriological quality.Repeat entire disinfection procedures until satisfactory results are obtained.7. Secure and deliver to Contracting Officer, satisfactory bacteriological reports on samplestaken from system. Insure sampling and testing procedures are in full compliance to AWWAC651, local water purveyor and applicable requirements of State of California.END OF SECTION15060 - 904/08 PIPING AND PIPE FITTINGS: GENERAL STATEMENT

SECTION 15062PIPE: DUCTILE IRONPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION INCLUDESA. All ductile iron piping, fittings, and appurtenances.1.2 RELATED SECTIONSA. Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings: General StatementB. Section 15090 - Pipe Support Systems.1.3 REFERENCESA. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)1. B1.1, Unified Inch Screw Threads2. B16.1, Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. Class 25, 125, 250 and 800.B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)1. A183, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts2. A194, Standard Specifications for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts and Bolts for HighPressure, Temperature Service3. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi TensileStrengthC. American Water Works Association (AWWA)1. C104, Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water2. C105, Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Piping for Water and Other Liquids3. C110, Ductile - Iron and Gray Iron Fittings, 3 IN through 48 IN for Water and OtherLiquids4. C111, Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings5. C115, Flanged Ductile Iron Pipe with Threaded Flanges6. C150, Thickness Design of Ductile Iron Pipe7. C151, Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds, forWater or Other Liquids8. C203, Coal Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines9. C606, Grooved and Shouldered Joints1.4 SUBMITTALSA. Certifications and Testing consistent with Section 01330 and including:1. See Section 15060B. Shop Drawings consistent with Section 01330 and including:1. See Section 1506015062 - 111/07 PIPE: DUCTILE IRON

PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 MANUFACTURERSA. Flanged Adapters:1. Rockwell Style 913, Dresser Style 128, or approved equal.B. Mechanical Coupling (Compression Sleeve Coupling)1. Products as manufactured by Rockwell Style 431, Dresser Style 53, or approved equal.C. Mechanical Joint Restraints1. Products as manufactured by EBAA Iron Sales, Inc., Megalug 1100 Series, or approvedequal.2.2 MATERIALSA. Ductile Iron Pipe1. AWWA C1042. AWWA C1153. AWWA C1504. AWWA C151B. Fittings, Flanges, and Joints1. AWWA C1102. AWWA C1113. AWWA C1154. Flanges drilled and faced per ANSI B16.1 for both 125 and 250 psi applications.C. Nuts and Bolts1. Hot dipped zinc galvanized meeting ASTM A307, grade B2. Heads and dimensions per ANSI B1.13. Threaded per ANSI B1.14. For mechanical couplings furnish ASTM A183 or A194 bolts and nuts5. Two nuts provided for one inch diameter bolt applications and largerD. Encasement1. AWWA C105E. See Piping Specification Schedules on the Drawings2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITSA. Couplings1. Flanged adaptersa. Unit consisting of steel or carbon steel body sleeve, flange, followers, grade 30rubber gaskets, and ASTM A307 bolts and nutsb. Provide units equal to those specified in Paragraph 2.01.c. Supply flanges meeting standards of adjoining flanges.15062 - 211/07 PIPE: DUCTILE IRON

d. Provide steel tie bolt assembly with each unit consisting of minimum four boltsequally spaced around the pipe and extending from cast steel lugs welded onthe pipe to lugs welded on the coupling middle ring.e. Rate entire assembly for test pressure specified on Piping Schedule for eachrespective application.2. Mechanical (compression sleeve) couplinga. Unit consisting of steel sleeve, followers grade 30 rubber gaskets, and ASTMA307 nuts and bolts.b. Provide units equal to those specified in Paragraph 2.01.c. Supply flanges meeting standards of adjoining flanges.d. Provide steel tie bolt assembly with each unit consisting of minimum four boltsequally spaced around the pipe and extending from-cast steel lugs welded onthe pipe to lugs welded on the coupling middle ring.e. Entire assembly to be rated for test pressure specified on piping schedule foreach respective application.f. Provide field coating for buried couplings per AWWA C203.3. Mechanical joint restraintsa. Provide units that incorporate the design of the follower gland and include arestraining mechanism which, when actuated, imparts multiple wedging actionagainst the pipe, increasing its resistance as the pressure increases.b. Joint flexibility maintained after burial.c. Glands manufactured of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536.d. Ductile iron restraining devices with minimum hardness of 370 BHNe. Glanddimensions compatible with standardized mechanical joint bell and tee-headbolts conforming to ANSI/AWWA A21.11 and ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53.e. Use twist off nuts to insure proper actuating of the restraining devices.f. Working pressure of at least 250 psi with minimum safety factor of 2:1.2.4 FABRICATIONA. Furnish and install without outside coatings of bituminous material any exposed pipe scheduledto be painted.B. Furnish cast parts with lacquer finish compatible with finish coat.2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROLA. Factory Test1. Subject pipe to hydrostatic test of not less than 500 PSI with the pipe under the full testpressure for at least 10 seconds.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Prior to installation, inspect and verify condition of piping and appurtenances. Installationconstitutes installer's acceptance of product condition for satisfactory installation.15062 - 311/07 PIPE: DUCTILE IRON

3.2 PREPARATIONA. Correct defects or conditions which may interfere with or prevent a satisfactory installation.B. Assure ends of pipe to be fitted with flanges have all protrusions ground flush.3.3 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATIONA. Joining Method - Flanged Joints1. Install in accordance with AWWA C115.2. Extend pipe completely through screwed-on flanged and machine flange face and pipein single operation.3. Make flange faces flat and perpendicular to pipe centerline.4. When bolting flange joints, exercise extreme care to insure that there is no restraint onopposite end of pipe or fitting which would prevent uniform gasket compression orwould cause unnecessary stress, bending or torsional strains to be applied to castflanges or flanged fittings.5. Allow one flange free movement in any direction while bolts are being tightened.6. Do not assemble adjoining flexible joints until flanged joints in piping system havebeen tightened.7. Gradually tighten flange bolts uniformly to permit even gasket compression.B. Joining Methods - Push-on Mechanical (Gland-Type) Joints1. Install in accordance with AWWA C111.2. Assemble mechanical joints carefully according to manufacturer's recommendations.3. If effective sealing is not obtained, disassemble, thoroughly clean, and reassemble thejoint.4. Do not overstress bolts.5. Where piping utilizes mechanical joints with tie rods, align joint holes to permitinstallation of harness bolts.C. Joining Method - Push-On Joints1. Install in accordance with AWWA C111.2. Assemble push-on joints in accordance with manufacturer's directions.3. Bevel and lubricate spigot end of pipe to facilitate assembly without damage to gasket.Use lubricant that is non-toxic, does not support the growth of bacteria, has nodeteriorating effects on the gasket material, and imparts no taste or odor to water inpipe.4. Assure the gasket groove is thoroughly clean.5. For cold weather installation, warm gasket prior to placement in bell.6. Taper of bevel shall be approximately 30 degrees with centerline of pipe andapproximately 1/4 IN back.D. Flange Adapters 12 IN and less1. Locate and drill holes for anchor studs after pipe is in place and bolted tight.2. Drill holes not more than 1/8 IN larger than diameter of stud projection.15062 - 411/07 PIPE: DUCTILE IRON

E. Cutting1. Do not damage interior lining material during cutting2. Use abrasive wheel-cutters or saws.3. Make square cuts.4. Bevel and free cut ends of sharp edges after cutting.F. Support exposed pipe in accordance with Sections 15060 and 15090.G. Install buried piping in accordance with Sections 15060 and 02320.3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Test piping systems in accordance with Section 15060.3.5 CLEANINGA. Clean in accordance with Section 15060.END OF SECTION15062 - 511/07 PIPE: DUCTILE IRON

SECTION 15064PIPE: PLASTIC (PVC) PRESSUREPART 1 - GENERAL1.01 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of all PVC Type 1, and CPVC, piping, fittings andappurtenances for pressure applications. All AWWA C900 and C905 PVC piping, fittings andappurtenances for pressure applications. All ASTM D2241 PVC piping, fittings, andappurtenances for pressure applications.1.02 RELATED SECTIONSA. Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings: General StatementB. Section 15090 - Pipe Support Systems1.03 REFERENCESA. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)1. D1785, Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe (Sch. 40, 80 and 120).2. D2241, Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) (SDR Series)3. D2464, Threaded (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 804. D2466, Socket Type (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 405. D2467, Socket Type (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 806. D2564, Solvent Cements for (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Tubing and Fittings7. D2855, Making Solvent Cemented Joints with PVC Pipe and Fittings8. D3139, Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes using Flexible Elastomeric Seals.9. F438, Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,Schedule 4010. F439, Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,Schedule 8011. F441, Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 8012. F477, Standard Specification for Elastometric Seals, Gaskets for Joining Plastic Pipe13. F593, Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and StudsB. American Water Works Association (AWWA)1. C900, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 IN through 12 IN, for WaterDistribution2. C905, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Water Transmission Pipe, Nominal Diameters 14 INthrough 36 IN3. M23, PVC Pipe - Design and Installation1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Certifications and Testing consistent with Section 01300 and including1. See Section 1506015064 - 111/07 PIPE: PLASTIC (PVC) PRESSURE

B. Shop Drawings consistent with Section 01330 and including1. See Section 15060PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALSA. PVC Type 1 and CPVC1. Schedule 40 PVC Pipe and Fittingsa. Pipe: ASTM D1785b. Fittings: ASTM D2466 and D24672. Schedule 80 PVC Pipe and Fittingsa. Pipe: ASTM D1785b. Fittings: ASTM D2464 and D24673. Schedule 40 CPVC Pipe and Fittingsa. Pipe: ASTM F441b. Fittings: ASTM F4384. Schedule 80 CPVC Pipe and Fittingsa. Pipe: ASTM F441b. Fittings: ASTM F4395. Solvent Cementa. ASTM D25646. Nuts and Boltsa. ASTM F593, Type 316 stainless steelb. Two nuts provided for one inch diameter bolt applications and larger7. Rubber Expansion Joints: Materials compatible with chemical and pressurecharacteristics of conveyed substance8. See Piping Specification Schedule on DrawingsB. C900, C905, and D2241 PVC pipe1. Pipea. (AWWA) C900b. Dimension Ratio (DR) (SDR) = Refer to Pipe Schedulec. Working Pressure Rating: Refer to Pipe Schedule2. Fittingsa. Less than 4-inches shall be PVC with solvent cement connections.b. 4-inches and larger shall be DIP fittings, see Section 15062.3. Restrained Jointsa. Thrust blocks as shown on drawingb. Joint Restraint:1) EBAA Iron, Inc. Series 2000 PV mechanical joint restraints or equal2) EBAA Iron, Inc. Series 1600 or Series 2800 or equal at bell and spigotjoints4. See Piping Specification Schedules on Drawings15064 - 211/07 PIPE: PLASTIC (PVC) PRESSURE

PART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATIONA. Prior to installation, inspect and verify condition of piping and appurtenances. Installationconstitutes installer's acceptance of condition for satisfactory installation.3.02 PREPARATIONA. Correct defects or conditions which may interfere with or prevent a satisfactory installation.B. Assure ends of pipe to be fitted with flanges have all protrusions ground flush.3.03 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATIONA. Buried piping1. Less than 2-inch shall have solvent cement joints.2. 2-inch or greater shall have gasketed joints.B. Exposed piping1. Less than 4-inch shall have solvent cement joints.2. 4-inch or greater: Not used.C. PVC Type 1 and CPVC: Field threading PVC will not be permitted. Perform required threadedconnections or attachments by the use of factory molded socket by threaded adapters.1. Make cemented joints in accordance with ASTM D28552. Supporta. Support exposed piping in accordance with Sections 15060 and 15090.b. Continuously support PVC piping at liquid operating temperatures in excess of100°F.c. For vertical piping, band the pipe at intervals to rigidly support load of twicevertical load. Support riser clamps on spring hangers.d. Do not clamp PVC tightly or restrict movement for expansion and contraction.e. Support heavy in-line devices such as meters or metallic valves totallyindependent of the PVC pipeline.3. Install buried piping per Sections 15060 and 02221.D. C900, C905, and D2241 PVC:1. Generala. Perform all laying and jointing in Contracting Officer’s presenceb. Remove defective materials from the site2. Cuttinga. Cut in accordance with manufacturer's standard recommendationsb. Machine cut ends smooth to proper dimensionsc. Do not cut with a cold chisel, iron pipe cutter, flame, or any method that mayfracture the pipe or leave ragged, uneven edgesd. Machine cut ends smooth to the proper dimensionse. Bevel and free cut ends of sharp edges after cutting15064 - 311/07 PIPE: PLASTIC (PVC) PRESSURE

3. Pipe Layinga. Inspect pipe and accessories for defects before lowering into trenchb. Repair or replace any defective, damaged, or unsound pipec. Remove all foreign matter and dirt from the inside of pipe before layingd. Check bedding for firmness and uniformity of surface immediately beforelaying each section of pipee. Carefully lower pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories into the trench withderricks, ropes, and other suitable equipment to prevent damagef. Do not dump or drop pipe or accessories into trenchg. Lay to lines and grades specified and indicated on Drawings1) Closely joint to form a smooth flow lineh. Utilize implements, tools, and facilities as recommended by manufactureri. Keep pipe clean during and after layingj. Close all open ends with watertight, expandable test plugsk. Remove and re-lay any pipe that has floatedl. Do not lay pipe when1) There is water in the trench or trench bottom is frozen2) Trench conditions are unsuitable3) Weather conditions are unsuitablem. Use acceptable adapters at structure connections to provide a watertight sealand flexibility; provide a short length of pipe outside each connection inaccordance with Section 15060n. Protect from lateral displacement by placing and compacting pipe embedmentas shown on Drawings4. Jointinga. Assemble in accordance with the manufacturer's instructionsb. Wipe gasket and gasket seat clean before inserting gasketc. Lubricate the gasket and the outside of the clean pipe endd. Utilize an assembly tool as recommended by the manufacturer to center thesleeve over into the collare. Force the pipe into the collarf. Check gasket location after assembly with a suitable gauge1) Gasket locations to be the distance from the sleeve end recommendedby the coupling manufacturer for full circumference2) If not within the required limits, disassemble and reassemble the joint5. Fittingsa. For DIP fittings, see Section 15062.b. Install utilizing standard methodsc. Use transition gaskets with ASTM D2241 PVCd. Carefully connect to pipe or other facilitye. Check joint to ensure a sound and proper joint6. Install buried piping per Sections 15060 and 022217. Install tracer wire for all buried piping3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Test piping systems in accordance with Section 1506015064 - 411/07 PIPE: PLASTIC (PVC) PRESSURE

3.05 CLEANINGA. Clean in accordance with Section 15060END OF SECTION15064 - 511/07 PIPE: PLASTIC (PVC) PRESSURE

SECTION 15070VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SOUND CONTROLPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing vibration isolating mountings andhangers for all equipment having reciprocating or rotating parts and for any other equipment,piping, or vessels that produce or transmit objectionable vibrations, pulsations, or noises.1 .2 RELATED WORKA. General mechanical provisions - Section 15010.1 .3 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Project seismic zone:1. 4 with a zone factor of 0.40.1 .4 SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01330.B. Manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each type of vibrationcontrol product. Submit schedule showing size, type, deflection, and location for each productfurnished.C. Shop drawings showing dimensions, weights, required clearances, and method of assembly ofcomponents. Detail bases, and show location of equipment anchoring points, coordinated withequipment manufacturer's shop drawings. Spring isolators shall include spring diameters,deflections, compressed spring height and solid spring height.D. Equipment operating speed.E. Equipment weight.1 .5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01770.B. Submit operation and maintenance data for vibration isolation mountings, flexible pipe connectorsand seismic cable restraints.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 ISOLATORSA. Pads (Type 1): Rubber pad arranged in single or multiple layers with nonslip pattern.15070-1VIBRATION ISOLATIONAND SOUND CONTROL

2 .2 ISOLATION HANGERSA. General: Formed with brackets and standard isolator type indicated, designed for three times ratedloading of units, fabricated to accept minimum misalignment of 30 degrees off center in anydirection before contacting hanger box.1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of compressed height of spring ratedload.2. Minimum additional travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.B. Neoprene Vibration Isolator (Type 2): Neoprene or rubber element with minimum deflection of0.3-inches (8 mm), securely retained in hanger box. Type HD as manufactured by MasonIndustries, Inc. or approved equal.2 .3 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORSA. Neoprene Connectors: Flexible neoprene or EPDM construction consisting of multiple plies ofnylon tire cord fabric and elastomer molded and cured. Twin-sphere type for straight pipeconnection and single sphere for elbows. Connectors rated at 150 psi (1035 kPa) at 220 degrees F(104 degrees C). Type MFNEC for elbows and type MFTFU or MFTNC for straight connectorsas manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., Hauppauge, NY, 11788; or Series VMT for straightconnectors by Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc., Bloomingdale NJ 07403; or approvedequal.B. Metallic Connectors:1. Non-ferrous Pipe: Flexible bronze hose with bronze wire braid and copper tube ends orbronze flanged ends, braze-welded to hose. Type BBF as manufactured by MasonIndustries, Inc., Hauppauge, NY, 11788 or approved equal.2 .4 SEISMIC CONTROLSA. ASHRAE Type C:1. General: Steel spring isolator with elastomeric snubber, within cast iron or welded steelhousing.2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of compressed height of spring ratedload.3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of required deflection at rated load.4. Spring Mounting: Adjustable upward rebound plate. Series AEQM by VibrationMountings and Controls, Inc., Bloomingdale, NJ, or approved equal.B. Cable Restraints (Type E): Galvanized or stainless steel, 7 x 19, aircraft cable. Series SCR byVibration Mountings and Controls, Inc., Bloomingdale, NJ 07403 or approved equal.3 .1 PART 3 EXECUTIONA. Mount equipment, piping and ducts with vibration isolation in accordance with ASHRAE HVACApplications Handbook-95. Comply with minimum static deflections.15070-2VIBRATION ISOLATIONAND SOUND CONTROL

B. Install vibration isolation equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.C. Adjust vibration isolators to ensure that units have equal deflection, do not bottom out underloading, and are not short-circuited by other contacts or bearing points.D. Clean each vibration control unit and verify that each is working freely.3 .2 ISOLATION HANGERSA. Locate isolation hangers as near to overhead support structures as possible.3 .3 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORSA. Connect pipes to base mounted pumps and chiller evaporators with flexible equipment connectors.B. Neoprene Connectors: Install neoprene elbow or straight connectors on equipment side of shutoffvalves. Install control rods at each connector to limit movement within flexible connectorsspecified limits.C. Metallic Connectors: Install metallic connectors on equipment when temperatures exceed 220degrees F (104 degrees C) or where heating and ventilating units are located in ceiling area awayfrom mechanical room. Install metallic connectors on equipment side of shut-off valveshorizontal and parallel to equipment shafts wherever possible.3 .4 SEISMIC CONTROLA. Install seismic controls as required for zone specified.B. Install seismic snubbers on each suspended equipment item. Locate snubbers as close as possibleto the vibration isolators and bolt to supporting structures.C. Angle brace piping and ducts hard mounted to structure.D. Locate concrete anchors away from edges, stress joints or existing fractures. Follow ASTME488-96 for edge distances and center-to-center spacing.E. Suspended Equipment:1. Provide flexible connections between braced equipment and piping and ductwork that neednot be braced.2. Provide flexible connections between isolated equipment and braced piping and ductwork.3. Install sleeves and lateral, axial, and downward cable restraints as required bymanufacturer for seismic zone specified.F. Install cables with enough slack to engage only when 1/4 inch movement occurs.G. Ducts: Provide seismic cable restraint on rectangular ducts with cross-sectional areas of 6 squarefeet and larger, and round ducts with diameters of 28 inches or larger. No bracing is required ifthe duct is suspended by hangers 12 inches or less in length, as measured from the top of the ductto the bottom of the support where the hanger is attached. Brace ductwork at 30 foot intervals, ateach turn, and at each end of a duct run.15070-3VIBRATION ISOLATIONAND SOUND CONTROL

H. Pipe: Provide seismic restraint on piping 2.5 inches nominal diameter and larger. Provide seismicrestraint on piping located in boiler rooms and mechanical equipment rooms that have a nominaldiameter of 1.25 inch and larger. Provide seismic restraint on fuel oil piping, compressed air, andgas piping that have a nominal diameter of 1 inch and larger. No bracing or restraint is requiredfor piping suspended by individual hangers 12 inches or less in length as measured from the top ofthe pipe to the bottom of the support where the hanger is attached.3 .5 FOUNDATIONSA. Mount or suspend all equipment and piping from approved foundations and supports.B. Erect all floor mounted equipment on minimum 4-inch-high concrete pads over the complete floorarea of the equipment, unless shown otherwise. Wherever vibration eliminating devices arespecified, these items shall be mounted on minimum 4-inch-high concrete pads, unless shownotherwise. Pour concrete pads directly on structural slab.3 .6 VIBRATION ISOLATORSA. Mounting sizes shall be determined by the isolator manufacturer and shall be installed inaccordance with the manufacturer's instructions.PART 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT4 .1 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SOUND CONTROLA. Payment will be included in the bid item to which this work relates.END OF SECTION15070-4VIBRATION ISOLATIONAND SOUND CONTROL

SECTION 15075MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATIONPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing markers, tags, and labels formechanical piping, ducts, and equipment.1 .2 SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01330.B. Complete list of proposed materials, including manufacturers' names, catalog numbers, anddescriptive literature for the following:1. Plastic pipe markers.2. Tags.3. Labels and nameplates.4. Stencils.5. Paint.1 .3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01770.B. Furnish valve schedule for each piping system, typewritten on 8-1/2-inch x 11-inch bond paper.In tabular format, include valve identification number, piping system, system abbreviation (asshown on tag), location of valve (room or space), function, normal position, and area served.Mark valves which are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses by special flags inmargin of schedule. Show valve tag designations on as-built drawings.C. Furnish project record drawings with valve locations and tag designations shown on floor andelevation plans and schematic diagrams.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERSA. Pre-formed, semi-rigid, pre-printed, snap-on, color-coded pipe markers that completely encirclethe pipe and are protected by corrosive resistant plastic coating. Directional flow arrows shall beintegral with the marker. Snap-on Markers by Seton Name Plate Company, Branford,Connecticut, or approved equal.2 .2 TAGS15075-1MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

A. Engraved anodized aluminum or engraved plastic, 2-inch diameter tags, color coded to matchpiping system identification. Tag shall be pre-punched to receive chain. Style 2070 or 2961 bySeton Name Plate Company, Branford, CT, or approved equal. Provide solid brass jack chain forattaching tags.2 .3 LABELS AND NAMEPLATESA. Black plastic laminate, 1/16-inch thick, with white engraving, drilled for mounting with two sheetmetal or brass screws. Pressure-sensitive embossed labels are not acceptable. Engraved SetonPlynameplates style 2060 by Seton Name Plate Company, Branford, CT or approved equal.2 .4 STENCILSA. Metal stencils of letter sizes complying with ASME A13.1-96. Exterior grade oil-based alkydgloss stenciling spray paint. Color shall comply with NEMA Z535.1-91. Manufactured by SetonName Plate Company, Branford, Connecticut, or approved equal.2 .5 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATESA. Metal nameplates permanently fastened to equipment with data engraved or stamped.PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 GENERALA. Identify piping and ductwork in crawl spaces, basements, above ceilings, attics, accessible chases,storage, and mechanical rooms. Provide identifying markings at 25 feet on center but not lessthan once in each room for piping and at 50 feet on center on ductwork. Install identifyingdevices prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.3 .2 PIPE MARKERSA. Apply pipe and flow direction arrow marking near each valve, control device, and near eachbranch and riser takeoff excluding takeoffs less than 10 feet in length. Locate markers nearlocations where pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings.B. Apply marking to pipe so lettering is in most legible position. For overhead piping, applymarking on lower half of the pipe where view is unobstructed, and marking can be read from floorlevel.3 .3 VALVE IDENTIFICATIONA. Identify all valves, cocks, and control devices in piping systems, including fire protection valves,in main lines and branches. Exclude check valves, valves within factory fabricated equipment,plumbing fixture supply stops, HVAC terminal devices, and similar rough-in connection of enduseunits. List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping system.B. Valve tags shall have unique prefix to indicate systems, followed by valve number. Example:CW-1; CW-2; HW-1; etc. The prefix shall match the system abbreviation in pipe label color andvalve tag lettering schedule.15075-2MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

C. Valve Schedule: Mount valve schedule in each equipment room. Valve schedule shall bemounted in glazed display frame, screwed to the wall or plastic laminated with grommets andmounted to the wall.3 .4 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATIONA. Manufacturer's Nameplates: Provide on all equipment identifying manufacturer's name,equipment model number, size, capacity, and electrical characteristics. Leave manufacturer'snameplates clean and legible.B. Controls: Label magnetic starters and relays to identify connecting or controlled equipment.Label manual operating switches, fused disconnect switches, and thermal overload switches.Label automatic controls, control panels, zone valves, relays, and starters.C. Equipment: Label each unit with equipment symbol as noted on equipment schedules ondrawings.D. Fire Dampers: Identify fire damper access doors. Paint access door red and stencil each door"FIRE DAMPER ACCESS" with 2-inch high letters.3 .5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANINGA. Relocate any mechanical identification or nameplate which has been visually blocked. Clean faceof identification devices and valve charts.3 .6 COLOR AND IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULEA. Label piping and valves in accordance ASME A13.1-96 and the following table:PIPE LABEL COLOR AND VALVE TAG LETTERING SCHEDULESERVICEFIELD COLOR/LETTER COLORDomestic Cold Water Green/White CWDomestic Hot Water Yellow/Black HWHot Water Circulating Yellow/Black HWCChilled Water Supply Green/White CHSChilled Water Return Green/White CHRHeating Water Supply Yellow/Black HWSHeating Water Return Yellow/Black HWRLiquified Petroleum Gas Yellow/Black LPGCondensate DrainGreen/WhitePART 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT4 .1 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATIONVALVETAGA. Payment will be included in the contract bid item to which this work relates.15075-3MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

END OF SECTION15075-4MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

SECTION 15078PIPE: POLYETHYLENEPART 1GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of polyethylene underground piping, fittings, joints andappurtenances for potable water lines.1.1 DEFINITIONA. Bedding and backfill material types are defined in Section 02320.1.2 SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01330.B. Manufacturer's literature and certificates of compliance with the reference standards for pipe,fittings, and couplings.C. Manufacturer's installation instructions or guide.D. Written procedure for cleaning water lines and disposing of fluidized materials removed.1.3 REFERENCESA. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)1. D1248, Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials2. D3035, Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR Based on Controlled Outside Diameter3. D3261 Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) PlasticPipe and Tubing.4. D3350, Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Fitting Material5. D2657, Heat-Joining Polyolefin Pipe and FittingsB. American Water Works Association (AWWA)1. C901 Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Tubing, 1/2 IN through 3 IN for water service.2. C906 Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Fittings, 4 IN through 63 IN, for waterdistribution.1.3 PRODUCT HANDLINGA. Delivery: Handle pipe carefully to ensure delivery at the project site in sound, undamagedcondition. Pipe walls shall be free of cuts, cracks, holes, blisters, voids, foreign inclusions, orother defects that are visible to the naked eye and that may affect wall integrity. ContractingOfficer will reject damaged pipe on site. Contractor shall replace damaged pipe at no additionalexpense to the Government.15078-111/07 PIPE: POLYETHYLENE

B. Storage: Do not store materials directly on the ground. Adequately support piping to preventwarpage. Use protective covers where pipe may be damaged by direct sunlight.PART 2PRODUCTS2.1 POLYETHYLENE PLASTIC PIPE AND JOINTSA. Use for piping as shown on the drawings..1. Pipe: AWWA C901 and AWWA C906-99. Polyethylene material shall be PE 3408 highdensity polyethylene meeting cell classification 345464C according to ASTM D3350.Materials shall be approved by NSF for use in potable water systems. Pipe shall beDriscoplex 4100, ISCO Industries, or approved equal.a. Provide to the owner 20-feet of spare pipe.2. Joints, Fittings, and Valve connections:a. Pipe shall be joined by the butt-fusion process.b. Flanged joints shall be used to join 6-inch HDPE pipe to 6-inch valves and otherpiping materials. ISCO IPS Flange Adapter or approved equal.B. Repair Couplings1. Provide six, stainless steel repair clamps; Romac Industries SS1-H or approved equal.2.2 FITTINGSA. Butt Fusion Fittings - Fittings shall be PE3408 HDPE, Cell Classification of 345464C asdetermined by ASTM D3350-02, and approved for AWWA use. Butt Fusion Fittings shall have amanufacturing standard of ASTM D3261. Molded & fabricated fittings shall have a pressurerating equal to the pipe. Fabricated fittings are to be manufactured using Data Loggers.Temperature, fusion pressure and a graphic representation of the fusion cycle shall be part of thequality control records. All fittings shall be suitable for use as pressure conduits, and per AWWAC906, have nominal burst values of three and one-half times the Working Pressure Rating (WPR)of the fitting.B. Electrofusion Fittings - Fittings shall be PE3408 HDPE, Cell Classification of 345464C asdetermined by ASTM D3350-02. Electrofusion Fittings shall have a manufacturing standard ofASTM F1055. Fittings shall have a pressure rating equal to the pipe. All electrofusion fittingsshall be suitable for use as pressure conduits, and per AWWA C906, have nominal burst values ofthree and one-half times the Working Pressure Rating (WPR) of the fitting.C. Flanged joints shall be used to join 6-inch pipe to 6-inch gate valves. Flanged Joint Adapters shallbe PE 3408 HDPE, Cell Classification of 345464C as determined by ASTM D3350-02. FlangedJoint Adapters shall have a manufacturing standard of ASTM D3261. Fittings shall have apressure rating equal to the pipe. Provide stainless steel Lap Joint Flange (back-up flange) for allflange joint adapters. ISCO IPS Flange Adapter or approved equal.D. Other connections:1. Transition fittings shall be used to join HDPE to Schedule 80 PVC service lines. ISCOIPS HDPE to PVC transition fittings or approved equal.2. Threaded transition fittings shall be used to join 1-inch and 2-inch HDPE service pipingto isolation valves and pressure reducing valves. ISCO Male threaded transition fittingsor approved equal.15078-211/07 PIPE: POLYETHYLENE

PART 3EXECUTION3.1 GENERALA. Construct the water system to the lines and grades shown or established in the field.3.2 TRENCHINGA. Section 02320.3.3 BEDDINGA. Section 02320.3.4 INSTALLATIONA. Storage and Handling.1. PE pipe, tubing, and fittings shall be stored in a way that prevents damage as a result ofcrushing or piercing, excessive heat, harmful chemicals, or exposure to sunlight forprolonged periods. The allowable duration for exposure to sunlight depends on thestablization package contained in the material. Consult the pipe manufacturer for specificstorage limitations and recommendations.2. Handling operations, trench installation, and backfill operations should be performedwith reasonable care to prevent scratches, nicks, and gouges in the conduit.3. Practices, such as dragging coils of pipe or tubing over rough ground and installing bypulling through auger or boreholes containing sharp-edged material, shall be avoided toprevent damage by excessive abrasion and cutting.4. Uncoiling and other handling shall be done without kinking.5. If pipe is excessively cut (to a depth greater than 10 percent of its wall thickness) orkinked, the damaged portion shall be removed, discarded, and replaced.B. Inspection: Inspect pipe for defects before lowering into the trench. Defective, damaged, orunsound pipe will be rejected.C. Laying: After the trench bottom has been prepared for pipe installation in accordance withSection 02320, Polyethylene pipe shall be snaked within the trench to provide at least an extra 6inches of pipe per 100 feet of trench.D. Cleaning: For 4-inch and larger pipe, clear the pipe interior of dirt and other debris by keepingswabs in the pipe and pulling them forward past each completed joint. Ends of all installed pipeshall be plugged whenever work is not in progress.E. Pipe Cutting: Cutting for closure or other reasons shall be done neatly by methods recommendedby the manufacturer.F. Joints:1. Sections of polyethylene pipe should be joined into continuous lengths on the jobsiteabove ground. The joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performedin strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The butt fusionequipment used in the joining procedures should be capable of meeting all conditionsrecommended by the pipe manufacturer, including, but not limited to, temperature15078-311/07 PIPE: POLYETHYLENE

equirements of 400 degrees Fahrenheit, alignment, and an interfacial fusion pressure of75 PSI. The butt fusion joining will produce a joint weld strength equal to or greater thanthe tensile strength of the pipe itself. All welds will be made using a Data Logger torecord temperature, fusion pressure, with a graphic representation of the fusion cycleshall be part of the Quality Control records.2. Fittings shall be butt fusion welded to pipe.3. Mechanical joining will be used where the butt fusion method can not be used.Mechanical joining will be accomplished using a HDPE flange adapter with a stainlesssteel back-up ring. Connections to valves shall be accomplished by using flange adapters.4. Socket fusion, hot gas fusion, threading, solvents, and epoxies will not be used to joinHDPE pipe.3.5 DEFLECTIONA. Follow deflection guidelines of the pipe manufacturer.B. Bends in pipe shall not be permitted closer than 10 diameters from any fitting or valve. Therecommended minimum radius of curvature is 30 diameters, or the coil radius when bending withthe coil. Furthermore, bending of coiled pipe against the coil (reverse bending) shall not gobeyond straight. Polyethylene pipe that becomes kinked during handling or installation shall notbe used, and care should be taken to ensure that kinking does not develop after installation.3.6 THRUST RESTRAINTSA. Construct at all bends, tees, crosses, reducers, valves, and dead ends as shown and asrecommended by the pipe manufacturer.3.7 BACKFILLING OF SELECT MATERIALSA. Section 02320.3.8 BACKFILLINGA. Section 02320.3.9 UTILITY LINE MARKINGA. Section 02321.3.10 FINAL PIPE CLEANINGA. Before testing, clean all lines to be tested by flushing or mechanical means. Remove and disposeof fluidized materials as approved.3.11 TESTINGA. Section 15060.15078-411/07 PIPE: POLYETHYLENE

3.12 SURFACE FINISH WORKA. Section 02320 and 02502.3.13 DISINFECTIONA. After completion of testing and prior to placing in service, disinfect the potable water system asspecified in Section 02675.END OF SECTION15078-511/07 PIPE: POLYETHYLENE

SECTION 15090PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEMSPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION INCLUDESA. Pipe support systems1.2. RELATED SECTIONSA. Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings: General Statement1.3 REFERENCESA. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)1. B31.1, Power Piping2. B31.3, Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery PipingB. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)1. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes2. A575, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant QualityC. American Welding Society (AWS)1. D1.1, Structural Welding CodeD. Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS)1. SP58, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials and Design2. SP69, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application1.4 SUBMITTALSA. Certifications and Testing consistent with Section 01430 and including1. Certification that products used meet standards referenced.B. Shop Drawings consistent with Section 01330 and including1. Product technical dataPART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 MANUFACTURERSA. Pipe Support Saddles1. Products as manufactured by ITT Grinell (Figure 264), B-Line (Figure B3093) or approvedequal.15090 - 111/07 PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEMS

2.2 COMPONENTSA. Galvanize all structural steel supports integral to support system unless otherwise indicated herein.B. Expanding pipe supports: Spring hangers conforming to MSS-SP58PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Prior to installation, inspect and verify condition of substrate. Installation constitutes installer'sacceptance of substrate for satisfactory installation.B. Prior to installation, inspect and verify condition of pipe support system. Installation constitutesinstaller’s acceptance of condition for satisfactory installation.3.2 PREPARATIONA. Correct defects or conditions which may interfere with or prevent a satisfactory installation.3.3 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATIONA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructionsB. Locate supports and accessories to support pipe system at concentrated loads and in accordance withminimums defined in MSS-SP69.C. Install supports capable of supporting the pipe for service and testing conditions shown on pipingSpecification Schedules in Section 15060. Allow free expansion and contraction of the piping toprevent excessive stress resulting from service and testing conditions or from weight transferredfrom the piping or attached equipment.D. Locate piping and pipe supports as to not interfere with maintenance or disassembly of equipment.E. Provide pipe support saddles for pipe located 3 FT or less from the floor elevation.1. Use schedule 40 galvanized steel support pipe risers recommended by saddle manufacturer.2. Provide steel floor plate with collar 3/16 IN thickness, circular in shape, and sleeve typeconnection to pipe.3. Size floor plate 4 IN larger than support pipe.4. Fit collar over outside of support pipe and extend up 2 IN from the floor plate.5. Weld floor plate to collar and grind all edges smooth. Hot-dip galvanize assembly afterfabrication.F. Adjust supports to allow for proper pitch of pipes.15090 - 211/07 PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEMS

3.4 SCHEDULEA. General: Locate pipe supports at maximum spacing scheduled unless indicated otherwise on-thedrawings. Provide at least one support for each length of pipe, at each change of direction and ateach valve.B. Ductile pipe support schedulePipe Sizes - INMaximum Span - FT1-1/2 and less 52 thru 4 105 thru 8 1510 and greater 20C. Plastic pipe support schedulePipe Sizes - INMaximum Span – FT*1-1/4 and less 31-1/2 thru 3 44 and greater 5*Maximum fluid temperature of 100 degF.END OF SECTION15090 - 311/07 PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEMS

SECTION 15100VALVES: GENERAL STATEMENTPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION INCLUDESA. All valving, operators, and valving appurtenances1.2 RELATED SECTIONSA. Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings: General StatementB. Section 15101 - Gate ValvesC. Section 15114 - Special ValvesD. Section 15116 – Non-Freeze Post Hydrants1.3 REFERENCESA. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)1. B1.20.1, Pipe Threads, General Purpose2. B16.1, Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings3. B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings4. B16.18, Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings Class 25, 125, 250 and 800B. American Water Works Association (AWWA)1. C111, Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings2. C207, Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 through 144 IN1.4 SUBMITTALSA. Certifications and Testing consistent with Section 01330 and including1. Certification that products being used meet requirements of standards referenced.B. Shop Drawings consistent with Section 01330 and including:1. Product technical data including:a. Valve pressure/temperature ratingb. End connection type and ratingc. Valve material of constructiond. Special liningse. Valve dimensions and weightf. Valve flow coefficient conversiong. Manufacturer's installation instructions for actuator2. For valves with automatic actuators furnish:a. Product technical data for actuatorb. Wiring and control diagramsc. Manufacturers installation instructions for actuator15100 - 111/07 VALVES: GENERAL STATEMENT

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals consistent with Section 01785.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 VALVESA. End Connections1. Provide end connections for valves as defined in the Piping Specification Schedulespresented in Section 15060.2. Assure end connections meet the following standardsa. Screwed: ANSI B1.20.1b. Flanged: ANSI B16.1 or B16.5 or AWWA C207c. Bell and spigot or mechanical (gland) type: AWWA C111B. Refer to related sections for specifications of each type of valve on Project.2.2 OPERATORSA. Exposed Service1. Handwheelsa. Provide handwheels for all valves not having lever operators.b. Assure direction of rotation to open each valve counter-clockwise.c. Furnish valve body or operator with impression cast showing word "OPEN" andarrow indicating open direction.d. Limit force required to operate handwheel to 80 LBS maximum2. Lever operatorsa. Provide lever operators for ball valves less than 4 IN in size.b. Design operators to produce required torque with maximum pull of 80 LBS.B. Buried Service1. 2″ square operating nut2.3 ACCESSORIESA. Valve Boxes1. Provide service boxes of cast-iron or concrete construction.2. Extend service boxes to required length using "Buffalo" screw adjustment.3. Provide boxes with housings of sufficient size to completely cover top of valve andcomplete with identifying covers.4. Design valve boxes so that traffic load on top of the box is not transmitted to the valve.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Prior to installation, inspect interconnecting piping and end connections to assure compatibility.B. Prior to installation, inspect and verify condition of valve and appurtenances. Installation15100 - 211/07 VALVES: GENERAL STATEMENT

constitutes installer's acceptance of product condition for satisfactory installation.C. Assure exposed piping is sufficiently supported to bear weight of valve when it is installed.3.2 PREPARATIONA. Correct defects or conditions which may interfere with or prevent a satisfactory installation.3.3 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATIONA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Protect all bolts with polyethylene wrapping.C. Setting Outside Valves1. Locate valves installed in trenches where indicated on Drawing.2. Set valves and valve boxes plumb.3. Place valve boxes directly over valves with top of box being brought to surface offinished grade.4. After installation, carefully backfill for a distance of 4 FT on each side of box.D. Support exposed valves to minimize bending of the valve end connections as a result of pipeloading.3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Repair or remove and replace defective material.3.5 ADJUSTINGA. Make all adjustments to valves, operators and appurtenant equipment prior to Project acceptanceby Contracting Officer.END OF SECTION15100 - 311/07 VALVES: GENERAL STATEMENT

SECTION 15101GATE VALVESPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION INCLUDESA. All gate valves1.2 RELATED SECTIONSA. Section 15100 - Valves: General Statement1.3 REFERENCESA. American Water Works Association (AWWA)1. C500, Gate Valves for Water and Sewerage Systems2. C509, Resilient Seated Gate Valves, 3 through 12 NPS, for Water and Sewerage SystemsB. Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS)1. SP-80, Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves1.4 SUBMITTALSA. Certifications and Testing consistent with Section 01430 and including1. See Section 151002. Test results for all tests required in Article 2.03 of this SectionB. Shop Drawings consistent with Section 01330 and including1. See Section 15100C. Operation and Maintenance Data consistent with Section 01785PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 MANUFACTURERSA. Gate Valves1. Products as manufactured by M&H, Watts, or approved equal.2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITSA. General1. Provide valves with clear waterways the full diameter of the valve.2. Provide end connections per Excavation Specification in Section 15060.15101 - 111/07 GATE VALVES

B. Water Valves1. Exposed and buried valves (3 IN and smaller)a. Bronze valveb. Meeting MSS SP-80c. Rated for 200 LB. working pressured. Non-rising stem (NRS) with "O" ring stem seal using resilient syntheticrubbere. Assure stuffing box capable of being repacked under pressuref. Malleable iron hand wheel2. Exposed and buried valves (3 IN to 12 IN)a. Iron body, resilient seated wedge typeb. Rated 200 PSI working pressurec. Meeting AWWA C509d. Non-rising stem (NRS) with “O” ring stem seal using resilient syntheticrubbere. Injected madded rubber seats of EPDM (Terpolymer of Ethylene, Propyleneand a Diene)f. Epoxy coated and lined meeting AWWA C550g. Rubber encapsulated gate and corrosion protectedh. Markings meeting AWWA C509 that include manufacturer, year ofmanufacture, maximum working pressure, and size of valve2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROLA. Provide Manufacturer’s Certification to show conformance with AWWA 500 and AWWA 509testing and standards.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Prior to installation, inspect interconnecting piping and end connections to assure compatibility.B. Prior to installation, inspect and verify condition of valve and appurtenances. Installation constitutesinstaller's acceptance of product condition for satisfactory installation.C. Assure exposed piping is sufficiently supported to bear weight of valve when it is installed.3.2 PREPARATIONA. Correct defects or conditions which may interfere with or prevent a satisfactory installation.3.3 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATIONA. See Section 15100B. Install buried valves in the closed position. Support valve in trench to prevent settling and excessivestrain on the connection to the pipe.15101 - 211/07 GATE VALVES

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Repair or remove and replace defective valves.END OF SECTION15101 - 311/07 GATE VALVES

SECTION 15106CHECK VALVESPART 1 - GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDESA. All check valves1.02 RELATED SECTIONSA. Section 15100 - Valves: General Statement1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Certifications and Testing consistent with Section 01400 and including1. See Section 15100B. Shop Drawings consistent with Section 01300 and including1. See Section 15100C. Operation and Maintenance Data consistent with Section 01300PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 CUSHIONED SWING CHECK VALVESA. Cast iron or cast steel body and discB. Bronze or stainless steel seat ringC. Noncorrosive shaft for attachment of weight and leverD. Tight seating valve design for hammer and shock free operationE. Renewable seat ring secured by threaded jointF. Attach air cushion chamber to outside of valve bodyG. Assure fully adjustable closing speedH. Suspend valve disc from shaft which passes through stuffing box and connect to cushion on chamberon outside of valve.I. Rated 250 PSI working pressureJ. End connections per Piping Specification Schedule in Section 1506015106 - 111/07 CHECK VALVES

K. Products as manufactured by G.A. Industries, Apco, or others, and which meet these Specifications.2.02 RUBBER FLAPPER SWING CHECKS (2 IN - 24 IN)A. Cast iron body and coverB. Long body (not wafer)C. Buna N flapper internally reinforced with steel and having "0" ring seating edgeD. Fabricated such that flapper can be removed without removing valve from lineE. Fabricate seating surface on 45 degree angleF. Maximum travel distance for flapper to go from full open to full closed is 35 degreesG. End connections per Piping Specification Schedules in Section 150602.03 SWING CHECK VALVESA. 1-1/2 IN and Smaller1. Bronze body and renewable disc2. Screwed cap3. Rated 200 PSI WOG4. End connections per Piping Specification Schedules in Section 150605. Products as manufactured by Walworth, Powell, or others, and which meet theseSpecifications.B. 2 IN - 12 IN1. Cast iron body and cover2. Bronze mounted composition disc - cast iron disc3. Noncorrosive shaft for attachment of weight and lever4. Cast bronze seat ring5. Rated for 250 PSI working pressure6. End connections per Piping Specification Schedules in Section 150607. Products manufactured by GA Industries, Apco, or others, and which meet theseSpecifications.C. 14 IN to 24 IN1. Cast iron body, cover and disc2. Bronze seat ring3. Noncorrosive shaft for attachment of weight and lever4. Bolted bonnet5. Bronze mounted6. Rated for 150 PSI working pressure7. End connections per Piping Specification Schedules in Section 150608. Products manufactured by GA Industries, Apco, or others, and which meet theseSpecifications.2.04 BALL CHECK VALVES (FOR SLUDGE APPLICATION)15106 - 211/07 CHECK VALVES

A. Ball check valves shall be furnished with ANSI class 125 standard faced and drilled flanges. Thevalves shall have cast iron body conforming to ASTM A 159-83, Class 35, and with a 150 psiworking pressure.B. Ball shall be sinking type with a specific gravity of 1.3, shall be hollow steel with a coating ofvulcanized nitril rubber.C. The valve shall be designed to keep the ball completely out of the flow stream when open.D. The ball shall be guided to its seat by smooth ribs cast integrally in the housing wall.E. The valve shall be capable of operation at a pressure drop not greater than 1.5 feet of water at a flowvelocity of 6 fps.F. Products manufactured by Flomatic, or other and which meet these specifications.2.05 BUTTERFLY CHECK VALVESA. Cast iron bodyB. Buna N sealC. 316 stainless steel stops, pin, spring and retainerD. Rated for 125 PSI working pressureE. Wafer type constructionF. End connections per Piping Specification Schedules in Section 150602.06 DUAL DISC CHECK VALVES (WATER APPLICATION)A. Ductile iron bodyB. Buna N sealing element molded to bodyC. Doors: ductile iron electrolysis nickel coatedD. 316 stainless steel hinge, shaft torsion springs and shaft stopE. Rated for 150 PSI working pressureF. Spring loaded normally closed designG. End connections per Piping Specification Schedules in Section 15060H. Products manufactured by Mission (Duo-Check II), Apco (Series 9000), or others, and which meetthese Specifications.15106 - 311/07 CHECK VALVES

2.07 SILENT CHECKA. Ductile iron or cast steel bodyB. Bronze trimC. Stainless steel springD. Wafer style for 2-1/2 IN and smallerE. Globe style for 3 IN and largerF. Rated for 150 psi working pressureG. Products as manufactured by Nibco, Apco, or others, and which meet these Specifications.2.09 SWING CHECKS (PVC AND FRP PIPING APPLICATIONS)A. PVC valve body and DiscB. EPDM seats and sealsC. Rated 100 PSI at 70 DegF1. End connections per piping specification schedule in Section 150602. External lever and weight2.10 PVC BALL CHECK VALVEA. CPVC Ball Check Valves1. CPVC body2. Valves shall be equipped with Viton O-ring seals.3. Valves rated for 120 psi at 140 DegF.4. Provide end connections per Piping Specification Schedules in Section 15060.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATIONA. Prior to installation, inspect interconnecting piping and end connections to assure compatibilityB. Prior to installation, inspect and verify condition of valve and appurtenances. Installation constitutesinstaller's acceptance of product condition for satisfactory installation.C. Assure exposed piping is sufficiently supported to bear weight of valve when it is installed15106 - 411/07 CHECK VALVES

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Correct defects or conditions which may interfere with or prevent satisfactory installation3.03 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATIONA. See Section 151003.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Repair or remove and replace defective valves.3.05 ADJUSTINGA. Make final adjustments to cushioned swing checks prior to acceptance by Owner.END OF SECTION15106 - 511/07 CHECK VALVES

SECTION 15114SPECIAL VALVESPART 1 - GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDESA. Air-Release Valves1.02 RELATED SECTIONSA. Section 15100 - Valves: General Statement1.03 REFERENCESB. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)1. 70, National Electric Code2. 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Work Places.1.04 SUBMITTALSA. Certifications and Testing consistent with Section 01330 and including:1. See Section 15100B. Shop Drawings consistent with Section 01330 and including:1. See Section 15100C. Operation and Maintenance Data consistent with Section 01785.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 AIR-RELEASE VALVESA. Inlet Size: 1 IN.B. Orifice Size: 5/32 IN.C. Body and Cover: Cast iron.D. Float: Stainless steel.E. Seat: Brass.F. Needle: Buna-N.15114 - 111/07 SPECIAL VALVES

G. Linkage: Delrin.H. Lever Pins, Retaining Rings, Screws: Stainless steel.I. Pressure Rating: 300 psi.J. Products manufactured by APCO, Crispin, GA Industries, or others, and which meet theseSpecifications.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATIONA. Prior to installation, inspect interconnecting piping and end connections to assure compatibility.B. Prior to installation, inspect and verify condition of valve and appurtenances. Installation constitutesinstaller's acceptance of product condition for satisfactory installation.C. Assure exposed piping is sufficiently supported to bear weight of valve when it is installed.3.02 PREPARATIONA. Correct defects or conditions which may interfere with or prevent a satisfactory installation.3.03 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATIONA. See Section 150603.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Repair or remove and replace defective valves.3.05 ADJUSTINGA. Make final adjustments on Air-Release Valves prior to acceptance by Owner.END OF SECTION15114 - 211/07 SPECIAL VALVES

SECTION 15130PUMPSPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing pumping equipment for HVACsystems.1 .2 CODES AND STANDARDSA. Provide pumps conforming to the following standards:1. Hydraulic Institute, HI 1.1-1.5-94 and HI 1.6-94.2. Underwriters Laboratories, UL 778-96.1 .3 SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01330. Submit manufacturer's shop drawings indicating dimensions,weight, required clearances and methods of assembly of components.B. Submit certified pump curves with selection points clearly indicated, installation and start-upinstructions and physical data for approval.C. Submit wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power, signal, and control systems.1 .4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01770.B. Operation and maintenance data for each type of pump including spare parts lists for each pump.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 GENERALA. Provide factory tested pumps, thoroughly cleaned and painted with machinery enamel prior toshipment. Type, size, capacity, and model number of each pump is listed in the pump schedule.Provide pumps of same type by same manufacturer.B. Select pumps so that ratio of impeller diameter used to maximum impeller diameter indicated forthe casing on the pump curve shall not exceed 0.85.C. Pump construction shall be rated for minimum 175 psig working pressure and continuous watertemperature of 225 degree F. Pumps shall be factory tested at 1.5 times working pressure.D. Pump bearings shall be ball type, grease lubricated, including grease fitting, unless otherwisespecified.SEKI-507 15130-1PUMPS

E. Motor sizes have been selected for non-overloading conditions. Motor brake horsepower shall notbe exceeded at any point of the pump characteristic curve and shall not exceed 100 percent ofnominal motor horsepower under any condition of pump load. Motor efficiency shall be asspecified in 15050.2 .2 IN-LINE CIRCULATING PUMP (HWP-1 & HWP-2)A. In-line centrifugal, single stage, wet rotor, close coupled pump, rated for continuous operationfrom 60°F to 230°F for heating water service. Capacity as shown. Series 200, by Grundfos,Clovis, CA, or approved equal.B. Casing: Cast iron with unions or threaded companion flanges for piping connections and threadedgage tappings at inlet and outlet connections.C. Impeller: Stainless steel; statically and dynamically balanced, and secured to stainless steel motorshaft.D. Shaft Seal and Coupling: Not Used.E. Bearings: Carbon thrust bearing, chrome carbide journals, ceramic radial bearings.F. Motor: Three-speed, voltage, phase and frequency as shown, cooled and lubricated by pumpedfluid.2 .3 IN-LINE CIRCULATING PUMP (CHP-1 & CHP-2)A. In-line, centrifugal, single-stage, split case, close coupled pump, rated for continuous operation for40°F chilled water service. Capacity as shown. Series 7000 by Grundfos, Clovis, CA, orapproved equal.B. Casing: Cast iron with unions or threaded companion flanges for piping connections and threadedgage tappings at inlet and outlet connections.C. Impeller: Stainless steel; statically and dynamically balanced, and secured to stainless steel shaft.D. Seals: Mechanical type, stainless steel with tungsten carbide rotating face.E. Coupling: Cast iron, for direct coupling of pump and motor.F. Motor: Open dripproof, minimum 1.15 service factor, voltage, phase and frequency as shown.2 .4 VIBRATION ISOLATIONA. As specified in Section 15070.PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 GENERALA. Discharge increasers shall be concentric and located at pump discharge nozzle. Suction pipingreducers shall be eccentric and located at pump suction nozzle. Horizontal elbows shall not beused at pump suction. Provide purge cock and drain cock in circulator casing, and gauge tappingsin pump nozzles.SEKI-507 15130-2PUMPS

B. Install pumps in accordance with manufacturer's written installation and alignment instructions.C. Pumps shall be arranged to provide access for periodic maintenance, including removal of motors,impellers, couplings, and accessoriesD. Support pumps and piping separately so that piping is not supported by pumps.E. Suspend in-line pumps using continuous-thread hanger rod and vibration isolation hangers ofsufficient size to support weight of pump independent of piping system. Install seismic bracing asrequired by local building code.F. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of pumps between pump casing andvalves.3 .2 VIBRATION ISOLATIONA. As specified in 15070.3 .3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANINGA. Alignment: Check alignment and, where necessary, realign shafts of motors and pumps withinrecommended tolerances of manufacturer.B. Verify pumps are free to rotate by hand. Do not operate pump if it is bound or drags until cause oftrouble is determined and corrected.C. Start-Up: Lubricate pumps before start-up and start-up in accordance with manufacturer's writtenrecommendations.D. Ensure pumps are wired properly, with rotation in correct direction and that pump and motorgrounding have been provided.3 .4 TRAININGA. As specified in Section 01815. Provide 2 hours of instruction to Government Personnel. NotifyContracting Officer at least 7 days before proposed instruction, and arrange mutually agreeabletime. Video tape training session.3 .5 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCINGA. As specified in Section 15950.PART 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT4 .1 PUMPSA. Payment will be included in the bid item to which this work relates.END OF SECTIONSEKI-507 15130-3PUMPS

SECTION 15200FLOW METERSPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION INCLUDESA. Flow meters to measure flow at the process piping enclosure.1.2 REFERENCESA. American Water Works Association (AWWA)1. C700, Water Meter1.3 SUBMITTALSA. Shop Drawings consistent with Section 01330B. Operation and Maintenance Data consistent with Section 01785.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 MANUFACTURERSA. Cold Water Meters, Turbine Type1. Sensus SR positive displacement cold water meter2. Approved equalB. Remote Systems1. Sensus ECR WR Remote Register with internal battery and two wire lead.2. Approved EqualPART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Provide in accordance with manufacturer's instructionsB. Provide a minimum of five (5) pipe diameters of straight pipe upstream of the meter.C. Provide a minimum of two (2) pipe diameters of straight pipe downstream of the meter.D. Pressure reducing devices and weighted check valves shall be located at least five (5) pipediameters of straight pipe upstream of the flow meter.E. Provide meter no more than two feet below grade to allow for easy reading of the register.15200 - 104/08 FLOW METERS

F. Mount the remote meter display on the inside of the NEMA 4X electrical cabinet, adjacent tothe process piping enclosure. The register shall have a wired connection to the remotedisplay. Note that the Sensus Remote Register will not begin to totalize until 1000-gallons ofwater have passed through the flow meter.END OF SECTION15200 - 204/08 FLOW METERS

SECTION 15360PROPANE GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing low-pressure underground propanegas distribution piping, transition risers, valves, valve boxes, aboveground gas piping, regulators,meters, and all other accessories and specialties necessary for a complete and operable propanegas distribution system.1 .2 DEFINITIONA. Bedding and backfill material types (BD, SB, BF) are defined in Section 02320.1 .3 RELATED WORKA. General mechanical provisions - Section 15010B. Basic materials and methods - Section 15050.C. Propane storage system and appurtenances - Section 15480.1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. All work performed under this section shall meet all recommendations and requirements of 1994IAPMO Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC), NFPA 54-96, NFPA 58-95, ASTM D2774-94, Code ofFederal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, California Title 8, Division 1, Chapter 4, and all otherapplicable national, state, local, and propane gas supplier standards and regulations.B. Propane distribution system installer shall have had successful installation experience on projectswith propane or natural gas systems work similar to that required for this project.C. Installer's personnel responsible for making heat fusion bonded joints in plastic piping shall becertified in accordance with Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Part 192, Section192.285. In addition, installer's personnel responsible for the operation of electrofusionequipment shall be properly trained in the use of such equipment by the electrofusion equipmentmanufacturer or by one of the manufacturer's authorized representatives.1 .5 COORDINATIONA. Interruption of Services: Coordinate shutdown of water, waste, or electrical systems withContracting Officer.B. Schedule of Work: Coordinate work with other trades. In scheduling, anticipate such items asinstalling equipment through available openings in structures, coordinating common trenchingwith other utilities, delivering piping and equipment over available access roads or pathways onjob site, and determining locations of piping assembly (fusion process) work areas.C. Make minor changes in piping alignments as necessary to suit actual conditions.1 .6 PROTECTION15360-1PROPANE GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

A. Cap all openings in pipes and valves to protect against entry of foreign matter as work progresses.1 .7 PERMITSA. Contractor shall apply for and obtain all required state and local permits for the work to beperformed under this section.1 .8 SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01330.B. Submit manufacturer's literature for pipe and pipe fittings, transition risers, valves, valve boxes,regulators, and meters.C. Submit documentation and references regarding successful underground piping installationexperience on projects with propane or natural gas systems work. Submit proof of certificationfor personnel responsible for making heat fusion bonded joints in plastic piping.1 .9 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01770.B. Furnish as-built drawings for all underground propane gas distribution piping installed under thiscontract, including stationing along piping alignments and northing-easting coordinate locationsof gas valves. Drawings shall be drawn at a scale of 1-inch = 20-feet.C. Operation and maintenance data for review and approval as required by Section 01785.1. Operation and maintenance data for regulators, meters, earthquake valves, andunderground valves.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 UNDERGROUND GAS PIPE AND FITTINGSA. General: Pipe and fittings shall be constructed of PE 2406 low density polyethylene, and shall beintegrally colored yellow. UAC2000, by Uponor Aldyl Co., Shawnee, Oklahoma 74801, orapproved equal.B. Piping: ASTM D2513-96. IPS (iron pipe size) polyethylene gas pressure pipe with a maximumSDR (standard dimension ratio) of 11.5.C. Fittings: IPS (iron pipe size) polyethylene fittings suitable for heat fusion bonding.1. Piping Fusion Bonded Out of Trench:a. 3/4-inch to 3-inch: ASTM D2683-95. Socket fusion type.b. 4-inch and larger: ASTM D3261-96. Butt fusion type.2. Piping Fusion Bonded in Trench:15360-2PROPANE GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

a. 1/2-inch to 6-inch: Socket fusion type with integral heating coils. Joining of pipeand fittings by electrofusion shall be accomplished with the fitting manufacturer'sheating coil control box. Uponor Aldyl EF2000, or approved equal.2 .2 ABOVEGROUND GAS PIPE AND FITTINGSA. Piping: ASTM A53-96. Type E or S, Schedule 40 black steel pipe.B. Fittings: ANSI B16.3-85. Class 150, threaded malleable iron. Cast iron fittings shall not be used.C. Unions: ANSI B16.39-86. Class 150, threaded malleable iron, ground seat, bronze-to-iron.D. Flexible Piping Connectors: Convoluted stainless steel inner pipe with braided stainless steelcover, end connections to match connected pipe or pipe fittings, 350 psig working pressure, 18-inch minimum length, suitable for LP-gas service.E. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Section 15050.2 .3 GAS SERVICE AND TRANSITION RISERSA. Anodeless type with polyethylene gas carrier pipe and fusion-bonded epoxy coated steel jacketpipe. Aboveground end of transition riser shall be threaded. Vertical and horizontal legdimensions shall be as necessary to meet depth-of-cover requirements. Size to match connectingpiping. ASR, by Uponor Aldyl Co., Shawnee, Oklahoma 74801, or approved equal.2 .4 ABOVEGROUND VALVESA. Gas Cocks (Building Service Shutoff and Purge Valves): Tamperproof lubricated plug valves,with cast iron bodies, bronze keys, O-ring seals, threaded ends, and lockwings. Valves shall becapable of being relubricated under pressure and shall suitable for pressures up to 175 psig.Luboseal Meter Valve, Catalog Number H-11175, by Mueller Company, Division of TycoInternational, Ltd., Decatur, Illinois 62525, or approved equal.B. Ball Valves: UL listed, 150-psi SWP saturated, 250-psi L.P. gas, 600-psi non-shock WOG, twopiecebronze body, conventional port, bronze trim, chrome plated ball, reinforced TFE seats andstem seal, adjustable gland packing, blowout-proof stem, threaded ends. FS WW-V-35C, Type II,Composition BZ, Style 3. "LP-Gas Apollo" 80-100 Series, by Conbraco Industries, Inc.,Matthews, North Carolina 28105, or approved equal.C. Earthquake Valves: UL listed earthquake actuated shutoff valves conforming to CaliforniaStandard 12-23-1 and ANSI Z21.70-81, with aluminum body, stainless steel actuation ball, bubblelevel, manual reset lever, threaded ends, suitable for mounting in vertical pipe risers and operationat -40 o F to 150 o F ambient temperature. The valves shall actuate to shut off gas flow within 5seconds when subjected to a horizontal, sinusoidal oscillation having a peak acceleration of 0.3G(2.94 m/s 2 ) and a period of 0.4 seconds. To prevent false trips the valves shall not actuate whensubjected for 5 seconds to horizontal, sinusoidal oscillations having a peak acceleration of 0.4G(3.94 m/s 2 ) with a period of 0.1 second; a peak acceleration 0.2G (1.97 m/s 2 ) with a period of 0.4second; or a peak acceleration of 0.2G (1.97 m/s 2 ) with a period of 1.0 second. Model STQ, byEarthquake Valve Company, Van Nuys, California 91406, or approved equal.1. 3/4-inch to 1-1/4-inch: Flow capacity shall be 1,100,000 BTU per hour at 14 inches watercolumn inlet pressure for 0.60 specific gravity gas (700,000 BTU per hour for propane),with a maximum allowable working pressure of 25 psig.15360-3PROPANE GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

2. 1-1/2-inch to 2-inch: Flow capacity shall be 7,500,000 BTU per hour at 14 inches watercolumn inlet pressure for 0.60 specific gravity gas (4,760,000 BTU per hour for propane),with a maximum allowable working pressure of 60 psig.2 .5 UNDERGROUND VALVESA. Valves: Valves shall be tested in accordance with ASME B16.40-85. Valve body material shallbe PE 2406 to match piping, and stub end SDR (standard dimension ratio) shall be the same asconnecting piping. Polyvalve Ball Valves, by Nordstrom Valves, Inc. (division of BTR, Inc.),Sulphur Springs, Texas, or approved equal.1. 3/4-inch to 1-1/4-inch: Two-piece molded fusion-bonded polyethylene body, with acetalball, Buna-N seats and stem seals, stainless steel blowout-proof stem, groundwater sealunder 2-inch square stem adapter, and pipe stub ends suitable for butt or socket fusionjoints.2. 2-inch to 6-inch: Three-piece molded fusion-bonded polyethylene body, withpolypropylene ball, Buna-N seats and stem seals, plastic blowout-proof stem, groundwaterseal under 2-inch square stem adapter, and pipe stub ends suitable for butt or socket fusionjoints.B. Valve Boxes: Adjustable plastic roadway valve box, with screw-type bury depth adjustment, 5-1/4-inch nominal diameter. 5-1/4-inch Roadway Valve Box, by Ametek, Inc., Plymouth ProductsDivision, Sheboygan, Wisconsin 53082, or approved equal.1. Bottom Section: Bottom section shall be constructed of a rigid combination of polyolefin,fibrous inorganic reinforcement, and stabilizer additives to provide resistance to materialdegradation from ultraviolet light. Bottom section shall have a bell with inside dimensionsof 9-inch diameter x 7-1/2-inch high, suitable for 2-inch through 10-inch valves.2. Top Section: Top section shall be constructed of a ferrous metal impregnatedthermoplastic material suitable for detection with a magnetic metal detector.3. Roadway Ring and Cover: Traffic-rated cast iron top ring with full flange and cast irontraffic cover. Cover shall have the letters "GAS" cast into the cover surface.2 .6 PROPANE GAS REGULATORSA. Propane gas regulators shall comply with UL 144-94.B. Building Service (Secondary) Regulators: Adjustable diaphragm type, with 3/4-inch NPT springcase vent, integral high-capacity relief valve, straight pattern body, 360-degree union ring betweenbody and casing, threaded inlet and outlet on body, and 7 to 15 inches water column outletpressure adjustment range. Propane vapor capacity shall be 2,000,000 BTU per hour and outletpressure shall be factory set at 11 inches water column. Type S102C, by Fisher Controls International,Inc., McKinney, Texas, or approved equal.2 .7 METERSA. Positive displacement diaphragm type, with die-cast aluminum alloy case, molded bellows typediaphragm, reinforced flag rod, upper and lower flag rod bearings, insulated union topconnections, and digital index. Provide with appropriate meter unions on inlet and outlet.American Meter Company, Horsham, Pennsylvania 19044, or approved equal.15360-4PROPANE GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

1. Flow capacity shall be 425 CFH at 1/2-inch water column differential for 0.6 specificgravity gas at standard conditions (270 CFH for propane), with maximum workingpressure of 10 psig. Type AL-425, or approved equal.2 .8 BEDDING AND BACKFILLA. Section 02320.2 .9 UTILITY LINE MARKERSA. Section 02502.2 .10 TRACER WIREA. Minimum 12 AWG copper wire.2 .11 CONCRETEA. Section 03300.2 .12 PAINTINGA. Section 09901.B. Paint Color:1. Exterior Piping: Finish paint color for exterior gas piping shall match the adjacent buildingsurfaces. Contracting Officer shall select and approve finish paint color.2. Interior Piping: Interior gas piping finish paint color shall be Safety Yellow.2 .13 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTSA. Section 15050.2 .14 PIPE SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONSA. Section 15050.2 .15 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATIONA. Section 15075.PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 GENERALA. Install all propane gas system piping and appurtenances in accordance with the recommendationsof the manufacturer, as required by 1994 UPC, NFPA 54-92, NFPA 58-95, ASTM D2774-94, andas shown on the drawings. Propane gas system piping and appurtenances shall be installed inconformance with the installation and service guidebook prepared by the National Propane GasAssociation (NPGA).15360-5PROPANE GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

3 .2 PIPE INSTALLATIONA. Clean all pipe before installation. Remove all internal debris. Ream and deburr all pipe ends aftercutting. For threaded pipe, cut threads with dimensions in accordance with ANSI B1.20.1-83.B. For threaded joints, apply noncorrosive, nonhardening teflon pipe thread compound or teflon tapeto male threads only.C. Keep openings in pipe closed during construction to prevent entrance of foreign matter.D. Provide aboveground piping with unions where shown and as necessary to permit alterations andrepairs.E. Install exposed gas piping parallel with building walls or structure. The lower end of all verticalsupply piping near burners shall terminate with a tee, nipple, and cap to serve as a scale trap (dirtleg).F. Install gas piping and accessories in accordance with the recommendations and requirements ofNFPA 54-96, NFPA 58-95, ASTM D2774-94, the local propane gas supply company, and inaccordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Heat fusion bonded joints in plastic pipingshall be made by certified personnel only.G. Polyethylene pipe shall be used for underground gas distribution piping; butt fusion connectionsand fusion connections between polyethylene pipe and socket fittings shall be made in strictaccordance with piping and/or pipe fitting manufacturer's instructions; threaded or compressiontype connections will not be allowed.H. Minimum cold bending radius for polyethylene pipe shall be 25 times the outside diameter of thepipe. If fittings are present in the bend, the minimum cold bending radius shall be 125 times theoutside diameter of the pipe.I. A minimum 12 AWG copper tracer wire shall be installed with and attached to all undergroundplastic piping. Attachment of the wire to the pipe shall be made with plastic tie-wraps or otherapproved method. Tracer wires shall be interconnected by soldering them together where theymeet at each piping intersection and shall terminate at each pipe end. Attach tracer wire to end-oflinemarker post center rods at each gas pipe end point.J. Flexible Piping Connectors: Install specified flexible connectors at gas equipment pipingconnections to compensate for movement, settling, and vibration.3 .3 UNDERGROUND VALVE AND VALVE BOX INSTALLATIONA. Install in conformance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Valve boxes shall beadequately supported against settlement so that no forces from the valve box can be transmitted tothe valve or connecting piping. Install valve boxes as detailed on the drawings for roadway andnon-traffic areas.3 .4 METERS AND REGULATORSA. Install meters and regulators where shown on the drawings. Provide additional bracing asnecessary to support meters and regulators. Regulators shall be mounted in the gas riser as shownwith the vent pointing down. Field adjust regulator pressure settings as necessary for proper15360-6PROPANE GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

system performance. Provide bollards around meters and regulators as shown to protect themfrom vehicular damage.3 .5 LEAK TESTINGA. Underground Piping:1. Test with compressed air (oil free) or nitrogen gas only.2. Pipe shall be anchored by partial backfilling to prevent movement during leak testing. Alljoints and fittings shall remain exposed to facilitate inspection for joint leakage.3. Piping system shall stand a pressure of 50 psig for a period of not less than 1 hour withoutshowing any drop in pressure. Leak test shall not exceed 3 hours. Pressure shall bemeasured with a pressure gauge or an equivalent device, calibrated to be read in incrementsnot greater than 1/2 pound per square inch. All sources of gas pressure shall be isolatedbefore the pressure tests are made.4. Before turning on sources of gas pressure, close all openings from which gas can escape.5. Correct leaks by remaking joints with new materials; makeshift remedies will not bepermitted.B. Aboveground Piping:1. Test with compressed air (oil free) or nitrogen gas only.2. Before gas burning appliances are connected, piping systems shall stand a pressure of 50psig for a period of not less than 1 hour without showing any drop in pressure. Pressureshall be measured with a pressure gauge or an equivalent device, calibrated to be read inincrements not greater than 1/2 pound per square inch. All sources of gas pressure shall beisolated before the pressure tests are made. All devices which may be damaged by the testpressure shall be isolated from the piping system being tested.3. Before turning on gas, close all openings from which gas can escape. Immediately afterturning on the gas, check piping system again by the following method.a. Immediately prior to the test, determine that meters are in operating condition andhave not been bypassed.b. Carefully watch test dial of meter to determine whether gas is passing through meter.To assist in observing any movement of the test hand, wet a small piece of paperand paste its edge directly over the centerline of the hand as soon as the gas is turnedon. Allow 5 minutes for a 1/2-foot dial and proportionately longer for a larger dial inchecking for gas flow. This observation should be made with the test hand on theupstroke.c. If test hand does not move, purge piping, turn gas on and light a small gas burner,and observe test dial again. If the dial hand moves, the meter is operating properly.If dial hand does not move or register flow of gas through the meter to the smallburner, the meter is defective. The gas supply shall be shut off and the meter shall bereplaced.15360-7PROPANE GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

d. If the meter test hand moves, examine all appliances or outlets supplied through thesystem. If they are shut off and not leaking, there is a leak in the piping system. Theleakage shall be located with an approved combustible gas detector, soap and watersolution, or an equivalent non- flammable solution. Matches, open flames, or othermethods which could provide a source of ignition shall not be used. Piping shall berinsed thoroughly with water, if leak-test solutions are used, to avoid corrosion orstress cracking. Shut the gas supply off until repairs have been made, then repeattest.4. Correct leaks by remaking joints with new materials; makeshift remedies will not bepermitted.3 .6 PURGINGA. After piping has been checked and tested, fully purge all gas piping In accordance with NFPA 54and NFPA 58. Do not purge piping into the combustion chamber of an appliance.A. Do not purge open end of piping systems into confined spaces or areas where there are sources ofignition, unless space is adequately ventilated, purging rate is controlled, and all hazardousconditions are eliminated.3 .7 BEDDING AND BACKFILLINGA. Section 02320.3 .8 UTILITY LINE MARKINGA. Section 02502.3 .9 PAINTINGA. All aboveground gas piping shall be field painted in accordance with section 09901.B. Items that shall not be field painted include the following:1. Valves2. Regulators3. Meters4. Flexible piping connectors3 .10 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTSA. Section 15050.3 .11 PIPE SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONSA. Section 15050.3 .12 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATIONA. Section 15075.15360-8PROPANE GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

PART 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT4 .1 PROPANE GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMA. Payment will be included in the bid item to which this work relates.END OF SECTION15360-9PROPANE GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

SECTION 15400PLUMBING SYSTEMSPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing drain, waste, vent, and sanitary sewersystem; and domestic cold water supply systems.1 .2 RELATED WORKA. Mechanical identification - Section 15075.B. Mechanical insulation - Section 15080.1 .3 SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01330.B. Submit manufacturer's data for the following:1. Pipe.2. Fittings.3. Joining material.4. Valves.5. Water meter.6. Hose bibs.7. Cleanouts.1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Meet requirements of International Plumbing Code and ASME B31.9.1 .5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01770.B. Operation and maintenance data for review and approval as required by Section 01785.1. Furnish manufacturer’s operation and maintenance data for the following:a. Valves.b. Water meter.15400-1PLUMBING SYSTEMS

c. Hose bibs.C. Valve schedule for all plumbing valves. For each valve, list valve designation number, valve type,size, location, and function.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 SOIL, WASTE, CONDENSATE DRAIN AND VENT PIPE AND FITTINGS, ABOVEGROUNDA. Copper Pipe: ASTM B306, copper drainage tubing (DWV).2 .2 VALVES1. Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper, or ASME B16.29 wrought copper.2. Joining Material: ASTM B32, alloy Sn95 or Sn94 lead free solder.A. Ball Valves, 4-inch and Smaller: Class 150, 600 psi, ASTM B584 bronze body and bonnet, twopiececonstruction, chrome-plated brass ball, conventional port, bronze or brass stem; Teflon seatsand seals; threaded or soldered end connections, vinyl-covered steel lever handle and handlememory stop.2 .3 WATER METERA. AWWA C700, consisting of cast bronze meter housing, thermoplastic measuring chamber,permanently sealed register, thermoplastic nutating disc, and built-in strainer. 80 degrees F.maximum operating temperature and 150 psi maximum operating pressure. Typical operatingrange 5 psig pressure loss at 20 gpm flow. Model 400 Series IIS, by Hersey Products, MuellerCo., Decatur IL, or approved equal.2 .4 DOMESTIC WATER ACCESSORIESA. Unions: ASME B16.22, wrought copper solder joint, ground seat.B. Dielectric Connections: Fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals.Epco Sales, Inc., Cleveland, OH, or approved equal.1. Unions: Rated for 250 psig minimum working pressure at 180 degrees F. temperature.2. Flanges: 150 psig minimum working pressure, with bolt insulators, dielectric gasket, bolts,and nuts.2 .5 HOSE BIBBSA. Bronze body, rough brass finish, with renewable composition disc, 1/2 inch or 3/4 inch threadedor solder joint inlet. ASME B1.20.7 garden hose threads on outlet and field-installed hoseconnection vacuum breaker.2 .6 CLEANOUTSA. Exposed Piping: Cast iron cleanout tee with bronze plug or cleanout ferrule and bronze plug.Series 58510 or 58900, by Josam Manufacturing Company, Michigan City, IN, or approved equal.15400-2PLUMBING SYSTEMS

2 .7 PIPE SLEEVESA. As specified in Section 15050.2 .8 ESCUTCHEONSA. As specified in Section 15050.2 .9 HANGERS, ANCHORS, AND GUIDESA. As specified in Section 15050.2 .10 IDENTIFICATIONA. As specified in Section 15075.2 .11 INSULATIONA. As specified in Section 15080.PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 GENERALA. Install materials and equipment as shown and specified in accordance with governing codes andstandards.B. Rough in work as construction progresses to minimize cutting, eliminating interference.C. Locate equipment requiring service and maintenance in fully accessible positions. Install accessdoors for this purpose if required.D. Runs and arrangement of piping shall be as shown, subject only to such changes andmodifications as may be necessary to suit actual conditions at building, to avoid interference orconflict with work of other trades. Install piping concealed in floor or in wall construction orexcavations to prevent delay to other work and to allow ample time for necessary tests andapprovals.E. Carefully check installations against structural, architectural, and mechanical drawings and notewhere walls, ceilings, beams, and pipe shafts are furred or enclosed. Piping shall not be furred inor covered before approval by the Contracting Officer.F. Support horizontal piping runs from ceilings or construction above. Locate as closely as possibleto structural members or bottom of slabs or beams to obtain maximum head room. If pipinginterferes with finished ceiling or wall surfaces, notify Contracting Officer and correctunsatisfactory conditions.G. Waste, water, and other services shall be fully connected to each individual piece of apparatuswith required piping, unions, flanges, valves, check valves, and other needed appurtenances.H. Each branch pipe shall be controlled by gate valve where it connects to supply main or riser. Eachroom, group of fixtures, or isolated fixture shall be separately controlled by valves in accessiblelocation and provided with access doors where necessary.15400-3PLUMBING SYSTEMS

I. Install swing joints or expansion loops to allow for pipe expansion. Securely anchor pipes soexpansion can occur at these joints.J. Make joints between dissimilar piping by dielectric unions or flanges.K. Use reducing fittings wherever a change in pipe size occurs. The use of bushings will not bepermitted.L. Provide piping with unions to permit alterations and repairs.3 .2 VALVESA. Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a melting point below 840 degrees Ffor gate, globe, and check valves; below 421 degrees F for ball valves.B. Provide extended stems where insulation is specified.C. Valves shall be same size as upstream piping, unless otherwise shown.D. Drain valves shall be 1/2-inch globe type valves with capped male hose nipples. Install low pointdrains in cold and hot water systems.3 .3 INSTALLATION OF SANITARY SYSTEMA. Pitch sanitary pipe within building minimum of 2 percent downward for piping 3 inches andsmaller and 1 percent downward for piping 4 inches and larger. Make changes in direction ofdrainage lines with 45-degree wyes, long turn wyes, or sweep bends. Use long turn fittingswherever space conditions permit. Provide waterproofing around all lines penetrating throughfoundation walls and floor slabs.B. Check and verify all inverts of lines within and outside the building.C. Install traps on fixtures and equipment requiring connection to sanitary system. Traps shall besame size as pipe on which they occur. Provide cleanouts for all traps. Vent traps as shown andas required by local codes.D. Run condensate drain piping as shown and terminate as an indirect waste with 2-inch air gap.E. Cleanouts:1. Size same as drainage piping. Install cleanouts at each change in direction of pipinggreater than 45 degrees. Install cleanouts at base of each stack and each change indirection. Install cleanouts on minimum of 50-foot centers at horizontal runs.2. Cleaning screws, deckplates, and other plugs shall be made up with graphite and oil only;use of grease or cement is not allowed.3 .4 INSTALLATION OF WATER SYSTEMA. Install piping with 0.25 percent slope toward drain.B. Conceal water piping in finished areas.3 .5 HANGERS, ANCHORS, GUIDES15400-4PLUMBING SYSTEMS

A. As specified in Section 15050.3 .6 PIPE IDENTIFICATIONA. As specified in Section 15075.3 .7 INSULATIONA. As specified in Section 15080.3 .8 FLUSHING AND CLEANINGA. Flush and clean sanitary lines and remove water and debris before final connection into existingwaste lines.3 .9 DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEMA. Disinfect all water piping and equipment upon completion of piping installation. Followingdisinfection, flush water from system through its extremities. Continue flushing until samplesshow quality is comparable with public water supply and complies with requirements of publichealth authority having jurisdiction.3 .10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Notify Contracting Officer at least 48 hours before testing. Perform tests in presence ofContracting Officer.B. Rough-In Inspection: Piping shall be inspected before concealing or closing-in after rough-in andbefore setting fixtures.C. Final Inspection:1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered,extended, or repaired.2. Submit test report for each test.3. Test drain, waste, and vent piping on completion of rough-in. Close openings in pipingsystem and fill with water to point of overflow but not less than 10 feet of head. Waterlevel must not drop from 15 minutes before inspection starts through completion ofinspection. Correct leaks and retest system.4. Cap domestic water piping and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig aboveoperating pressures or 150 psig maximum without exceeding pressure rating of pipingsystem materials. Allow to stand for 4 hours. Correct leaks and loss in pressure and retestsystem.PART 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT4 .1 PLUMBING SYSTEMSA. Payment will be included in the bid item to which this work relates.END OF SECTION15400-5PLUMBING SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONSECTION 15480PROPANE GAS STORAGE SYSTEM AND APPURTENANCESA. The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing a propane gas storage tank, tankfoundation, primary gas regulators, valves, piping, cathodic protection, transport unloadingbulkhead, and all propane gas system specialties and accessories necessary for a complete andoperable propane gas storage system.1 .2 DEFINITIONA. Bedding and backfill material types (BD, SB, BF) are defined in Section 02320.1 .3 RELATED WORKA. Cast-In-Place Concrete - Section 03300.B. General mechanical provisions - Section 15010.C. Basic materials and methods - Section 15050.D. Propane gas distribution piping - Section 15360.1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. All work performed under this section shall meet all requirements of 1997 Uniform Building Code(UBC); 1994 IAPMO Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC); NFPA 54-96; NFPA 58-95; Code ofFederal Regulations (CFR) Title 49 (Part 192); California Title 8, Division 1, Chapter 4; and allother applicable national, state, local, and propane gas supplier standards and regulations.B. Installer for the propane gas storage system shall be regularly engaged in the design andinstallation of LP-gas systems, shall have had successful installation experience on projects withliquefied petroleum gas systems work similar to that required for this project, and shall employpersonnel experienced and skilled in the LP-gas trade.C. Welding: Perform welding of pressure piping systems in accordance with provisions of allapplicable codes, including ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, 1983, and ANSI/ASME B31Series, Code for Pressure Piping. Qualify welding procedures, welders, and operators inaccordance with ANSI/ASME B31.1-83, Paragraph 127.5, for shop and project site welding ofpiping work. The performance qualifications of a welder or welding operator shall be affectedunder the following conditions:1. When they have not welded with a process during a period of three months or more, theirqualifications for that process shall be expired; except when they are welding with anotherprocess, the period may be extended to six months.2. When they have not welded with any process during a period of three months, all theirqualifications shall be expired including any which may extend beyond three months byvirtue of the above.15480-1PROPANE GAS STORAGE SYSTEM AND APPURTENANCES

3. Welders whose qualifications have lapsed shall be requalified.1 .5 PROTECTIONA. Cap all openings in pipes, valves, tanks, and equipment to protect against entry of foreign matteras work progresses.1 .6 PERMITSA. Contractor shall apply for and obtain all required state and local permits for the work to beperformed under this section.1 .7 SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01330.B. Submit documentation and references regarding successful installation experience on propane gassystem projects.C. Submit a complete schedule of the materials and equipment to be provided. Includemanufacturer's literature on storage tank, tank fittings, pneumatic control system components,regulators, lp-gas dispenser, pipe and pipe fittings, valves, fire extinguishers, and flexible connectors.D. Submit detailed shop drawings showing layout of all system components and piping, includingelectrical work. Show locations and sizes of magnesium anodes for underground steel pipecathodic protection. Provide detail drawings for transport unloading bulkhead, tank foundations,retaining walls, and aboveground pipe supports. Detail drawings shall include reinforcing steelshop drawings showing reinforcing steel layouts, sizing, spacing, etc.E. Submit copies of proposed drawing for instruction panel.F. Submit design information for underground steel piping cathodic protection system. Submittalshall include manufacturer's literature for cathodic protection and monitoring components, anddesign parameters such as pipe coating efficiency, soil resistivity, soil pH, and redox potential.Cathodic protection system shall be designed for a 30 year minimum service life and the design ofthe system shall conform to National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE) RecommendedPractice RP0169-96.G. Submit calculations for tank foundation design.1. Design loads are based on 1997 UBC requirements.2. Live Loads - Vertical:a. Snow - 20 PSF3. Live Loads - Lateral:a. Seismic Zone 4b. Wind Loading - 80 MPH, Exposure B15480-2PROPANE GAS STORAGE SYSTEM AND APPURTENANCES

4. Foundation Design: The tank foundation shall be a spread footing foundation, founded atleast 36 inches below the lowest adjacent finished grade. Allowable soil bearing pressure forfootings bearing on undisturbed soil or soil compacted to 95 percent of maximum density is1,000 PSF for dead loads,1,500 PSF for dead plus live loads, and 2,000 PSF for all loadsincluding wind or seismic. Footings shall be designed with adequate reinforcement toprovide structural continuity and to permit spanning of local irregularities. Foundationpiers shall be formed to fit the tank contour.H. Submit calculations for retaining wall design. Retaining walls may be designed in accordancewith 1992 CRSI Handbook, Chapter 14 for Class A soil and level backfill.I. Submit finish paint color samples. Finish paint color shall be selected and approved by theContracting Officer.1 .8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01770.B. Operation and maintenance data for review and approval as required by Section 01785.1. Furnish manufacturer's operation and maintenance data for inline valves and fittings, tankfittings, storage tanks, pneumatic actuators, regulators, lp-gas dispenser, internal valves,emergency shutoff valves, relief valves, gauges, nitrogen cylinders and accessories, andfire extinguishers.2. Furnish copies of the instruction panel drawing.3. Furnish as-built drawings of mechanical and electrical systems, and furnish sequence ofoperation descriptions for controls.4. Furnish final bill of materials.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 ABOVEGROUND PIPE AND FITTINGSA. Piping Downstream of Primary Regulators:1. Piping: ASTM A53-96. Type E or S, Grade B, Schedule 40 black steel pipe.2. Fittings: Cast iron fittings shall not be used.a. Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3-85. Class 150, threaded malleable iron.b. Welding Fittings: ASTM A234-96. Schedule 40, seamless wrought carbon steelwelding fittings.c. Flanged Fittings:1) Flanges: ASME B16.5-96. 150 pound flange, forged steel welding neckfittings.15480-3PROPANE GAS STORAGE SYSTEM AND APPURTENANCES

2) Gaskets: ASME B16.21-92. Gaskets shall be suitable for 150 pound pressureclass LP-gas service.3. Unions: ANSI B16.39-86. Class 150, threaded malleable iron, ground seat, bronze-toiron.B. Piping Exposed to Tank Pressure:1. Piping: ASTM A53-96. Type E or S, Grade B, Schedule 80 black steel pipe.2. Fittings: Cast iron fittings shall not be used.a. Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.11-96. 2,000 pound, threaded forged steel.b. Welding Fittings: ASME B16.11-96. 3,000 pound, socket welding forged steel.c. Flanged Fittings:1) Flanges: ASME B16.5-96. 300 pound flange, forged steel welding neckfittings.2) Gaskets: Gaskets shall be suitable for 300 pound pressure class LP-gasservice.3. Unions: 3,000 pound forged steel AAR unions, with threaded or socket welding endconnections.C. Flexible Piping Connectors: Convoluted stainless steel inner pipe with braided stainless steelcover, end connections to match connected pipe or pipe fittings, 350 psig working pressure, 18-inch minimum length, suitable for LP-gas service.2 .2 UNDERGROUND PIPE AND FITTINGSA. Piping Downstream of Primary Regulators: Section 15360.B. Piping Exposed to Tank Pressure:1. Piping: ASTM A53-96. Type E or S, Grade B, Schedule 80 black steel pipe with extrudedhigh density polyethylene coating conforming to ASTM D1505-96. Pipe shall be steelshot or grit blast cleaned to SSPC-SP-6 and shall have an adhesive undercoating appliedbefore polyethylene coating extrusion.2. Fittings: ASME B16.11-96. 3,000 pound, socket welding forged steel.3. Fittings and welds shall be covered with heat-shrink polyethylene pipe sleeves, internallycoated with adhesive similar to that used for the piping, or shall be wrapped with hotappliedcoal tar tape. Fittings and welds shall be primed with a primer compatible with thehot-applied coal tar tape before the tape is applied.C. Cathodic Protection: Provide magnesium anodes in numbers and sizes as necessary to protectcoated underground steel piping based on actual soil resistivity at the site. Anode lead wires shallbe attached to piping with thermit welds. Weld sites shall be coated with coal tar mastic afterwelding.15480-4PROPANE GAS STORAGE SYSTEM AND APPURTENANCES

1. Anodes: Cast magnesium alloy, with galvanized steel core rod and 10 feet of 12 AWGsolid TW insulated lead wire. Anodes shall be prepackaged in a mixture of 75 percentgypsum, 20 percent bentonite, and 5 percent sodium sulphate, vibratory packed in a cottonbag around the anode. Harco Certified Cast Magnesium Anodes, by Harco Technologies,Corrpro Companies, Inc., Medina, Ohio 44258, or approved equal.2. Test Stations: Provide cathodic protection test stations for the purpose of testing pipelineto soil potentials as a means of determining cathodic protection system performance duringthe life of the piping system. Handley Industries, Inc., Jackson, Michigan 49203, orapproved equal.2 .3 PNEUMATIC CONTROL PIPING AND FITTINGSA. Rigid Piping:1. Piping: ASTM A269-96. Type 316, seamless, annealed stainless steel tubing, 0.035-inchwall thickness.2. Fittings: Type 316 stainless steel compression fittings. Swagelok Tube Fittings, bySwagelok Companies, Solon, Ohio 44139, or approved equal.B. Flexible Piping at Valve Actuators:1. Piping: Low density polyethylene tubing, black, with ultraviolet stabilizer. Provideminimum 18 inches of flexible control piping at each valve actuator connection and whereshown.2. Fittings: SAE J512-97. Brass compression fittings with 2030X tube support inserts forplastic tubing. Weatherhead Division of Dana Corporation, Maumee, Ohio 43537, orapproved equal.C. Flexible Piping at Nitrogen Tanks: High pressure hose, with stainless steel outer braid and teflonlining, 1/4-inch FNPT end fittings, 18 inches long.2 .4 DIELECTRIC UNIONSA. 1/2-inch to 2-inch: Forged steel, ground joint dielectric unions with high impact nylon insulators,threaded ends, 3,000 psi working pressure. Central Plastics Company, Shawnee, Oklahoma74801, or approved equal.2 .5 PROPANE STORAGE TANKA. Horizontal type, all-steel welded tank for non-corrosive service, fabricated to meet California Title8 specifications, with hemispherical end shells, lifting lugs, grounding lug, seismic restraintflanges, flanged manway, gauge guards, and wear plates welded to the tanks at the locationswhere the tanks are supported by the concrete foundation piers. Furnish tank with relief valvecouplings, level gauge couplings, 86-1/2 percent fixed liquid level tube and coupling,thermometer well, and piping connection couplings as shown on the drawings. Tank shall bemarked in accordance with NFPA 58-95 and shall be constructed in accordance with UL 644-86and Section VIII of the 1983 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for a minimum designpressure of 250 psi.15480-5PROPANE GAS STORAGE SYSTEM AND APPURTENANCES

B. Tank shall be grit-blasted, prime painted, and finish painted with manufacturer's standard whitefinish. Nominal tank water capacity shall be as shown on the drawings. Trinity Industries, Inc.,Dallas, Texas or approved equal.2 .6 PROPANE GAS REGULATORSA. Propane gas regulators shall comply with UL 144-94.B. Primary Regulators: High pressure, high capacity, self-operated type, with 1-inch FNPT inlet andoutlet on body, 1/2-inch orifice, and 10 to 20 psi outlet pressure adjustment range. Outlet pressureshall be factory set at 10 psig. Type 627, by Fisher Controls International, Inc., McKinney, Texas,or approved equal.C. Monitor Regulators: Same as primary regulators specified above, except with internal reliefvalve, and outlet pressure set at 12 psig. Fisher Type 627MR, or approved equal.2 .7 LP-GAS DISPENSER (BID ADDITIVE B)A. Packaged LP-gas dispenser, suitable for filling portable LP-gas cylinders. The LP-gas dispensershall consist of a pump and a meter, both housed within a cabinet, with a dispensing hose and allother valves, fittings, and accessories necessary for a complete and operable package.B. Pump: Pump shall be vane type, flange mounted, suitable for mounting directly to a standard C-face 1750 RPM motor with a flexible coupling. Pump shall have ball bearings, mechanical shaftseals, and an internal pressure relief/bypass valve. Pump motor shall be 1-1/2 horsepowerexplosion-proof with electrical characteristics as shown on the drawings. Model LGF1P, byBlackmer Pump Division of Dover Corporation, Grand Rapids, Michigan 49509, or approvedequal.C. Meter: Meter shall be positive displacement type, suitable for flowrates from 3 to 18 GPM, withaluminum case, backcheck valve and vapor eliminator on inlet, differential pressure valve onoutlet, hydrostatic relief valve, and 1-inch FNPT threaded steel companion flanges. Meter registershall be non-computing mechanical type with manual reset and non-resettable totalizers. Neptune1” Type 4D-MD, by Schlumberger Measurement Division, Greenwood, South Carolina 29646, orapproved equal.D. Power and Controls: Pump shall be controlled with an explosion-proof manual operating switchmounted inside the dispenser cabinet. All electrical components shall be suitable for Class I,Division 2, Group D locations.E. Cabinet: Heavy gauge steel cabinet, with baked on powder coat finish and ventilation louvers inthe lower part of the cabinet. Cabinet shall be weatherproof and shall be lockable to preventunauthorized access. Provision shall be made on the exterior of the cabinet for stowing thedispensing hose when it is not in use.F. Dispensing Hose: Lp-gas high pressure dispensing hose, rated at 350 psig maximum workingpressure. Dispensing hose shall be marked “LP GAS” every 10 feet on the exterior cover andshall be provided with a soft nose POL filler coupling, suitable for filling portable lp-gascontainers.2 .8 TRANSPORT UNLOADING BULKHEAD15480-6PROPANE GAS STORAGE SYSTEM AND APPURTENANCES

A. Bulkhead shall be fabricated from steel pipe, channel, or structural tube. Predictable shear pointsshall be provided for the piping that will be connected to the transport truck by welding forgedsteel pipe couplings into the horizontal bulkhead member. Provide bulkhead with a substantialconcrete foundation as shown on the drawings. Bulkhead and bulkhead foundation shall bedesigned and detailed as shown in the installation and service guidebooks prepared by theNational Propane Gas Association (NPGA).2 .9 PROPANE VALVES AND FITTINGSA. All valves and fittings shall be suitable for LP-gas service.B. Ball Valves: UL listed, 150-psi SWP saturated, 250-psi L.P. gas, 600-psi non-shock WOG, twopiecebronze body, conventional port, bronze trim, chrome plated ball, reinforced TFE seats andstem seal, adjustable gland packing, blowout-proof stem, threaded ends. FS WW-V-35C, Type II,Composition BZ, Style 3. "LP-Gas Apollo" 80-100 Series, by Conbraco Industries, Inc.,Matthews, North Carolina 28105, or approved equal.C. Globe Valves: 400-psi WOG, 150 degrees F maximum, straight pattern, ductile iron body, boltedbonnet, spring-loaded TFE chevron packing, synthetic rubber seat rings, threaded endconnections, with 1/4-inch FNPT plugged boss in the downstream side of the valve body. FisherControls International, Inc., McKinney, Texas 75069, or approved equal.1. 1/2-inch to 1-inch: Fisher Type N301 Series, or approved equal.2. 1-1/4-inch to 3-inch: Same as valve specified above, except with ball bearing valve discconstruction. Fisher Type N310 Series, or approved equal.3. 3-inch, Flanged: Same as 3-inch valve specified above, except with 300 pound flangedend connections. Fisher Type N310F-24, or approved equal.D. Angle Valves: 400-psi WOG, 150 degrees F maximum, angle pattern, ductile iron body, boltedbonnet, spring-loaded TFE chevron packing, synthetic rubber seat rings, with 1/4-inch FNPTplugged boss in the downstream side of the valve body. Fisher Controls International, Inc.,McKinney, Texas 75069, or approved equal.1. 1/2-inch to 1-inch: Fisher Type N401 Series, or approved equal.2. 1-1/4-inch to 3-inch: Same as valve specified above, except with ball bearing valve discconstruction. Fisher Type N410 Series, or approved equal.3. 3-inch, Flanged: Same as 3-inch valve specified above, except with 300 pound flangedend connections. Fisher Type N410F-24, or approved equal.E. Tank Relief Valves: Brass, semi-internal spring type, 2-inch MNPT x 3-inch FNPT, with start-todischargesetting of 275 psig, 12,392 SCFM U.L. air flow capacity, and weephole drain deflector.Fisher Type H280-275, or approved equal. Furnish each relief valve with relief stack, raincap,and pipeaway adapter.F. Hydrostatic Relief Valves: 1/4-inch MNPT connection, with start-to-discharge setting of 450psig. Fisher Type H124, or approved equal. Furnish each relief valve with raincap. Furnish reliefvalves with pipeaway adapters where discharge piping is connected.15480-7PROPANE GAS STORAGE SYSTEM AND APPURTENANCES

G. Internal Valves: 400-psi WOG, 150 degrees F maximum, straight pattern, ductile iron body,spring loaded TFE chevron packing, shear section, threaded end connections, suitable for use infull or half tank couplings. Fisher Type C427 Series, or approved equal.1. Pneumatic Actuator: Spring return type, with 20 to 125 psig operating pressure range.Fisher Type P326, or approved equal.H. Excess Flow Valves: Brass, internal type, suitable for use in inline piping, or in full or half tankcouplings. Fisher Type F100 Series, or approved equal.I. Emergency Vapor Shutoff Valve: High flow capacity emergency shutoff valve, with manualoperating lever, fusible element in hub of operating lever, and threaded ends. Fisher Type N550"Snappy Joe", or approved equal.1. Pneumatic Release Actuator: Pneumatic cylinder type, with 30 to 70 psig operatingpressure range. Fisher Type P327D, or approved equal.J. Backcheck Valve: Ductile iron body, with spring-loaded soft-seated swing check clapper,external flow indicator, threaded ends. Fisher Type G201 Series, or approved equal.K. Liquid Level Vent Valve: Steel body, with liquid level vent valve and 0 to 300 psig pressuregauge installed in 1/4-inch FNPT side tappings. Fisher Type J415-2, or approved equal.L. Rotary Gauge: Heavy duty type with dial and 1-inch MNPT tank connection. Gauge stem anddip tube shall be sized to fit tank supplied. Fisher Type J31L series, or approved equal.M. Float Gauge: End-mounting float type gauge, with gear action, 8-inch magnetically drivenhermetically sealed dial, stainless steel construction. Provide with forged steel tank mountingadapter and weatherguard. Stem and float rod lengths shall be suitable for the diameter of the tanksupplied. Magnetel Model No. P-6342-11, by Rochester Gauges, Inc., Dallas, Texas 75229, orapproved equal.N. Pressure Gauges (Downstream of Primary Regulators): Suitable for LP-gas service, 0 to 30 psigrange, with 1/4-inch MNPT bottom connection. Fisher Type J501, or approved equal.O. Strainers: Wye type, with removable 80 mesh stainless steel screen, flanged strainer opening withO-ring seal, threaded ends, designed for LP-gas service. Type W Series, by Smith PrecisionProducts Co., Newbury Park, California 91320, or approved equal.P. Fill Adapters:1. Liquid: Brass, 3-1/4-inch male ACME x 2-inch MNPT. Fisher Type M503-16, orapproved equal.a. Cap: Fisher Type M441 cap.b. Chain: Fisher Type P167 chain.2. Vapor: Brass, 1-3/4-inch male ACME x 1-1/4-inch MNPT. Fisher Type M217, orapproved equal.a. Cap: Fisher Type M229 cap.b. Chain: Fisher Type P148 chain.15480-8PROPANE GAS STORAGE SYSTEM AND APPURTENANCES

Q. Thermometer: LP-gas container thermometer, with 2-inch dial and 6-inch stem length. Rangeshall be -40 to 120 degrees F. Fisher Type J701, or approved equal.2 .10 PNEUMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM VALVESA. Manual Air Release Valves: 3-way diaphragm poppet type, with positive detent lever handleoperator, 1/4-inch FNPT connections, 0.250-inch orifice, and C v factor of 0.8. Valves shall befurnished with a base suitable for panel or bottom mounting. Model 250V-3-10-21, by HumphreyProducts Co., Kalamazoo, Michigan 49003, or approved equal.1. Transport Unloading Manual Air Release Isolation Valve: Air release valve shall bemounted in a 6"x 6"x 4" NEMA 3R enclosure with the lever operator exposed through thefront of the enclosure. The NEMA 3R enclosure shall be painted safety red. The valveshall be labeled "EMERGENCY VALVE SHUTOFF" with an engraved plastic label, redletters on white background.2. Emergency Shutdown Manual Air Release Valve: Air release valve shall be mounted inelectrical panel "PTF" with the lever operator exposed through the front of the panel. Anair release pipe shall be connected to the exhaust port of the valve and shall be routed tothe exterior of the panel. The valve shall be labeled "EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN" withan engraved plastic label, red letters on white background.3. Storage Tank Manual Air Release Isolation Valve: Air release valve shall be mounted in a6"x 6"x 4" NEMA 3R enclosure with the lever operator exposed through the front of theenclosure. The NEMA 3R enclosure shall be painted safety red. The valve shall belabeled "TANK VALVE SHUTOFF" with an engraved plastic label, red letters on whitebackground.B. Ball Valves: 400-psi non-shock WOG, two-piece bronze body, full port, brass trim, chromeplated ball, TFE seats, BUNA-N stem seal, blowout-proof stem, lever handle operator, and 1/4-inch MNPT x 1/4-inch FNPT ends. Number 78-267-01, by Conbraco Industries, Inc., Matthews,North Carolina 28106, or approved equal.2 .11 NITROGEN CYLINDERS AND ACCESSORIESA. Nitrogen Cylinders: 300 cubic foot capacity (Size HH), with 2,400 psig DOT pressure rating andservice valve with rupture disc, suitable for use with nitrogen. Provide nitrogen cylinders with afull charge of nitrogen in each cylinder.B. Nitrogen Pressure Regulators: Two-stage nitrogen gas regulator, with brass body and bonnet,stainless steel diaphragms, 0 to 4000 psi high pressure gauge, 0 to 200 psi low pressure gauge,CGA 580 inlet connection, 1/4-inch FNPT outlet connection, tee handle adjuster, and adjustablepressure range of 0 to 100 psig. Pressure regulators shall be set at 60 psig.C. Nitrogen Cylinder Cabinet: All steel construction, with 2-inch x 2-inch x 10 gauge steel tubeframe, 26 gauge steel paneling with baked enamel finish, and 20 gauge flush steel door. Doorshall be provided with heavy duty hinges, lockset, steel threshold, and weatherstripping. Nitrogencylinders shall be secured in the cabinet with seismic cylinder retainers, one for each cylinder.2 .12 PIPE SUPPORTS IN PROPANE STORAGE AREAA. Section 15050.15480-9PROPANE GAS STORAGE SYSTEM AND APPURTENANCES

B. Provide angle iron pipe supports as necessary to support aboveground LP-gas piping under 20PSF snow loading. Provide pipe supports with concrete pad foundations at grade.2 .13 FIRE EXTINGUISHERSA. Extinguishers: 20-pound dry chemical type conforming to NFPA 10-88, with all-steel redpolyester coated cylinder, metal valve assembly, pressure indicating gauge, and 20A:120B:C ULrating. Figure No. 3020, by Potter-Roemer, division of Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co., Cerritos,California 90703, or approved equal.B. Cabinets: 20-gauge steel surface mounted style, with white polyester coating, full flush steel doorwith identifying decal, continuous steel hinge, and appropriate hardware to mount the cabinets onchain-link fence posts. Potter-Roemer Figure No. 1756-F, or approved equal.2 .14 SIGNAGEA. Danger Signs: Signs shall be constructed of 0.040-inch thick aluminum (ALUM), with vinyl cladfinish, round corners with mounting holes, black letters on white background, OSHA "DANGER"heading, 20-inch by 14-inch overall dimensions. Sign shall read:PROPANENO SMOKINGWITHIN 50 FEETB. Provide signs at each location shown on the drawings. Style Number M5052, by Seton NamePlate Co., Branford, Connecticut 06405, or approved equal.C. Instruction Panel: Provide an instruction panel as shown and detailed on the drawings.Instruction panel shall show site plan, system schematic, and valve locations, and shall list LP-gassafety and operation instructions pertinent to this project.D. Pipe and Valve Identification: Section 15075.2 .15 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLA. Section 02318.2 .16 UTILITY BEDDING AND BACKFILLA. Section 02320.2 .17 UTILITY LINE MARKERSA. Section 02502.2 .18 CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATESA. Section 02831.2 .19 BOLLARDSA. Section 02855.2 .20 CONCRETE15480-10PROPANE GAS STORAGE SYSTEM AND APPURTENANCES

A. Section 03300.2 .21 PAINTA. Section 09901.B. Paint Color: Finish paint color shall be in the tan color range to match the adjacent buildings.Contracting Officer shall select and approve finish paint color.PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 GENERALA. Install propane liquid and gas (vapor) storage systems and equipment in conformance with theinstallation and service guidebooks prepared by the National Propane Gas Association (NPGA).Complete all work in compliance with NFPA 54-96 and NFPA 58-95.3 .2 STORAGE TANK INSTALLATIONA. Install tanks on concrete foundations as shown on the drawings with 1/2-inch insulating materialbetween the tank and the foundation piers. Anchor tanks to foundations using seismic restraintflanges attached to tanks. Provide internal valves or excess flow valves at all liquid connections toprevent escape of LP-gas in the event of piping damage or failure. Tanks shall be grounded asshown on the drawings. If tanks have been damaged during delivery, they shall not be installed;they shall be returned to the manufacturer and replaced with undamaged tanks at no additionalcost to the Government.3 .3 LP-GAS DISPENSER (BID ADDITIVE B)A. Lp-gas dispenser shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.Provide a concrete mounting pad for the lp-gas dispenser. Fasten base of lp-gas dispenser cabinetsecurely to the concrete pad with anchor bolts.3 .4 TRANSPORT UNLOADING BULKHEADA. Bulkhead shall be installed in accordance with approved shop drawings in the location shown onthe drawings. Connect pneumatic release operator for emergency shutoff valve to the pneumaticcontrol system as shown on the drawings.3 .5 PNEUMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM INSTALLATIONA. General: Install pneumatic control system as shown on the drawings. Pneumatic control valvesshall be mounted in enclosures or panels as specified. Provide supports with concrete padfoundations at grade for those valves or other pneumatic control system components that are notattached to bollards, mounted in other equipment, or mounted in other enclosures.B. Nitrogen Cylinders and Cabinet: Provide a concrete mounting pad for the nitrogen cylindercabinet. Fasten base of nitrogen cylinder cabinet securely to the concrete pad with anchor bolts.3 .6 PNEUMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONA. Emergency Shutdown Valves: During normal operation, pressurized nitrogen in the pneumaticcontrol system shall maintain the propane system valves with pneumatic actuators in the open15480-11PROPANE GAS STORAGE SYSTEM AND APPURTENANCES

position. All propane system valves shall close when any one of the emergency shutdown manualair release valves is operated. Return of the propane system to normal operation shall beaccomplished by returning all of the emergency shutdown valves to their normal positions.B. Isolation Valves:1. Storage Tank: Operation of the storage tank manual air release isolation valves shall closethe internal valves on the propane storage tank.2. Transport Unloading Bulkhead: Operation of the transport unloading manual air releaseisolation valve shall close the emergency vapor shutoff valve on the transport unloadingbulkhead.3 .7 PIPE INSTALLATIONA. Clean all pipe before installation. Remove all internal debris and scale. Ream all pipe ends aftercutting. For threaded pipe, cut threads in accordance with ANSI B1.20.1-83.B. For screwed joints, apply noncorrosive, nonhardening Teflon pipe thread compound or Teflontape to male threads only.C. For welded joints, welding shall be performed only by certified welders.D. Coat or cover all underground pipe joints, fittings, and connections with materials specified.E. Keep openings in pipe closed during construction to prevent entrance of foreign matter.F. Install gas piping and accessories in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 54-96, NFPA 58-95, and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.G. Provide piping with unions where shown and as necessary to permit alterations and repairs.H. Steel pipe shall be used for all piping connections between transport unloading bulkhead andstorage tanks, between storage tanks and pumping packages, and between pumping packages andvaporizers. All aboveground LP-gas piping shall be steel with malleable iron or forged steelfittings as specified. Underground piping shall be buried not less than 30 inches beneath finishedgrade.I. Underground Piping Downstream of Primary Regulators: Section 15360.3 .8 REGULATORSA. Install regulators where shown on the drawings. Provide piping supports as necessary to supportregulators. Field adjust regulator pressure settings as necessary for proper system performance.Monitor regulators shall be installed upstream of primary regulators with the control line of themonitor regulator connected downstream of the primary regulator such that the monitor regulatorswill stand wide open during normal operation. In the event of open failure of a primary regulator,the monitor regulator shall take control at its higher pressure setting.3 .9 VALVES AND ACCESSORIES INSTALLATIONA. Install in conformance with manufacturer's installation instructions, and the installation andservice guidebooks prepared by the National Propane Gas Association (NPGA).15480-12PROPANE GAS STORAGE SYSTEM AND APPURTENANCES

3 .10 LEAK TESTINGA. Piping Exposed to Tank Pressure:1. Test with air or inert gas only.2. Insert pressure gauges on all sections of piping to be tested. Piping system shall stand apressure of 250 psig for a period of not less than 1 hour without showing any drop inpressure.B. Piping Downstream of Primary Regulators: Coordinate with pressure testing specified in Section15360.1. Test with air or inert gas only.2. Insert pressure gauges on all sections of piping to be tested. Piping system shall stand apressure of 50 psig for a period of not less than 1 hour without showing any drop inpressure.C. If a pressure drop on a gauge is noted, all equipment or outlets connected to the piping shall beexamined to see if they are shut off and do not leak. If no leaks are found in any of these devices,there is a leak in the piping. Test pipe joints for leakage with soap and water solution. Makerepairs to piping, then repeat test.D. Correct leaks by remaking joints with new materials; makeshift remedies will not be permitted.3 .11 PURGINGA. Purging shall be performed in accordance with NFPA 54 and NFPA 58 and with the installationand service guidebooks prepared by the National Propane Gas Association (NPGA).B. After piping has been tested and before tanks are initially filled with propane, fully purge all airfrom propane storage tanks and piping.C. Do not purge open ends of piping systems into confined spaces or areas where there are sources ofignition, unless those spaces are adequately ventilated, purging rate is controlled, and allhazardous conditions are eliminated.3 .12 INITIAL TANK FILLA. Provide initial propane fill in propane storage tanks for system testing. All air in tanks shall bepurged before filling. Provide 2,700 gallons of propane in the tank (15 percent fill) for testing ofequipment.3 .13 PAINTINGA. All aboveground piping and equipment related to the propane system shall be field painted inaccordance with section 09901. Items to be painted shall include:1. Propane tank2. Nitrogen cylinder cabinet3. Transport unloading bulkhead15480-13PROPANE GAS STORAGE SYSTEM AND APPURTENANCES

4. Pipe supports5. Bollards (see Section 02855)6. All aboveground LP-gas pipingB. Items that shall not be field painted include the following:1. Tank and equipment identification plates2. Tank fittings, valves, valve actuators, and regulators3. Pneumatic control piping4. Flexible piping connectors3 .14 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATIONA. Identify all valves, piping, and controls in accordance with Section 15075.3 .15 START-UP/TRAININGA. As specified in Section 01815.B. Provide four hours of operating and maintenance instruction to Government personnel and otherswho will be responsible for operating the propane system. The Contracting Officer shall benotified at least 48 hours prior to proposed start-up or training, and the time chosen for the start-upand/or training shall be mutually agreeable.PART 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT4 .1 PROPANE GAS STORAGE SYSTEM AND APPURTENANCESA. Payment will be included in the bid item to which this work relates.END OF SECTION15480-14PROPANE GAS STORAGE SYSTEM AND APPURTENANCES

SECTION 15500HYDRONIC SYSTEMSPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing piping systems associated withheating and chilled water systems, complete with all appurtenances.1 .2 RELATED WORKA. Mechanical identification - Section 15075.B. Mechanical insulation - Section 15080.C. Boilers - Section 15510D. Plumbing Systems - Section 154001 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Comply with ASME B31.9-96 for materials, products, and installation.1 .4 SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01330.B. Submit manufacturer's product data for following:1. Pipe.2. Strainers.3. Balancing valves.4. Backflow preventers.5. Pressure gauges.6. Thermometers.7. Air separators.8. Chemical feeders.9. Expansion tanks.10. Valves.15500-1HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

11. Include scale range, ratings, calibration and performance curves. Submit meter and gaugeschedule showing manufacturer's figure number, scale range, location, and accessories.12. Valve submittal shall include body material, valve design pressure and temperatureclassification and dimensions.1 .5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01770.B. Manufacturer's operation and maintenance data for the following:1. Valves.2. Backflow Preventers.3. Strainers.4. Balancing Valves.5. Pressure Gauges.6. Thermometers.7. Air Separators.8. Expansion Tanks.9. Test Plugs.C. Valve schedule for all valves. For each valve list valve designation number, valve type, size,location, and function.D. Written report certifying leak testing.E. Chemical treatment certified test reports including initial and final values.F. Backflow preventer state certification test.G. Training: As specified in Section 01815. Furnish videotapes of hydronic system training.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 PIPING AND FITTINGSA. General: Working pressure and temperature maximums, 125 psi and 250 degrees F; water service.B. Copper Pipe: ASTM B88-96 copper tubing, hard drawn, type L.1. Fittings: ASME B16.22-95 wrought copper solder joint.2. Joining Material:15500-2HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

2 .2 VALVESa. Solder: ASTM B32-96, 95-5 Tin-Antimony solder for above ground lines.b. Brazing: AWS A5.8-92, Classification BAg 1 (silver) where copper pipe isconnected to brass.3. Unions: ASME B16.22-95. Wrought copper solder joint, ground seat.4. Flanges: Class 125 cast bronze flanges.a. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1-96, carbon steel square head machine bolts withgalvanized heavy hex nuts.b. Gaskets: ASME B16.21-92, nonmetallic, flat, 1/16-inch (2 mm), full faced, forwater service.5. Dielectric Unions: Threaded or soldered end connections for the pipe materials in whichinstalled. Constructed to isolate dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic action, and preventcorrosion.A. Gate Valves:1. 2-inch and smaller: Class 150, 300 psi ASTM B62-93 cast bronze body and union bonnet,solid bronze wedge, rising stem, integral seat, threaded ends, and aluminum or malleableironhandwheel.2. 2-1/2 inch and larger: Class 125, 200 psi, ASTM A126-95 cast-iron body and bonnet,solid cast-iron wedge, brass-alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, flanged end connectionsand cast-iron handwheel.B. Ball Valves: 2-inch and smaller: Class 150, 600-psi, ASTM B584-96 bronze body and bonnet,two-piece construction, chrome-plated brass ball, conventional port, bronze or brass stem, teflonseats and seals, threaded end connections, vinyl-covered steel handle and handle memory stop.C. Butterfly Valves: 2-1/2-inch and larger: 200 psi, ASTM A126-95 cast iron body and bonnet,stainless steel stem, field replaceable EPDM or Buna-N sleeve and stem seals, wafer, lug orgrooved style, nickel-plated ductile iron disc, lever operators with locks.D. Check Valves:1. Swing Check Valve: 2-1/2 Inch and Smaller: Class 150, 300-psi CWP, ASTM B62-93cast-bronze body and cap, horizontal swing, regrinding type, Y pattern, renewable bronzedisk. Threaded or soldered end connection.2. Wafer Check Valve: Class 125, 200-psi CWP, ASTM A126-95 cast iron body, bronzedisc/plates, stainless steel pins and springs, Buna N seals, installed between flanges.Valves designed to open and close at approximately one foot differential pressure.E. Balancing Valves: 125-psig working pressure, 250 degrees F maximum operating temperature,bronze body balance valves with connections for portable differential pressure meter. Meterconnections with integral check valves and seals, integral pointer and calibrated scale to registerdegree of valve opening. Threaded connections on valves 1-inch to 2-inches.15500-3HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

F. Safety Relief Valves: Brass or bronze body with brass and rubber, wetted, internal working parts.Valves designed, built, rated, and stamped in accordance with ASME Safety relief valves shallbe preset for 30 psi, non-adjustable, 3/4-inch inlet with 550,000 BTUH rating. Model 38B byAmtrol, West Warwick, RI, 02893 or approved equal.G. Automatic Fill Valve: Diaphragm operated, cast brass body, fill valve designed to maintain waterpressure in a closed water system. Valve shall include cleanable strainer, removable seatassembly, and built-in check valve. Valve shall have factory setting of 12 psig with fieldadjustment range of 10 to 25 psig . Maximum operating temperature shall be 225 degrees F.,maximum working pressure of 125 psig. Valve shall have 3/4-inch inlet and outlet. Model B7-12by ITT Bell and Gossett, Morton Grove, IL 660053; Model 11F by Amtrol, West Warwick, RI02893; or approved equal.H. Pressure Reducing Valve: ASSE 1003-93, water regulator, rated for initial working pressure of150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum, bronze body with threaded ends, integral factory-installed Y-pattern strainer, with adjustable reduced pressure range.2 .3 Backflow Preventer:A. Reduced Pressure: ASSE 1013-93 reduced pressure zone type backflow preventer suitable forcontinuous pressure applications. Include gate valves or ball valves on inlet and outlet, andstrainer on inlet, test cocks and pressure-differential relief valve with ASME A112.1.2-91 air-gapfitting located between 2 positive-seating check valves. Furnish with funnel drain.2 .4 PIPING ACCESSORIESA. Pressure Gauges: 3-1/2 inch dial, water service, bronze bourdon tube movement, cast aluminumcase, white face, black numbers, with gauge cock. Range at two times working pressure. Ametek,US Gauge Division, Sellersville, Pennsylvania, 18960 or approved equal.B. Thermometers:1. Red-reading tube, cast aluminum case, and separable sockets, including cap and chain.9-inch scales in mechanical equipment areas and on main piping; 7-inch scales in otherlocations. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 1 percent of range span. Vari-Angle by WeissInstruments, West Babylon, NY 11704 or approved equal.2. Ranges as follows:Heating WaterChilled Water30 to 300 degrees F30 to 100 degrees F1 degree divisions1 degree divisions3. For thermometers and wells through insulation, provide extensions to compensate forinsulation thickness.2 .5 Test Taps: Combination pressure and temperature test taps consisting of 1/4-inch or 1/2 inch nickelplated brass body MPT fitting designed to receive either temperature or pressure probe andgasketed and threaded cap with retention chain. Fittings shall be Pete's Plug, manufactured byPeterson Engineering Company, Richardson, Texas, or approved equal.A. Air Vents:15500-4HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

1. Manual: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts, 150 psig working pressure, 225degree F operating temperature. Vent manually operated with screwdriver or thumbscrew.Vent shall have 1/8-inch discharge connection and 1/2-inch inlet connection.2. Automatic: Float type vent designed to vent automatically; thermoplastic body andnonferrous internal parts. 90 psig working pressure, 212 degree F operating temperature.1/4 inch discharge connection and 1/8 inch threaded inlet connection. ModelEA122A1002, by Honeywell-Braukmann, Minneapolis MN, or approved equal.2 .6 EXPANSION LOOP GUIDESA. Factory fabricated cast steel, consisting of bolted two-section outer cylinder and base. Providetwo-section alignment guide spider that bolts tightly to pipe.2 .7 AIR SEPARATORA. In-Line Air Separator: Heavy duty cast iron air separator with top outlet connection for air ventand bottom connection for expansion tank. Separator shall have line size side inlet and outletconnection. American Air Purger by Amtrol, West Warwick, RI or approved equal.2 .8 DIAPHRAGM EXPANSION TANKA. Welded steel tank suitable for 75 psig working pressure at 240 degrees F maximum operatingtemperature. Air charge for expansion tank to be 15 psig. Separate air charge from system waterby means of a flexible diaphragm sealed into tank. Tank volume and acceptance volume asscheduled. Extrol by Amtrol, West Warwick, RI or approved equal.2 .9 CHEMICAL FEEDERSA. Bypass type chemical feeder of 5 gallon capacity, steel or cast iron construction, 125 psig workingpressure. Provide complete with fill funnel, shutoff valve, air release valve, and recirculatingshutoff valves on inlet, outlet, and drain valve.2 .10 STRAINERSA. Wye Pattern Strainers: 125-psig working pressure, cast-iron or bronze construction, completewith removable Type 304 stainless steel basket with minimum perforations of 1/8-inch diameter,and bottom drain connection. Sarco Company, Inc., Allentown, Pennsylvania 18105 or approvedequal.2 .11 CHEMICALSA. Chemicals shall be compatible with piping materials, seals, and accessories.B. System Cleaner: Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to removegrease and petroleum products.C. Closed System Chemicals: Sequestering agent to reduce deposits and adjust pH, corrosioninhibitors, and conductivity enhancers.15500-5HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 PIPE APPLICATIONSA. Copper Pipe:1. Install Type L copper pipe with wrought copper fittings and solder joints for above groundpiping.3 .2 PIPING INSTALLATION, GENERALA. Arrange piping in horizontal groups, each group to be in one plane. Maintain indicated slope.Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, mechanical rooms, above ceilings,below grade or floors.B. Install piping parallel to permanent elements of building. Provide space to permit insulationapplications, with 1-inch clearance outside insulation.C. Sloping, Air Venting, and Draining:1. Install piping true to line and grade, and free of traps and air pockets. Slope piping up indirection of flow at 0.2 percent grade.2. Provide eccentric reducers for changes in horizontal piping, top side flat.3. Connect branch piping to bottom of mains, except for up-feed risers which shall have takeoffsat top of main.4. Install manual air vents at high points in hydronic piping systems and at coils. Provide1/4-inch copper, 180-degree bend pipe to discharge vented water into can.5. Install automatic air vent on air separator. Provide valved inlet and discharge piped tofloor drain.6. Install drain valves with hose adapters at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines.Drain shall consist of tee fitting, 3/4-inch ball valve, and short 3/4-inch threaded nipple andcap. Provide drain valves for float type controllers.D. Fittings: Standard manufactured fittings. Field fabricated fittings and bushings are prohibited onall piping.E. Unions: Install unions in pipes 2-inch and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connections ofeach piece of equipment and elsewhere to permit alterations and repairs. Install dielectric unionsto join dissimilar metals. Unions are not required on flanged devices.F. Flanges: Install flanges on valves and equipment having 2-1/2 inch and larger connections.G. Pipe Ends: Cut pipe and prepare ends with full inside diameter. Deburr and size.H. Joints:1. Threaded Joints: Apply Teflon tape to male equipment threads. Do not use pipe withthreads which are corroded or damaged.15500-6HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

I. Keep openings in piping closed during construction to prevent entrance of foreign matter.3 .3 VALVESA. Field check valves for packing and lubricant. Determine disk is for service intended. Replaceleaking packing. Service valves with lubricant for smooth and proper operation before placing inservice.B. Install valves accessible from floor level. Locate valves for easy access. Install valves inhorizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. Install valves in position to allow full stemmovement. Provide operating handles for valves and cocks without integral operators.C. Provide extended valve stems where insulation is specified.D. Provide separate support where necessary.E. Provide valves same size as line size.F. Provide gate blowdown valves and hose adapters at strainers; same size as strainer blowoffconnection.G. Check Valves: Install wafer check valves on pump discharge. Install check valves for properdirection of flow as follows:1. Swing Check Valve: Horizontal position with hinge pin level.2. Wafer Check Valve: Horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.3 .4 BACKFLOW PREVENTERSA. Route pipe from air gap fitting or funnel drain at relief outlet to nearest floor drain.3 .5 EQUIPMENT PIPINGA. Provide combination balancing and shutoff valves to regulate water flow through piping, coils,and at other equipment and piping where shown or required for proportioning flow.B. Install automatic fill valve in cold water make-up to boiler. Install three valve bypass with globevalve around automatic fill valve for quick filling system. Install backflow preventer upstream offill valve and bypass. Install funnel drain below backflow preventer relief port and extend drainpiping to floor drain.3 .6 PRESSURE GAUGESA. Install pressure gauges in piping tees with isolation valve and in readable position.3 .7 THERMOMETERSA. Install with brass separable sockets of proper length to ensure accurate reading and extensionnecks to suit insulation thickness.15500-7HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

B. Install thermometer wells in vertical position in piping tees where thermometers are indicated.Install wells with stem extending to center of pipe. Extension necks shall suit insulation thickness.Fill wells with oil or graphite and secure caps.3 .8 PIPE EXPANSION GUIDES, AND ANCHORSA. Install piping with provisions for expansion and contraction using expansion offsets as indicated.Provide for expansion and contraction in mains, risers, and runouts.B. Install guides to properly direct pipe movement into expansion offsets.C. Install anchors to control movement in piping. Braze or clamp anchors to piping. Install pipeanchors at intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion offsets.D. Connect risers to mains with at least 5 pipe fittings including tee in main. Connect risers toterminal units with at least 4 pipe fittings including tee in riser.3 .9 STRAINERSA. Install strainers on supply side of inline pump and as indicated. Install nipple and ball valve inblow down connection of strainers 2-inch and larger.3 .10 EXPANSION TANK AND AIR SEPARATOR INSTALLATIONA. Install tanks as shown; locate appurtenances for easy servicing.B. Install gate valve and union on air separator drain to facilitate removal of strainer. Routedischarge on air separator to nearest drain.C. Check expansion tank after cleaning, testing, and filling of system to ensure system is completelyfull.D. Provide bracket supports, saddles, and hangers to support tanks.E. Install air separator level in both directions, supported from structure so that all pipe can beremoved without moving tank.F. Charge expansion tank with proper air charge before pressurizing water side of system.3 .11 CHEMICAL FEEDERA. Install feeder in upright position with top of funnel not more than 48-inches above floor. Pipedrain, with ball valve, to nearest equipment drain. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allowservicing and maintenance.3 .12 CLEANINGA. General: Ensure system is operational, filled, started, and vented prior to cleaning. Place terminalcontrol valves in open position during cleaning. Add cleaning chemicals as recommended bymanufacturer.B. Hot Water Heating System: Apply heat while circulating, slowly raising system to designtemperature; maintain for a minimum of 24 hours. Remove heat and allow to cool; drain and refill15500-8HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

with clean water. Circulate for 6 hours at design temperature, then drain. Refill with clean waterand repeat until system cleaner is removed.3 .13 CHEMICAL TREATMENTA. General: Test hydronic water systems twice, one week after system start-up and second test oneweek after first test. Test for total dissolved solids, inhibitors and hardness. Provide certified testreport for each test indicating initial findings, treatment required, and future recommendations.Chemical treatment shall contain no chromates and be bio-degradable. Provide water analysis todetermine the type and level of chemicals required for prevention of scale and corrosion.B. Chemical treatment shall treat raw water available at project site to sustain the following watercharacteristics:1. Hardness: 0.5 times the make-up water hardness2. Iron: 0.003. Total Dissolved Solids: 1500 to 2400 ppm (as CaCO3)4. Silica: 60 ppm or less5. pH: 9.6 to 10.53 .14 TESTINGA. Test piping systems using ambient temperature water, except where there is risk of damage due tofreezing.B. Release trapped air while filling system using vents at high points. Use drains installed at lowpoints for complete removal of liquid.C. Isolate equipment and parts that cannot withstand test pressures.D. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the designpressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or othercomponent in system under test.E. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, andconnections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components andrepeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.F. Prepare written report of testing, indicating locations of leaks corrected, method used to correctleaks, number of tests required, and certification that system is leak free.G. Test backflow preventers and submit state inspection and test certification report.3 .15 TRAININGA. As specified in Section 01815. Notify contracting officer at least 7 days before proposedinstruction, and arrange a mutually agreeable time. Provide 2 hours of instruction on hydronicsystems. Include following items as a minimum:15500-9HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

1. Location of automatic and manual air vents.2. Location of strainers and blow down valves.3. Location of safety and relief valves.4. System drain valves.5. System fill and associated devices.6. Expansion tank and air separator.PART 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT4 .1 HYDRONIC SYSTEMSA. Payment will be included in the bid item to which this work relates.END OF SECTION15500-10HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

SECTION 15510BOILERSPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing boilers and associated equipment.1 .2 RELATED WORKA. Hydronic Systems - Section 155001 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Electrical components shall comply with NFPA 70-96 and shall be UL listed.B. Boilers shall comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV-95 and ASME CSD-1 Safety Code.C. Boilers shall comply with State of California Boiler and Pressure Vessel Safety Orders.D. Boilers tested and rated according to the Hydronic Institute’s “Testing and Rating Standard forHeating Boilers” with I=B=R emblem on a nameplate.1 .4 SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01330. Submit manufacturer's data including physical dimensions, ratedcapacities, weights and accessories for boilers.B. Submit wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems differentiating betweenfactory and field installed wiring.1 .5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01770.B. Operation and maintenance data for boilers, including accessories and as-built wiring diagrams.C. Combustion tests and inspection report: Copy of test results for compliance with performancerequirements.D. Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard warranty not less than 10 years.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 BOILERSA. Description: Factory assembled and packaged, designed to meet ASME Boiler and Pressure VesselCode. Firetube design using stainless steel components suitable for continuous combustion productcondensing operation. Pulse combustion process induces aspiration and venting. Designed for direct15510-1BOILERS

venting and sealed combustion. Insulated with 2-inch thick insulation and covered with painted 18gauge metal cabinet. Model PHW, by The Fulton Companies, Port & Jefferson Streets, Box 257,Pulaski NY 13142, or approved equal.B. Water Pressure Rating: 30 psig.C. Hot-water Trim:1. Safety Relief Valve: ASME rated, factory set at 30 psig.2. Gauge: Combination water pressure and temperature. Pressure range to be 0 to 50 psig andtemperature range to be 40 to 240 degrees F.3. Low Water Cutoff: Prevent burner operation on low water level.4. High Limits: Two temperature controls to limit boiler water temperature. One withautomatic reset, the other with manual reset.5. Operating Controls: Prewired, factory assembled electric gas control valve for automatic startand stop of pulse combustor, manual main valve.6. Air safety switch to prevent operation until sufficient prepurge air is ensured.7. Blocked Combustion Air Intake Switch for shutdown of unit, with manual reset.D. Fuel: LP (Propane) gas.2 .2 FLUE1. Flame Safeguard: Prepurge and postpurge cycles, flame detection, data logging functions toinclude operating hours, cycle count, and last six flame failures.2. Emissions: NOx and CO emissions in accordance with State of California standards forboiler size and location.A. Direct venting and combustion air connections using AL29-4C stainless steel vent duct and PVCcombustion air pipe for wall vent application. Furnish intake and exhaust mufflers and screened ventterminations.2 .3 CONTROLSA. UL listed, electronic boiler control with adjustable ratios to reset hot water supply temperature ininverse relation to outside air temperature, adjustable offset to raise or lower reset curve, adjustableoutdoor cutoff, night set back, minimum boiler water temperature adjustment, setback clock andadjustable morning warmup, manual override, LED indication of setback, bypass and on.2 .4 VIBRATION ISOLATORSA. Seismic restrained spring vibration isolators, ASHRAE Type C, see Section 15070.B. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Section 15070.2 .5 ACCESSORIES15510-2BOILERS

A. Drain canister with inlet connections from boiler and exhaust drains and cold water and outletconnection to floor drain.PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 INSTALLATIONA. Install boilers level and plumb, according to manufacturer’s recommendations.B. Install boilers on vibration isolators on 4-inch thick concrete base, 4-inches larger on each side thanbase of unit.C. Install natural gas-fired boilers according to NFPA 54-96.3 .2 CONNECTIONSA. Connect hot water supply and return piping to boiler with flex connections.B. Connect gas piping full size to boiler gas train inlet. Install with a flex connection, union and dirtleg.C. Install heating water piping as specified in Section 15500. Connect to boiler with shutoff valve andunion or flange at each connection.D. Install piping from safety relief valve to nearest floor drain.E. Install flue, mufflers and screened vent terminations in accordance with recommendations of themanufacturer.F. Install boiler condensate drain from boiler to drain canister and then to floor drain. Install water linefrom outlet of backflow preventer to drain canister float connection.3 .3 CONTROLSA. Wire boiler burner so it cannot fire unless either heating water circulating pump is running.B. Boiler shall be started and stopped automatically through the boiler control panel. Outside airtemperature sensor shall enable reset of heating water temperature in accordance with the followingschedule, with field adjustable settings:Outside Air Temperature Heating Water Temperature70 degrees F. 80 degrees F.30 degrees F. 180 degree F.C. Wire boiler burner through flow switch in heating water loop to prevent boiler operation untilpositive flow is proven.D. One pump shall operate when outdoor temperature is below 60 degrees F, adjustable.E. Low water cutoff switch shall shut down boiler operation when water level drops below limit.15510-3BOILERS

F. Automatic high limit shall shut down boiler operation when water temperature exceeds 200degrees F (adjustable). Manual reset high limit shall shut down boiler operation when watertemperature exceeds 205 degrees F (adjustable).3 .4 CLEANINGA. Flush and clean boilers according to manufacturer’s instructions.B. After completing system installation, inspect boiler and associated components. Repair scratches andmars of finish to match original finish.C. Clean boiler casing and control panel internally to remove dust and debris. Clean external surfacesto remove welding slag and mill film. Grind welds smooth.3 .5 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCINGA. As specified in Section 15952.B. Complete manufacturer’s installation and startup checklist.C. Test boiler performance and adjust boiler combustion efficiency to meet manufacturer’srecommendations.1. Additionally, measure and record the following :3 .6 TRAININGa. Gas pressure on manifold.b. Combustion air temperature at inlet to burner.c. Flue gas temperature at boiler discharge.d. Flue gas carbon dioxide and oxygen concentrationA. As specified in Section 01815. Provide 2 hours of instruction to Government Personnel. NotifyContracting Officer at least 7 days before proposed instruction, and arrange mutually agreeable time.Training to include operation of boiler including accessories and controls, procedures for startup andshutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance. Review data in the maintenancemanuals.PART 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT4 .1 BOILERSA. Payment will be included in the bid item to which this work relates.END OF SECTION15510-4BOILERS

SECTION 15851AIR OUTLETS AND INTAKESPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing air supply, return and exhaust,grilles, diffusers and exterior air intakes for heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems.1 .2 RELATED WORKA. General mechanical provisions - Section 15010.B. Basic materials and methods - Section 15050.1 .3 SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01330.B. Detailed shop drawings showing layout coordinated with ductwork, Section 15810.C. Manufacturer's literature, performance data, installation instructions, and parts lists for grilles,diffusers and intakes.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 GENERALA. Ceiling, wall, and floor registers and diffusers shall be factory fabricated of steel or aluminum andfactory prime coated or finished as shown. Size and type as shown. Dampers shall be opposedblade type, key or standard blade screwdriver operated from the face of the unit. Provide keys foreach unit installed.B. Air flow capacity, sound levels, and pressure drops of each grille and register shall be as shown.2 .2 DIFFUSERSA. Louvered face square ceiling diffuser, removable cores, margins for mounting on gypsum boardceilings with glue-on ceiling tiles, size and discharge pattern as indicated, steel construction, bakedwhite enamel finish. Equipped with adjustable deflection devices to provide directional air distributionpattern and with volume damper operable through face. Model TDC, manufactured by Titus,Richardson TX, or approved equal.2 .3 FILTER RETURN GRILLESA. Grille: Steel, white baked enamel finish, perforated face, 1-1/4-inch margin for gypsum boardceilings and walls, hinged face to allow installation of 1-inch thick filters, 1/4 turn fastener tosecure filter face, Model 8RF, manufactured by Titus, Richardson TX, or approved equal.15851-1AIR OUTLETS AND INTAKES

B. Filters: 1-inch thick pleated, 20% average efficiency and 85% average arrestance, based onASHRAE 52.1-92, welded wire media support grid to form radial pleat design, supported incardboard frame. Model 20-20, by Farr Company, Los Angeles CA, or approved equal.2 .4 EXHAUST GRILLESA. Steel, white baked enamel finish, perforated face, 1-1/4-inch margin for gypsum board ceilingsand walls, Model 8R, manufactured by Titus, Richardson TX, or approved equal.2 .5 OUTSIDE AIR INTAKEA. Aluminum, roof mounted louvered intake housing, 20x20x14-inches, heavy gauge storm blades,mitered corners, mill finish, roof curb and flashing for 2:12 sloping roof, 18x14 mesh insectscreen, frame and casing for motorized damper. Pennhouse, manufactured by Penn VentilationCo., North Wales PA 19454, or approved equal.2 .6 MOTORIZED DAMPERSA. For two-position control of outside air, mounted in outside air intake. Aluminum, parallel blade,power open, spring return operator, internally mounted with switch. Model FBD12, manufacturedby Penn Ventilation Co., North Wales PA 19454, or approved equal.2 .7 RELIEF DAMPERA. Backdraft/relief damper with parallel blades, counterbalanced, with field-adjustable weights torelieve at static pressures from 0.01 to 0.15 inches water gauge, to suit field conditions.Aluminum blades, with 1/2-inch diameter steel axles. Galvanized steel finish on frame.Manufactured by Ruskin, Grandview MO, or approved equal.PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 INSTALLATIONA. Install air outlets, intakes and dampers as shown, coordinating exact locations with theContracting Officer.B. Attach air outlets, intakes and dampers to ducts and secure frame to surfaces as shown and asrecommended by manufacturer.3 .2 BALANCINGA. Section 15952.PART 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT4 .1 AIR OUTLETS AND INTAKESA. Payment will be included in the contract bid item to which this work relates.END OF SECTION15851-2AIR OUTLETS AND INTAKES

SECTION 15915ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC CONTROLSPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing a complete electrical/electronicsystem of automatic temperature control for the heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning system.1 .2 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. The system shall be calibrated and completely checked by mechanics regularly employed by themanufacturer of the temperature control equipment.B. All control items installed must be the product of one manufacturer, as much as possible.1 .3 SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01330.B. Submit manufacturer's literature and installation instructions for each type of control, panel, andinstrument.C. Shop Drawings:1. Provide a complete written sequence of operation for each system and the entire system.Include settings or adjustable range of control for devices.2. Provide schematic flow diagrams showing the entire building system including equipmentand control devices. Label each device and include setting or adjustable range of control.3. Show all electrical wiring. Clearly differential between factory-installed and field installedwiring.4. Show details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling1 .4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01770.B. Operation and maintenance data for review and approval as required by Section 01785.1. Manufacturer's operation and maintenance data for each type control and instrument.2. Complete materials lists and schedules of all control devices. Schedules shall list, for eachtype of device, designation, location, function, set-point range, and set-point at start-up, asapplicable.3. Vendor furnished and field modified as-built control drawings and sequence of operationdescriptions. Drawing size approximately 11 inches by 17 inches.15915-1ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC CONTROLS

4. Interconnection wiring diagrams with all terminals and wires identified and numbered andequipment terminal numbers shown.C. Vendor furnished and field modified as-built control drawings and sequence of operationdescriptions. Include one set of floppy disks containing all CAD files in .dwg format required togenerate the drawings.D. Calibration records and completion report.E. Warranty.F. Videotapes of Training: As specified in Section 01815.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 GENERALA. System shall be manufactured by Honeywell, Inc., Minneapolis, Minnesota, Johnson Controls,Inc., Milwaukee, Wisconsin, or approved equal.2 .2 ELECTRIC WIRINGA. As specified in Section 01312.B. Design control wiring for less than 100 volts. Conceal conduit and wiring between the variouscomponents of the control system. Perform any cutting and patching necessary for the installationof the temperature control system.2 .3 CONTROL PANELSA. Central Control Panels: Fully enclosed, steel cabinet with locking doors or locking removablebacks.B. Local Control Panels: Unitized cabinet with brackets for wall or floor mounting, located adjacentto each system under automatic control. Provide common keying for all panels.1. Fabricate panels of 0.06 inch thick steel or extruded aluminum alloy, totally enclosed, withpaint finish hinged doors.2. Panel Mounted Equipment: Mount temperature and humidity controllers, relays, andautomatic switches; except safety devices, with adjustments accessible from front of panel.3. Door Mounted Equipment: Flush mounted on hinged door, with manual switches,including damper positioning switches, changeover switches, thermometers, and gauges.4. Mount electrical relays, transformers, terminal strips, and other electrical accessorieswithin the panel and prewired to factory terminal strips.5. Provide laminated engraved nameplates beneath each control device.2 .4 CONTROLLERSA. Outdoor Reset Controllers: Electronic type, proportioning action with adjustable throttling range,adjustable set-point.15915-2ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC CONTROLS

B. Fan Speed Controllers: Three speed manual switches with off position, integral with fan coilthermostats.C. Discharge Air Temperature Controller: Maintains an average discharge air temperature in systemsrequiring discharge air control of cooling or heating.D. Bypass Timer: Twist type, adjustable up to three hours.2 .5 TIME CLOCKSA. Seven-day programmable controller with holiday programming, 48 events available for each offour channels, lithium battery backup.2 .6 SENSORSA. Electronic Sensors: Vibration and corrosion resistant, for wall, immersion, or duct mounting asrequired.B. Water Flow Sensor: Pressure flow switch, bellows actuated mercury or snap acting type, withappropriate scale range and differential adjustment, stainless steel bronze paddle. Providevaporproof type for chilled water applications.2 .7 THERMOSTATSA. Setback Thermostat: 24 volts ac, single stage heating, single stage cooling with automaticchangeover.B. Fan Coil Thermostat: Controls heating and cooling valves, and fan motors. Automatic heat/coolchangeover. OFF-HIGH-MED-LOW fan switching and OFF-AUTO-HEAT-COOL systemswitching. Temperature range of 55 to 95 degrees F.C. Immersion Thermostat: Remote bulb or bimetal rod and tube type, proportioning action withadjustable throttling range and adjustable set-point.D. Low Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap acting, single pole, single throw, manual or automatic resetswitch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches of bulb length is equal to or below setpoint,20 foot minimum bulb length. One thermostat for every 20 square feet of coil surface.2 .8 ACTUATORSA. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient power to provide smooth modulating action ortwo-position action.1. Permanent Split Capacitor or Shaded Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed andsealed. Equip spring return motors with integral spring mechanism in housings designedfor easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, orfeedback potentiometer.2. Motors for Valves Larger than 2-1/2 Inches and Dampers Larger than 25 Square Feet: Sizefor running torque of 150 inch-pounds.B. Damper Operator: Heavy duty oil submerged type, with sufficient power to overcome friction ofdamper linkage and mounting arrangement for location outside of the air stream whereverpossible.15915-3ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC CONTROLS

C. Electronic Operators: Operator selected for full shutoff at maximum pump differential pressure.2 .9 CONTROL DAMPERSA. AMCA rated, parallel or opposed blade design. Form frames from not less than 16 gaugegalvanized steel with mounting holes for flange and enclosed duct mounting. Form damper bladesfrom not less than 16 gauge galvanized steel, with maximum blade width of 6 inches.1. Blades secured to 1/2-inch diameter, zinc plated steel shaft, with nylon or oilite bearings.Blade linkage hardware to be zinc-plated steel and accessible for maintenance. Endssealed against spring loaded stainless steel blade bearings.2. Inflatable seal blade edging or replaceable butyl rubber or neoprene seals at all blade edgesand top, bottom, and sides of the frame. Seals to provide leakage at less than 10CFM/square foot of damper area, at differential pressure of 4 inches wg in accordance withAMCA 500.3. Size damper linkage to provide linear flow of equal percentage.2 .10 CONTROL VALVESA. General: Factory fabricated, quiet in operation, and arranged to fail in either a normally open ornormally closed position in the event of power failure. The open or closed position shall be asspecified or as required to suit job conditions.B. Globe Pattern:1. Up to 2 inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, renewable composition disc,screwed ends with backseating capacity repackable under pressure.2. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, plug type disc, flanged ends, renewableseat and disc.3. Hydronic Systems: Service rating at 125 psi WSP and 250 degree F. Stainless steel orbrass replaceable plugs and seats. Two-way valves shall have equal percentage flowcharacteristics and three-way valves shall have linear flow characteristics.C. Butterfly Pattern: Iron body; bronze, aluminum-bronze, or stainless steel disc; resilient,replaceable seat, wafer or lug ends; extended neck.. Service rating at 125 psi WSP and 250degrees F. Use for two position control only.D. Terminal Unit Control Valve: Bronze body, bronze trim, replaceable plugs and seats, servicerating at 125 psi WSP and 250 degrees F. Two-way valves shall have equal percentage flowcharacteristics and three-way valves shall have linear flow characteristics.1. Two-Position Operator: Synchronous motor with enclosed gear train, dual return springs,valve position indicator. Valves spring return to normal position.2. Modulating Operator: Self contained, linear motor, actuator with 60 second full travel,with transformer and single throw, double pole contacts.E. Hydronic Valve Sizing:1. Two-Position Valves: Select line size valve.15915-4ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC CONTROLS

2. Two-Way and Three-Way Modulating Valves: Select valve using pressure drop at leastequal to the drop in the coil or other load being controlled but not less than 5 psi.2 .11 DRAFT GAUGEA. Magnehelic draft gauge, 4-inch dial, range 0 to 2 inches water, accuracy plus or minus 2 percentof full scale.2 .12 THERMOMETERSA. 3-1/2-inch dial or liquid type with nominal scale length of 7 inches. Scale range suitable for theintended service.PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 INSTALLATIONA. Locate thermostats 54 inches above finished floor.3 .2 SENSORS/TRANSMITTERSA. Provide NEMA 4X enclosures for outdoor installations.B. Mount sensor/transmitter enclosures so the sensor can be removed and serviced withoutdisturbance or removal of insulation.C. Seal penetrations of insulation vapor barrier with vapor barrier coating compound.D. Duct Sensors: Securely seal ducts where elements or connections penetrate duct.E. Immersion Sensors: Install wells in pipe elbows where pipe diameters are smaller than the lengthof wells. Install lag extension type wells to extend at least 1/2 inch above insulation. Install wellswith sealing nuts and thermal transmission material.F. Install isolation valves between pressure sensors and pressure source.3 .3 CONTROL VALVES AND SEPARATE SOCKETSA. Install hydronic control valves, wells, sockets, and accessories as specified in Section 15500.3 .4 CONTROL DAMPERSA. Install control dampers as specified in Section 15810. Damper motors shall have metal stops tolimit actuator travel.B. Install parallel bladed damper for two-position control and opposed bladed dampers formodulating control.3 .5 DRAFT GAUGEA. Install draft gauge on each filter except for room fan coil units.3 .6 PRESSURE GAUGES15915-5ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC CONTROLS

A. Install a pressure gauge adjacent to each pressure sensor, transmitter and pressure switch.3 .7 THERMOMETERSA. Install thermometers in piping as shown.3 .8 WIRINGA. Install wiring in conduit and in accordance with Section 16050.B. Support conduits in a neat and workmanlike manner. Prevent sagging or vibration.1. Run exposed conduits in equipment rooms parallel to or at right angles to the buildingstructure. Install exposed conduits to avoid conflicts with mechanical equipment, ducts,and piping.2. Conceal wiring in finished areas. Surface mounted wiring is not acceptable.C. Install 30-inches of flexible metal conduit for final connection to all well and duct sensors topermit sensor removal.3 .9 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONA. Occupied - Unoccupied Mode:1. During occupied mode, outside air supply and exhaust fans operate continuously andoutside air dampers are open. Chilled water and hot water pumps operate continuously.2. During unoccupied cycle, exhaust fans are off and outside air dampers are closed. Outsidemakeup air handling unit AH-1 is off. Chiller and boiler operate same as in occupiedmode. Chilled water and hot water pumps cycle on and off under the control of the centralsetback thermostat.3. During unoccupied mode, bypass timers will allow the system to operate in occupied modefor up to 3 hours (adjustable).B. Chilled Water:1. One of the two chilled water pumps is manually selected to operate as lead pump.2. Above 65°F outside air temperature, lead chilled water pump starts.3. When chilled water flow switch makes, chiller is energized.4. Chiller operates to maintain 45°F supply water temperature.C. Hot Water:1. One of the two hot water pumps is manually selected to operate as lead pump.2. Below 60°F outside air temperature, lead hot water pump starts.3. When hot water pump flow switch makes, boiler is energized.15915-6ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC CONTROLS

D. AH-1:4. Boiler operates to maintain a maximum of 180°F supply water temperature when outsideair temperature is 30°F, reset down to 80°F when outside air temperature is 70°F(adjustable).1. At beginning of occupied mode, outside air damper is opened. When damper is provedopen by an end switch, supply fan is started.2. Discharge air temperature is maintained at 73°F by modulating 2-way hot water valve onheating coil and 3-way chilled water valve on cooling coil in sequence.3. At end of occupied mode, supply fan is shut down and outside air damper is closed.4. If discharge air temperature drops below freezestat setpoint, fan stops and outside airdamper closes.E. Fan Coil Units (FC-101 - FC-219)1. Fan speed is manually set by occupant at room selector switch, or at individual units forfloor mounted fan coil units (OFF-HIGH-MED-LOW switching). Supply fans runcontinuously.2. 2-way hot water valve on heating coil and 3-way chilled water valve cycle open and closedunder the control of the room thermostat (OFF-AUTO-HEAT-COOL switching).3. For FC-201, 202, and 203 in Conference Room, control all three fan coils in parallel fromthe same room thermostat.F. Exhaust Fans (EF-1 and EF-2):1. Fans operate during occupied mode and remain off during unoccupied mode.3 .10 DIAGRAMSA. Install laminated schematic control diagram in each equipment room adjacent to the temperaturecontrol panel. Furnish one spare laminated diagram.3 .11 ADJUSTMENTA. On completion of the work, the Contractor shall completely adjust, ready for use, all thermostats,damper motors, and relays.B. Prepare project completion report stating the system is complete, has been adjusted and calibrated,and all hardware and software functions have been verified. Specifically note any deviations fromspecified settings or operations.3 .12 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCINGA. As specified in Section 15952.3 .13 DEMONSTRATIONA. As specified in Section 01815.15915-7ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC CONTROLS

B. Demonstrate complete system operation to the Contracting Officer at the time of final inspection.C. Provide Government operating personnel 8 hours of instructions on the set-up, operation,maintenance, and trouble shooting of the controls system. . Provide training after the system hasbeen installed and checked out.PART 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT4 .1 ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC CONTROLSA. Payment will be included in the bid item to which this work relates.END OF SECTION15915-8ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC CONTROLS

SECTION 15952TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF H&V SYSTEMSPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of providing the necessary testing apparatus and instruments andperforming all procedures to test, adjust, and balance the various air, fluid, mechanical, andelectrical systems associated with the heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning systems tooptimum performance.1 .2 SYSTEMS INCLUDEDA. Supply and return air system, including air handling units, ductwork, registers, diffusers, andappurtenances.B. Exhaust air systems, including fans, ductwork, registers, and appurtenances.C. Heating system.D. Chilled water system, including chiller, pumps, chilled water coils, and appurtenances.E. Automatic temperature controls and appurtenances.1 .3 RELATED WORKA. General mechanical provisions - Section 15010.1 .4 SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01330.B. Drawings and Data: Furnish to the agency a complete set of approved plans and specifications,certified pump and fan curves, performance data on air distribution devices, shop drawings ofductwork and temperature control system, and performance data on all other applicable pieces ofequipment.C. Balancing and Testing Plan: Submit, not less than two weeks before balancing and testing isscheduled to begin, a balancing and testing plan which shall include the procedures, instructions,and reports to be used.1 .5 TESTING AGENCYA. Contractor shall obtain the services of an approved independent balancing and testing agency,which specializes in and whose business is limited to the balancing and testing of heating,ventilating, and air-conditioning systems, to balance, adjust, and test the systems installed underthis Contract. The balancing and testing agency shall meet the requirements for membership inthe Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or National Environmental Balancing Bureau(NEBB).15952-1TESTING, ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING OF H&V SYSTEMS

B. Contractor shall furnish for approval, within 30 days after award of Contract, the name of thebalancing and testing agency with a resume of the agency, including the qualifications ofpersonnel to be used and the authority and responsibilities of the personnel.C. All work by this agency shall be done under the direct supervision of a qualified heating,ventilating, and air-conditioning engineer employed by the agency. The balancing and testingagency and the engineer shall have successfully completed at least five projects of similar size andscope. The balancing and testing engineer shall be a registered professional engineer.1 .6 REPORTA. Balancing and Testing Agency Report: Obtain from the balancing and testing agency a reportwhich shall include all test data required to show compliance with the contract specifications anddrawings, as well as a list of all items that are installed incorrectly or require correction.Deficiencies shall be corrected by the Contractor and retests shall be made as required. Before theinstallation is accepted, the Contractor shall deliver a certified report from the balancing andtesting agency, certifying that the systems have been balanced and tested and are functioningsatisfactorily. Number of copies shall be as directed. Include a copy of the final report with eachset of operation and maintenance data specified in Section 01785.B. Test Data: Report shall include the following test data as a minimum, in typewritten schedules, ofreadings taken during the balancing and testing operations indicating the required or specifiedreading, the first reading taken, and final balanced reading for the following items:1. Air Handling Units: Manufacturer, model, size, type, fan speed in rpm, outlet velocityfpm, external static pressure and total static pressure (inches of water), air quantity cfm,motor load in amperes, and voltage.2. Air Balance:a. Air Outlets and Inlets: Size, velocity in fpm, and air quantity in cfm.b. Coils: Size, face velocity in fpm, air temperature entering coil and air temperatureleaving coil, wet-bulb and dry-bulb degrees F.c. Ducts: Size, velocity in fpm, and air quantity in cfm.3. Water Balance:a. Chillers: Water temperature entering and leaving chiller, degrees F, water flow,gpm, pressure entering and leaving.b. Cooling Coils: Water temperature entering and leaving coil, degrees F, water flow,gpm, pressure entering and leaving.c. Boilers: Water temperature entering and leaving boiler, degrees F, water flow, gpm,pressure entering and leaving.d. Heating Coils: Water temperature entering and leaving coil, degrees F, water flow,gpm, pressure entering and leaving.4. Pumps: Manufacturer, model, size, type, rpm, total dynamic head, gpm, motor loadamperes, and voltage.15952-2TESTING, ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING OF H&V SYSTEMS

5. Expansion Tanks: Air side precharge pressure. Measure pressure with tank isolated fromhydronic system pressure.6. Glycol: Measure the percent propylene glycol in chilled water system.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 TEST INSTRUMENTS AND EQUIPMENTA. Provide all test instruments, meters, gauges, thermometers, power measuring instruments,pumping equipment, temporary piping, fittings, wiring, wiring devices, and miscellaneous itemsnecessary to perform the required testing procedures. All instruments shall be calibrated andcertified accurate.2 .2 ACCESSORY DEVICESA. Provide necessary dampers, thermometer wells, gauge cocks, balancing valves, and otherappurtenances as required. Coordinate with agency as to the locations of these items asconstruction progresses, to avoid disturbance to finished complete systems. Also provide newsheaves and belts for air moving equipment, if required, to attain desired air quantities.PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 GENERALA. Study the drawings and specifications to ensure that all dampers, valves, and instrumentationnecessary for proper balancing and testing are shown or specified.B. Before commencing adjustment and balancing work, test and clean all systems; remove air fromwater system; conduct trial runs on equipment; and provide complete set of clean filters for theair-conditioning units.3 .2 CLEANING AND ADJUSTINGA. Clean pipes free of scale and thoroughly flush of all foreign matter. Provide temporary bypass forall water coils to prevent flushing water from passing through coils. Thoroughly clean strainersand valves.B. Thoroughly clean the inside of ducts, plenums, and casing of all debris, rubbish, and dust.Vacuum clean before installing outlet faces.C. Lubricate bearings with oil or grease as recommended by manufacturer. Tighten belts to propertension. Adjust fans to the speed indicated by the manufacturer to meet specified conditions.Adjust miscellaneous equipment to setting indicated or directed.D. Coordinate with the manufacturer's representative to adjust the automatically operated dampersand valves for required operation and to check all controls for proper calibration, operation, andfunction.3 .3 TESTING15952-3TESTING, ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING OF H&V SYSTEMS

A. General: Conduct tests in the presence of the Contracting Officer who shall be given 48 hoursnotice before any test is to be conducted. Provide water and electricity required for the tests.Determine that all dampers, registers, and valves are in a set or full open position.B. Piping: After cleaning, all water piping shall be hydrostatically tested at a pressure equal to 150percent of the total system operating pressure for a period of time sufficient to inspect every jointin the system and in no case less than two hours. No loss of pressure will be allowed. Repairleaks found during tests by rewelding or replacing pipe or fittings. Caulking of joints will not bepermitted. Test concealed and insulated piping in place before covering or concealing.C. Duct Systems: Test all duct systems to prove air tightness. Make tests prior to application of anyexternal insulation before erection of enclosing construction. Pressures for ductwork maintainedduring the tests shall not be less than twice total operating pressure of entire system. Test durationshall be not less than two hours with leakage not to exceed 5 percent of total capacity of system.All audible leaks must be corrected. Make corrections of minor leakage as approved.D. Dampers: Verify that automatic dampers and damper frames are installed level in both directions.Blades shall not touch any adjacent materials throughout full travel by the blades. Verify thatdamper and damper frames are installed so there is no torsion or twist in the frame to preventsmooth operation of the damper. Adjust the linkage of the automatic damper to the air flowquantities shown. Check all automatic dampers in normal operation to verify proper operation.Verify that the return, relief air, and fresh air intake dampers operate as designed to producedesired room comfort.E. Equipment Tests: Upon completion of installation, but before applying power to any operatingequipment or package control system, obtain the services of respective manufacturer'srepresentative to inspect and witness trial runs of equipment. Inspection shall include alignment,direction of rotation, initial lubrication, rpm, voltage, amperage, and nameplate data.3 .4 BALANCINGA. Balance water piping systems to produce water quantities as shown with all manual and automaticcontrol valves open.B. Balance duct system to produce air quantities within 5 percent of the indicated.3 .5 PERFORMANCE TESTSA. After cleaning, pressure and other tests, and adjusting and balancing are complete, each systemshall be performance tested as a whole to verify all items perform as integral parts of the system,and temperatures and conditions are evenly controlled throughout the building. Make correctionsand adjustments as required to produce the conditions indicated.PART 4MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT4 .1 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF H&V SYSTEMSA. Payment will be included in the bid item to which this work relates.END OF SECTION15952-4TESTING, ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING OF H&V SYSTEMS

SECTION 16010GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONSPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. This section includes basic requirements of a common or administrative nature that pertain to allelectrical work.1 .2 WORK INCLUDEDA. As specified and as shown, furnish, install, test, and place in satisfactory and successful operationall equipment, materials, devices, and necessary appurtenances to provide a complete and operableelectrical system. Electrical work also includes wiring and connections required for electricalequipment furnished under other divisions.1 .3 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. For additional basic requirements that may affect electrical work, see Division 1.1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Worker's Qualifications: All electrical work shall be performed by licensed electricians or underthe direct supervision of a licensed electrician.B. Codes and Regulations:1. All work shall meet requirements of governing codes and regulations, NFPA 70-2008(NEC), California Electrical Code 2008.2. Advise the Contracting Officer of conflicting codes or conflicts between codes anddrawings and specifications.3. When the requirements of specifications or drawings are more stringent than the codes,regulations, or standards, the specifications or drawings shall prevail.4. The electrical installation shall meet the requirements of NECA Standard of Installation,except where otherwise specified.C. UL Listing:1. All electrical materials and equipment shall meet requirements of the applicable standardsof UL if UL standards exist for such materials and equipment.2. The UL authorized listing mark is acceptable as evidence that the materials meet thisrequirement.3. In lieu of UL authorized listing mark, the Contractor may submit independent proofsatisfactory to the Contracting Officer that the materials meet the standards.16010-105/08 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS

4. Materials and equipment shall be installed only for their intended operational purpose.D. Standard Products: Provide only new electrical equipment of current standard design.E. Finished Surfaces:1. Finished surfaces of existing facilities that are marred, scratched, or damaged shall berefinished to match original condition.2. Building surfaces that have been altered for the proper installation of electrical equipmentshall be restored by skilled personnel of the trades involved at no additional expense to theGovernment.F. Polychlorinated Biphenyl (PCB): Equipment containing PCB is not acceptable.1 .5 INTENT OF CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGSA. Electrical drawings do not attempt to show complete details of building construction that affectinstallation. Diagrams are schematic only and do not necessarily show physical arrangement ofequipment. Refer to drawings of other trades for additional details which affect work.B. Conduit, conductor and ground connections are shown diagrammatically only. Layout does notnecessarily show total number of conduits or conductors for circuits required and should not beused for obtaining quantities for linear runs of conduits or wires. Locations of indicated runs arenot intended to show actual routing of conduits. Provide additional conduits and wire whereverneeded to complete installation of specific equipment furnished.C. Locations of outlets on drawings are approximate and may be distorted for clarity inrepresentation.D. Install electrical outlets and other equipment clear of and in proper relation to radiators, ducts,grilles, pipes, and other equipment, and items such as cabinets and counters.E. Changes such as offsetting conduit runs, moving outlets, or other minor changes necessary tofacilitate installation shall be made at no additional expense to the Government.1 .6 COORDINATION OF WORKA. Coordinate electrical work with the work of the various trades on the project.PART 2 PRODUCTSNOT USED.16010-205/08 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS

PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 INSPECTIONA. Demonstrate that electrical work operates satisfactorily and in accordance with the requirementsof the drawings and specifications. Before final inspection, remove the front covers on all panelboards, and wire gutters. Replace covers after the final inspection is completed.3 .2 TESTINGA. General:1. Make all specified tests in the presence of the Contracting Officer.2. Furnish all instruments and provide qualified personnel to perform all tests in accordancewith the drawings and specifications.3. Perform all tests at no additional expense to the Government.4. Operate all electrical equipment within the ranges specified by manufacturer.5. Correct defects revealed by the tests.B. Balance Test: Test for proper load balance on the system, and make adjustments as required.C. Conductors: Prior to energization of circuitry, test installed wires and cables to ensure thatinsulation resistance levels are adequate, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and forshort-circuits.D. Wiring devices: Ensure proper polarity of connections. Prior to system energization, test wiringdevices in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.E. Grounding:1. Upon completion of installation of electrical grounding and bonding systems, test groundresistance with ground resistance tester.2. Where test shows resistance-to-ground is over 25 ohms, reduce resistance to 25 ohms orless by driving additional ground rods; then retest to demonstrate compliance.F. Panel boards and Load Centers:1. Prior to energization of circuitry, check all accessible connections to manufacturer's torquetightening specifications.2. Prior to energization of panel boards or load centers, check phase-to-phase and phase-togroundinsulation resistance with ground resistance tester.G. Lighting Fixtures and Lighting System: Upon completion of installation and testing of lightingfixtures replace any defective ballasts, contactors, control devices or burned out lamps.16010-305/08 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS

3 .3 DEMONSTRATIONA. As specified in individual sections of Division 16.3 .4 EXISTING EQUIPMENT AND WIRINGA. Surface Wiring Systems to be Abandoned: Remove conduit, wire, boxes, and other componentsto nearest outlet, device, or panel board that is to remain in use.B. Concealed Wiring Systems to be Abandoned: Remove wire, devices, and other components tonearest outlet, device, or panel board that is to remain in use. Install blank faceplates onabandoned outlet boxes.C. Modify existing electrical installation as required by new construction. Provide necessary conduitsystem, wire, and connections for a complete and operable system.D. Removing Existing Equipment: Existing equipment specified to be removed becomes property ofContractor and shall be removed from site, unless otherwise specified.END OF SECTION16010-405/08 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS

SECTION 16050BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODSPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of general electrical materials and methods. Electrical materialsthat are a part of equipment specified under other sections shall meet the requirements of thissection, unless part of larger factory-assembled equipment.1 .2 SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01330.B. Submit manufacturer's literature for items listed below.1. Panel boards, circuit breakers, fuses.2. Disconnect/fused safety switches3. Transformers4. Flow Indicator5. Well Building Heater6 Three Phase Starter and Pump Protection Relay.7 Wire and cable8. Electrical Cabinet9. Conduit, raceway and fittings.10. Wiring devices.C. Submit schematic (ladder, elementary) diagram for the Tank level indicating transmitter.1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. NFPA 70-96 for components and installation.B. Provide products that are UL listed and labeled.1 .4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01770.B. Operation and maintenance data for review and approval as required by Section 01785.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGSA. Raceway Systems:1. PVC Coated Rigid galvanized steel conduit, above ground and exposed within wellbuilding.2. Schedule 80 Rigid PVC Conduit, shall be used for all underground installations. Whereconduit turns up to grade, the vertical elbow shall be PVC Coated Rigid Galvanized steel.16050-105/08 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

3. Raceways at vibrating equipment shall be liquid tight flexible metallic conduit.2 .2 WIRE AND CABLEA. Color Coding:1. Color code secondary service conductors as follows. For single phase voltages, black andred for phases, white for neutral; and green for ground. Neutral and equipment groundingconductors sized No. 6 AWG and larger may be marked with colored plastic marking tapeB. Branch and Feeder Circuits:1. Conductor insulation shall be rated for 600 volts, 90 degree C.2. Conductor size shall meet requirements of NFPA 70-96, or the sizes shown on thedrawings if larger, and for feeder and branch circuits shall be No. 12 AWG minimum.3. Wire sizes are for copper.4. Copper clad and aluminum conductors are not acceptable.5. Feeder and Branch Circuit Equipment Grounding Conductor: As specified in Section16060.C. Control Wire: No. 12 AWG copper conductor; 600-volt rated insulation. Control wiring insidefactory wired control panels may be smaller than No. 12 AWG copper with proper overcurrentprotection.D. Well Building Wiring:1. Feeder and Branch Circuits: Conductors shall be Type THWN.2. 600-Volt Control Wire: Stranded, Type THHN insulation.3. 600-Volt Control Cable: Cable shall have 2 pair No. 14 AWG stranded copper conductors.Insulation shall be thermo plastic rated for 75 degrees C. Sheath, clear nylon armor, roundgalvanized steel wire; jacket, thermoplastic.4. Low Voltage Control Cable: Cable shall have 2 No. 16 AWG stranded copper conductors.Insulation shall be thermoplastic and rated for 150 volts minimum. Conductors shall betwisted and have thermoplastic jacket.E. Underground Secondary Wiring: As specified in Section 16401.2 .3 OUTLET, PULL, AND JUNCTION BOXESA. General: Provide one for each outlet, switch, receptacle, or combination, and each junction point.Boxes shall be Weatherproof, cast metal, threaded hub..2 .4 WIRING DEVICESA. Receptacles: UL 498-91 and NEMA WD-1-83. Terminals shall be suitable for copperconductors.1. Duplex Receptacles: Thermosetting ivory plastic, NEMA heavy duty 5-15R and 5-20Rconfigurations, Specification grade with U-shaped grounding pole and a green-coloredterminal for connection of a bonding jumper.2. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacle (GFCI): Duplex 20-ampere with NEMA5-20R configuration, UL 943-95, Class A, Specification grade. Receptacle shall havebuilt-in surge and load noise suppression, with feed-through capability to protect branchcircuit beyond GFCI receptacle against ground fault, and test and reset buttons. Indicatorlight shall glow only when tripped. Color shall be ivory.16050-205/08 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

B. Snap Switches: Specification grade, 15-ampere, 120/277 volts, ac rated, general use, quiet type,NEMA heavy duty, with brown handle. Screw terminals sized for No. 10 AWG copper.C. Device Plates and Covers: Weatherproof, with spring covers for receptacles, lever operators forswitches and cast aluminum cover plates for junction boxes.2 .5 PANELBOARDSA. Enclosures and Bus: As shown on the panel board schedule. Complete with protective devicesand enclosures, copper buses, ground and neutral bars as required, front covers with door andbuilt-in lock. Protective devices shall be removable without disturbing adjacent units. Flushmounted panel boards shall have adjustable fronts with concealed trim clamps. Sub panel neutralsshall be insulated from their enclosures and grounds. Panel boards used as service entrance shallbe UL listed as suitable for service entrance equipment. Square D, Class 1630 NQOD orapproved equalB. Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic, multi-pole breakers shall automatically open all poles whenan overload occurs in any pole. External tie-handle construction where adjacent poles are on thesame phase or leg will not be accepted. Tandem breakers are not acceptable. Branch circuitbreakers used for switching duty shall be UL listed as SWD type. Ground fault circuit interrupterprotection as required by NEC shall be provided by ground fault circuit interrupting breakers.Main breaker shall be 10,000 AIC symmetrical at 240 volts ac. Branch circuit breakers shall havea minimum interrupting rating of 10,000 AIC symmetrical at 240volts ac. Square D, QO/QOB orapproved equal.2 .6 SAFETY SWITCHESA. Quick-make, quick-break, NEMA type HD heavy duty switches. Switches shall be non-fusedtype, 3-pole, as applicable, with solid neutral. Switches shall have interrupting rating equal to orgreater than interrupting rating of the system short circuit capacity at the point of each application.Voltage ratings shall be that of the system voltage at point of application.2 .7 MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERA. Cutler-Hammer or approved equal, NEMA Size 1, magnetic motor starter 208vac three phase withelectronic overload rated for 1.5hp submersible pump. Accessories shall include red stop andgreen run indicating lights and hand-off-auto selector switch located on starter cover. Two form CAuxiliary contacts shall be provided to control chemical pump.2 .8 SUBMERSIBLE PUMP PROTECTION RELAYA. Pump Saver Model 520-CS230 rated at 208vac three phase, or approved equal. Protection relayshall protect submersible pump from over voltage, under voltage, over current, under current andlow water level in well.2 .9 FLOW METER INDICATION AND TOTALIZERA. ACT-PAK Model 1100D or approved equal, flow indicating and totalizing module in fiberglassenclosure. 115vac powered, suitable for receiving and processing high speed pulsed frequencyfrom flow meter pickup.2 .10 ELECTRICAL CABINET16050-305/08 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

A. Electrical Cabinet shall be NEMA 4X outdoor rated free standing 12 gauge welded steel panelwith integral mounting legs and back panel for equipment mounting. Panel shall have doubledoors with three point locking handles and piano hinges. Panel dimensions, 60”H, 48”W, 24”D,Hoffman #A-604824LP with A60P48 back panel, or approved equal. Accessories shall include:1. Panel Heater Kit, Hoffman # D-AH4001B 400 Watt 115vac heater, for condensationcontrol.2. Panel Lighting package, Hoffman # A-LTMB light package with manual switch andreceptacle.3. Panel Fan Kit, Hoffman # A-PA4AXFN 85CFM 115vac fan with exhaust grill and filter2 .11 WELL BUILDING WALL HEATERA. Electric Wall type unit heater with built in single pole thermostat and surface mounting frame.MARKEL Model HF3315TRP with frame 3310EX33R, or approved equal.2 .12 ELECTRICAL PULL BOXESA. Precast polymer concrete Pull Box with Solid Bottom. Style PG/LG, Part NumberPC1730DA12 Manufacturer, Hubbell-QUAZITE or approved equal. Location as shown onplans.2 .13 TRANSFORMERSA. Transformers shall be rated as shown on Sheet E2 and shall have 2 2-1/2 percent taps above andbelow normal, on both primary and secondary windings. Transformers shall be Westinghouse,Sorgel or approved equal.2 .14 NAMEPLATES, LEGEND PLATES AND WIRE MARKERSA. Nameplates: Laminated sheet plastic, approximately 1/16-inch-thick, with engraved white letterson a black background, with adhesive backing and mounting-screw holes. Minimum height ofletters, 5/16 inch. Card holders are not acceptable.B. Legend Plates: NEMA Type KN-3 standard legend plates.B. Wire Markers: Pressure-sensitive or heat shrink sleeve types.PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 RACEWAY AND FITTINGS:A. Make cuts square, removing sharp edges.B. Run raceway plumb, level, and in a direct line, with long sweeping bends and offsets. Makechanges in direction of raceway with symmetrical bends or metal fittings. Bends shall not kink orreduce the internal diameter. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for handling, bending,coupling, and installing nonmetallic conduit.C. Make joints tight. Do not use nonconductive material at joint locations before joints are made.Provide expansion joints as necessary for PVC.16050-405/08 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

D. Securely mount raceway using manufactured supports, connectors, and securing devices. Supportnonmetallic conduit with straps and clamps.E. Make transitions between nonmetallic conduits and metallic boxes with manufacturer's standardadapters designed for such purpose.F. Clean raceway before pulling in conductors. In raceway without wiring, install nylon pull stringof minimum 100-pound strength, allowing 12 inches excess at each end.G. Underground conduit shall have watertight joints.H. Install conduit following manufacturer's recommendations. Backfill from tie-in point toward endof conduit run.I. Grout around conduit tie-ins entering vault. Where conduit enters vault, seal openings withapproved duct seal to prevent circulation of air or moisture.J. Minimum depth to top of underground conduit shall be in accordance with NEC Tables 300-5 and710-4(b).K. Install nylon pull cords of 100-pound test in all spare conduit.3 .2 WIRE AND CABLEA. Install all single conductor THHN/THWN interior wire and cable in raceways.B. Feeder and Branch Circuit Equipment Grounding Conductor: Section 16060.C. Taps and Splices: Permitted only in junction or outlet boxes. Use only copper insulated-wireconnectors, bolted and taped connectors, or crimp connectors.3 .3 WIRING DEVICES, OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXESA. Remove fiber washers on mounting screws before installing device. Ground receptacles to metalboxes with green grounding jumpers. Mounting and terminal screws shall be tight.B. Firmly attach plates, plumb and level.3 .4 METAL FRAMINGA. Install the above ground electrical enclosure and support on metal framing, bolt together, andbrace as required to form a rigid structure.B. Clean cuts and welds. Coat unpainted surfaces with cold application zinc galvanizing. Coat cutsand welds on painted surfaces with zinc chromate primer and finish to match existing paint.3 .5 INDIVIDUALLY ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND SWITCHESA. Install with top of enclosure between 54 inches and 78 inches above ground.3 .6 SECONDARY LIGHTNING PROTECTORA. Install on line side of main disconnects on main disconnect enclosures. Bond grounding wire tomain grounding electrode conductor. Install according to manufacturer's recommendations.16050-505/08 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

3 .7 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE PROTECTIONA. Install across 208-volt input to control panel on load side of power on-off switch.3 .8 TRANSFORMERSA. Install transformers as shown and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.3 .9 NAMEPLATES, LEGEND PLATES AND WIRE MARKERSA. Nameplates: Identify all panels, motors, motor starters, control points, control centers, disconnectswitches. Fasten nameplates with finish screws or rivets.1. Remotely Mounted Controls: Identify the equipment controlled.2. Panels: Identify panel number, feeder number, and voltage of panel bus.3. Safety Switches, Relays, and Motor Starters: Identify equipment controlled and circuitsfrom which they are fed.4. Motors: Identify motors as shown on drawings.B. Legend Plates: Install for all push-buttons, pilot lights, selector switches, and selectorpush-buttons.C. Wire Markers: Install at each end of each wire interconnecting between such items as controlpanels, sensors, and control devices, and each end of control wires within control panels, motorcontrol centers, and other such controllers. Wiring markers shall correspond to control wirenumbers on schematic diagrams.END OF SECTION16050-605/08 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

SECTION 16060GROUNDINGPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of grounding and bonding electrical systems and non-currentcarryingmetallic parts of electrical equipment and raceways.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTORSA. Copper, without splice throughout its length, sized according to NEC 250-94; bare or greeninsulated wire is acceptable.2 .2 GROUND RINGA. No. 2 AWG bare copper conductor.2 .3 GROUNDING ELECTRODESA. One-piece copper clad steel rods, minimum of 5/8-inch diameter by 8 feet long. Do not usemetallic rods coated with lacquer or other non conducting material. Where bedrock isencountered at less than 8 feet the ground rods shall be installed in accordance with NEC 250-53(G) and may be augmented with an additional rod per 250.56.2 .4 BONDING JUMPERSA. Bare copper. Main bonding jumpers for service entrance equipment shall be the size of groundingelectrode conductor which shall be sized according to NEC 250-66. Jumpers for interior wiringraceways and enclosures shall be sized according to NEC 250-66.2 .5 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORSA. Copper, sized according to NEC 250-122. If insulated wire is used, it shall be the same type asother wires in the circuit. See Section 16050 for color coding.2 .6 CONNECTORSA. Bronze, copper, or stainless steel according to UL 467-93.PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 GROUNDING CONDUCTORSA. Protect ground conductors exposed to damage in accordance with NEC 250-92. Bond metalraceway at both ends to the ground conductor.16060-105/08 GROUNDING

3 .2 GROUND RINGA. Install conductor at a minimum depth of 2-1/2 feet completely around transformer and connect toform a complete circle. Total length shall not be less than 20 feet.3 .3 MADE ELECTRODESA. For service grounding, provide two rods spaced minimum of 6 feet apart. Embed rods verticallyinto permanent moisture level or in accordance with NEC 250-53(B).3 .4 SERVICE GROUNDING AND BONDINGA. Service grounding and bonding exists at Panel MP. Only equipment grounding applies to thisinstallation.3 .5 EQUIPMENT GROUNDS AND BONDSA. Ground metallic raceway systems, enclosures and non-current-carrying metallic parts of electricalequipment. Enclosures and non-current-carrying metal parts are not considered grounded bycontact with grounded metallic raceway system. Install a separate ground wire in all feeder andbranch circuit raceway systems, both metallic and nonmetallic, to serve as the equipmentgrounding conductor. Ensure electrical continuity of raceway systems. Remove non-conductingcoatings where raceways connect to enclosures. Make raceway connections at enclosures tight toensure continuity. Supplement with jumpers, as needed. Provide bonding jumpers acrossexpansion joints and telescoping sections of metallic raceway. Establish continuity between outletboxes and receptacles using a bonding jumper except where surface mounted boxes or approvedground yokes are used. Do not use red lead, Teflon tape, or other non-conducting material atmetallic conduit joints before assembly.3 .6 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEMA. Grounding electrodes, including ground rings, metal underground water pipe and concreteencasedelectrodes, shall be bonded together to form the grounding electrode system at eachbuilding or structure served.3 .7 SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMSA. Ground separately derived systems, such as dry-type transformers, or auxiliary power units (APU)in accordance with NEC 250-30.3 .8 OTHER GROUNDING SYSTEMSA. If other grounding systems, such as for a lightning protection system, are present at or within 50feet of the building or structure served, bond the systems together with bare copper ground wire,sized to the larger of the two grounding electrode conductor sizes.3 .9 COMMON SERVICEA. When one service entrance serves more than one structure, provide a separate grounding electrodesystem for each structure in accordance with NEC 250-32. Connect grounding electrode systemto the electrical system neutral at each structure.END OF SECTION16060-205/08 GROUNDING

16060-305/08 GROUNDING

SECTION 16131ELECTRICAL PULLBOXESPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing underground electrical pullboxes atthe locations shown.1 .2 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Meet AASHTO requirements for H20 wheel loading.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 PULLBOXES AND MANHOLESA. Provide base and extensions as required to extend depth to allow level entry of conduit. Colorshall be natural concrete color.B. Pullboxes: Precast polymer concrete. Quazite, manufactured by Strongwell, Lenoir City,Tennessee 37771, or approved equal. Dimensions shall be as shown on the drawings.2 .2 COVERSA. Covers shall include pull slots. Covers shall be cast with identification logos as shown on thedrawings.B. Pullbox Covers: Nonskid surface design made of precast polymer concrete, with recessedstainless steel fasteners.2 .3 GROUTA. One part portland cement, one part hydrated lime, and six parts sand.PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONA. The number of pullboxes shown is a minimum number. The Contractor may install additionalpullboxes, for ease of installing cables, at no additional expense to the Government.3 .2 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLA. Section 02320.3 .3 INSTALLATION16131-1ELECTRICAL PULLBOXES

A. Set precast pullboxes on 6 inches of level, 90-percent compacted crushed rock, 3/4-inch to 1-inchsize, extending 12 inches on each side beyond edges of pullboxes.B. Set precast pullbox sections in grout, making watertight joints.C. Install top of pullboxes flush with adjacent soil or 1/4” below grade in paved areas.3 .4 CONDUITA. Terminate conduits entering pullboxes flush with interior walls, with bell shaped fittings for2-inch and larger conduit and bushings for conduit smaller than 2 inches. Grout in around allconduit entries.B. Provide explosion proof sealoff fittings on conduits terminating in pullboxes that originate fromClass 1, Division1 or Class 1, Division 2 locations.PART 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT4 .1 ELECTRICAL PULLBOXESA. Payment will be included in the bid items to which this work relates.END OF SECTION16131-2ELECTRICAL PULLBOXES

SECTION 16210ELECTRIC SERVICEPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing service entrance equipment,raceways, and conductors.1 .2 RELATED WORKA. Basic materials and methods - Section 16050B. Underground secondary - Section 16401.1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Requirements of the power company.1 .4 COORDINATIONA. The power company, Southern California Edison, is supplying permanent electric power of thephasing, voltage, and characteristics shown. Permanent electric power exists at existing panelMP.B. Coordinate the work of this section with the Contracting Officer.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 SERVICE RACEWAYA. Underground Beyond Well House Limits: Section 16050.B. Aboveground Within Well House: Section 16050.2 .2 SERVICE CONDUCTORSA. Stranded, with 600-volt insulation.B. All conductors shall be copper, THWN; aluminum is not acceptable.1. All terminations and connections shall be suitable for service entrance equipment.2 .3 SERVICE DISCONNECTA. UL listed as "Service Entrance Equipment", externally operable with open or closed positionplainly marked, pad-lockable and capable of interrupting the maximum symmetrical short circuitcurrent available. Provide pressure connectors for attaching service conductors. See Section16050 for panel boards, switches, and individually enclosed circuit breakers.16210-105/08 ELECTRIC SERVICE

2 .4 WIREWAYA. As shown. Formed from galvanized 14-gauge minimum sheet steel, complete with all fittings,plates, and closures; hinged latched covers. Rain tight wire way shall be provided with gasketedconduit hubs for top mounted equipment.2 .5 SECONDARY LIGHTNING PROTECTORA. Section 16050.PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 SERVICE CONDUCTORSA. Install service conductors without splices.3 .2 SERVICE DISCONNECTA. Install and ground in accordance with NEC and as shown.3 .3 WIREWAYA. Install the wire-way in accordance with NEC and as shown.3 .4 METERA. Utility Company KWH Meter is existing next to panel MP, no additional Utility Companymetering is required3 .5 CURRENT TRANSFORMERSA. No additional current transformers are required3 .6 TRANSFORMER AND EQUIPMENT PADSA. Construct pads as specified in Section 16050.3 .7 TRANSFORMERSA. Contractor to install transformers as shown and in accordance with manufacturer'srecommendations.END OF SECTION16210-205/08 ELECTRIC SERVICE

SECTION 16401UNDERGROUND SECONDARYPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing electrical wire and cable, notexceeding 600 volts.1 .2 RELATED WORKA. Basic materials and methods - Section 16050.B. Electric service - Section 16210.1 .3 SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01330.B. Catalog cuts for each type of wire, cable, and conduit.1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Meet requirements of local power company.1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Delivery: Deliver materials and equipment in manufacturer's original, unopened, protectivepackaging. Cable ends shall be sealed to prevent contamination and moisture infiltration.B. Storage: Store materials and equipment as directed, complying with manufacturer'srecommendations. Provide protection from the elements.C. Cable Handling: Handle cable, cable insulation, and conductors carefully to prevent damage bycutting, abrasion, and excessive bending.1 .6 COORDINATIONA. Before starting construction, field verify drawings and routing of distribution system withContracting Officer.B. Notify Contracting Officer two weeks before installing direct burial cable. Install direct burialcable in presence of Contracting Officer unless otherwise authorized in advance.C. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination with utility companies and for ensuring that allutilities for use in common trench are installed.16401-105/08 UNDERGROUND SECONDARY

1 .7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01770.B. Project record drawings showing exact locations of all cable repairs and splices.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 UNDERGROUND CONDUITA. Schedule 80 PVC per NEC, with PVC coated GRC elbows, unless otherwise shown.2 .2 DIRECT BURIAL CONDUCTORS/CABLEA. Direct burial cable is not allowed.2 .3 UNDERGROUND CONDUCTORS IN CONDUITA. Type THWN.2 .4 UNDERGROUND CONTROL WIRE IN CONDUITA. Type THWN.2 .5 DIRECT BURIAL CONTROL WIRE/CABLEA. Direct burial wire is not allowed.2 .6 BEDDING AND BACKFILL FOR DIRECT BURIAL CABLEA. Not used.2 .7 BEDDING AND BACKFILL FOR CONDUITA. As specified on Sheet C10 Detail 4.2 .8 SPLICE CONNECTORSA. Crimp type connector approved for use on type of cable installed. Splice connectors shall bewaterproof and capable of withstanding immersion in manholes for indefinite periods withoutfailure. Taped splices are not acceptable.2 .9 PULLBOXESA. As shown on the drawings and specified in Specification 16050 Paragraph 2.12.2 .10 GROUNDSA. Section 16060.16401-205/08 UNDERGROUND SECONDARY

PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 EXTENSIONS INTO EQUIPMENTA. Extend conduit wires and cables into packaged equipment at locations shown. Provide allconnections required.3 .2 CONDUITA. Section 16050.3 .3 PULLBOXESA. Section 16050.3.4 CABLE INSPECTIONA. Carefully inspect cable during handling to verify that the cable is free from visible defects. Reportall cable damage to Contracting Officer, whether prior to installation, during installation, ordiscovered by test. Repair cable promptly, as recommended by manufacturer and as approved byContracting Officer.3 .4 CABLE SLACK AND BENDSA. Leave minimum 24 inches of excess cable at all risers, transformer pads, pedestals, andtermination points.B. The minimum acceptable bending radius, measured to the surface of the cable on the inside of thebend, is 12 times the overall diameter of the cable. No cable bends shall be made within 12 inchesof a splice or termination.3 .5 CABLE SPLICESA. Make splices in accordance with the splice connector manufacturer's instructions.B. Not more than one splice will be permitted for each 2,000 feet of cable installed unless authorizedby Contracting Officer.C. Show exact location of all splices on project record drawings.3 .6 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLINGA. Section 02221.END OF SECTION16401-305/08 UNDERGROUND SECONDARY

SECTION 16420CONTROL SYSTEMPART 1 – GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of relocating and installing an ultrasonic tank level transmitterfrom 5,000 gallon poly tank to the new steel tank.1 .2 SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01330.B. Shop drawing showing layout of equipment.C. Schematic (elementary or ladder) diagram and wiring (connection) diagram for the tank level andremote indicator. See Section 16050.1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Section 16010. Control circuits shall meet the requirements of NEC 430 and 725, and NEMAICS-1970.1 .4 COORDINATIONA. Components for like equipment shall be of the same manufacturer where possible.1 .5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01770.B. Operation and maintenance data for review and approval as required by Section 01785.1. Manufacturer’s operation and maintenance data for all controls.2. Complete list of materials for all control components.3. Vendor furnished as-built drawings of all control circuits.PART 2 – PRODUCTS2.1 NOT USEDPART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 CONTROL DEVICESA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.16420-105/08 CONTROL SYSTEM

3.2 INSTRUMENT CALIBRATIONA. The contractor shall provide the services of a factory trained instrument technician, tools andequipment to field calibrate each instrument to its specified accuracy in accordance with themanufacturer’s specifications and instructions for calibration. Each instrument shall be calibratedat 10 percent, 50 percent and 90 percent of span using test instruments to simulate inputs and readoutputs that are rated to an accuracy of at least five times greater than the specified accuracy ofthe instrument being calibrated. Provide a written report to the Contracting Officer on eachinstrument certifying that it has been calibrated to its published specified accuracy. This reportshall include a listing of the published specified accuracy, permissible tolerance at each point ofcalibration, calibration reading as finally adjusted within tolerances, defects noted, correctiveaction required and correction made.3.3 SYSTEM TEST AND DEMONSTRATIONA. Upon completion of entire control system, contractor shall perform tests of all power and controlsystems in the presence of the Contracting Officer to demonstrate proper operation of all systems.Arrange with the Park to provide demonstrations of all system operations for all persons of theParks choosing. Tests shall show that all electrical and control systems are clean, faultless, andfree from mechanical and electrical defects. The contractor shall provide one-half day of start-upassistance after acceptance of the work by a qualified instrumentation engineer to insure that theParks operating personnel are properly trained in the system operation.3.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALSA. Furnish number of copies as required by Section 01785, including system operating description,as-built drawings, catalog cuts, installation instruction, maintenance instructions, andreplacement part list for all control systems and equipment. Provide address and telephonenumber of local source for parts and maintenance.3.5 RECORD DRAWINGSA. Maintain a complete set of Record Electrical Drawings at the site with all changes, etc. markedneatly thereon in a contrasting color. This set shall not be used for any other purpose. Keep theDrawings current at all times and present them to the Contracting Officer upon completion of thework. Record electrical drawings should provide the following information:1. Correct plan location of equipment installed.2. One-line diagram and panel board corrections.3. Detail wiring diagram of all electrical equipment installed. Diagrams shall show the sizeand color of the wire, wire number, and terminal block number.4. The manufacturer’s catalog number or part numbers shall be included for all equipmentinstalled.B. This information shall be incorporated in a neatly drafted and legible format as part of theoperating and maintenance manuals.END OF SECTION16420-205/08 CONTROL SYSTEM

SECTION 16420MOTOR CONTROLSPART 1 GENERAL1 .1 DESCRIPTIONA. The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing motor controls, starters, disconnects,and protective devices for all motor controls not part of an equipment package.1 .2 SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01330.B. Manufacturer's literature and installation recommendations for the following:1. Motor starters, with overload size selection tables.2. Indicating lamps.3. Disconnect switches, fusible and nonfusible.C. Schematic (elementary or ladder) diagram and wiring (connection) diagram for each controlsystem. See Section 16050.1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Section 16010. Motor control circuits shall meet the requirements of NEC 430 and 725, andNEMA ICS-1970.1 .4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. As specified in Section 01770.B. Operation and maintenance data for review and approval as required by Section 01785.1. Complete list of materials for all motor control components.2. Vendor furnished as-built drawings of all motor control circuits.PART 2 PRODUCTS2 .1 MOTOR STARTERSA. General: Size for the motor unless a larger size starter is shown. Minimum motor starter sizeshall be NEMA Size 1. Provide NEMA type enclosures intended for the specific starters.1. Overload Protection: For all starters, provide integral overload protection, manual resettype, standard, slow, or quick-trip, depending on the application. Overload devices incontrollers may be either melting alloy or bimetallic type. Hermetically sealed motors,submersible motors, and other motors with low endurance to locked rotor current shall be16420-1MOTOR CONTROLS

protected as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. Provide three-phase motorswith overload protection in each phase to open all phases upon overload in any phase.Provide protection for each winding in multispeed motors. In rating overload devices, useactual nameplate value of motor current.2. Overcurrent Protection: Provide all motors with overcurrent protection, sized inaccordance with NEC. Overcurrents shall open all ungrounded conductors upon trippingof the overcurrent device in any phase. Use circuit breakers unless otherwise shown.Where overcurrent protection is integral with starter, provide door mounted operatinghandle.B. Magnetic Starters: Solenoid operated, non-reversing type. Contacts shall be nonwelding andself-cleaning. Provide with auxiliary contacts as shown, or furnish extra relays to provide thesecontacts. Provide each starter with a minimum of two spare convertible auxiliary contacts. Sealcoils against damage and contaminants. Components shall be front-accessible for ease ofmaintenance.1. Control voltages shall not exceed 120 volts unless otherwise shown. Where controlvoltages are supplied from separate source, provide control voltage disconnect at theequipment as required by NEC 430.113.2. Unless otherwise shown, provide each magnetic starter with door or cover mountedexternally accessible, hand-off-automatic switch, overload reset, and running light.2 .2 MOTOR DISCONNECTSA. NEC 430H. Unfused safety switch per Section 16050. All disconnects for outdoor or wetlocations shall have NEMA 3R enclosures. Where controller and disconnect are together, providecombination starter.2 .3 CONTROLSA. The control voltages from 240- and 480-volt buses shall be provided by 240- to 120-volt or 480-to 120-volt control transformer. The control circuits shall be protected with fuses in both theprimary and secondary circuits of the control transformer.B. Provide combination starters with H-O-A switches mounted on front of cabinet.PART 3 EXECUTION3 .1 MOTOR CONTROLLERA. Install in accordance with NEC 430G. Where combined with overload or overcurrent protection,the controller shall also meet NEC 430H requirements.3 .2 MOTOR DISCONNECTSA. Install in accordance with NEC 430 and safety switches, Section 16050.3 .3 MOTOR OVERLOAD PROTECTIONA. Check overload devices for proper size, considering nameplate full-load current rating, servicefactor, and ambient temperature if motor is in different ambient temperature than controller.16420-2MOTOR CONTROLS

PART 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT4 .1 MOTOR CONTROLSA. Payment will be included in the bid item to which this work relates.END OF SECTION16420-3MOTOR CONTROLS